Technology, Engineering & Agriculture Books

a huge range and FREE tracked UK delivery on ALL orders.

Read more less

Book SynopsisComputational Intelligence: Synergies of Fuzzy Logic, Neural Networks and Evolutionary Computing presents an introduction to some of the cutting edge technological paradigms under the umbrella of computational intelligence. Computational intelligence schemes are investigated with the development of a suitable framework for fuzzy logic, neural networks and evolutionary computing, neuro-fuzzy systems, evolutionary-fuzzy systems and evolutionary neural systems. Applications to linear and non-linear systems are discussed with examples. Key features: Covers all the aspects of fuzzy, neural and evolutionary approaches with worked out examples, MATLAB exercises and applications in each chapter Presents the synergies of technologies of computational intelligence such as evolutionary fuzzy neural fuzzy and evolutionary neural systems Considers real world problems in the domain of systems modelling, control and optimization Contains a foreTable of ContentsForeword xiii Preface xv Acknowledgements xix 1 Introduction to Computational Intelligence 1 1.1 Computational Intelligence 1 1.2 Paradigms of Computational Intelligence 2 1.3 Approaches to Computational Intelligence 3 1.4 Synergies of Computational Intelligence Techniques 11 1.5 Applications of Computational Intelligence 12 1.6 Grand Challenges of Computational Intelligence 13 1.7 Overview of the Book 13 1.8 MATLAB R _ Basics 14 References 15 2 Introduction to Fuzzy Logic 19 2.1 Introduction 19 2.2 Fuzzy Logic 20 2.3 Fuzzy Sets 21 2.4 Membership Functions 22 2.5 Features of MFs 27 2.6 Operations on Fuzzy Sets 29 2.7 Linguistic Variables 33 2.8 Linguistic Hedges 35 2.9 Fuzzy Relations 37 2.10 Fuzzy If–Then Rules 39 2.11 Fuzzification 43 2.12 Defuzzification 44 2.13 Inference Mechanism 48 2.14 Worked Examples 54 2.15 MATLAB R _ Programs 61 References 61 3 Fuzzy Systems and Applications 65 3.1 Introduction 65 3.2 Fuzzy System 66 3.3 Fuzzy Modelling 67 3.4 Fuzzy Control 75 3.5 Design of Fuzzy Controller 81 3.6 Modular Fuzzy Controller 97 3.7 MATLAB R _ Programs 99 References 100 4 Neural Networks 103 4.1 Introduction 103 4.2 Artificial Neuron Model 106 4.3 Activation Functions 107 4.4 Network Architecture 108 4.5 Learning in Neural Networks 124 4.6 Recurrent Neural Networks 149 4.7 MATLAB R _ Programs 155 References 156 5 Neural Systems and Applications 159 5.1 Introduction 159 5.2 System Identification and Control 160 5.3 Neural Networks for Control 163 5.4 MATLAB R _ Programs 179 References 180 6 Evolutionary Computing 183 6.1 Introduction 183 6.2 Evolutionary Computing 183 6.3 Terminologies of Evolutionary Computing 185 6.4 Genetic Operators 194 6.5 Performance Measures of EA 208 6.6 Evolutionary Algorithms 209 6.7 MATLAB R _ Programs 234 References 235 7 Evolutionary Systems 239 7.1 Introduction 239 7.2 Multi-objective Optimization 243 7.3 Co-evolution 250 7.4 Parallel Evolutionary Algorithm 256 References 262 8 Evolutionary Fuzzy Systems 265 8.1 Introduction 265 8.2 Evolutionary Adaptive Fuzzy Systems 267 8.3 Objective Functions and Evaluation 287 8.4 Fuzzy Adaptive Evolutionary Algorithms 290 References 303 9 Evolutionary Neural Networks 307 9.1 Introduction 307 9.2 Supportive Combinations 309 9.3 Collaborative Combinations 318 9.4 Amalgamated Combination 343 9.5 Competing Conventions 345 References 351 10 Neural Fuzzy Systems 357 10.1 Introduction 357 10.2 Combination of Neural and Fuzzy Systems 359 10.3 Cooperative Neuro-Fuzzy Systems 360 10.4 Concurrent Neuro-Fuzzy Systems 369 10.5 Hybrid Neuro-Fuzzy Systems 369 10.6 Adaptive Neuro-Fuzzy System 404 10.7 Fuzzy Neurons 409 10.8 MATLAB R _ Programs 411 References 412 Appendix A: MATLAB R _ Basics 415 Appendix B: MATLAB R _ Programs for Fuzzy Logic 433 Appendix C: MATLAB R _ Programs for Fuzzy Systems 443 Appendix D: MATLAB R _ Programs for Neural Systems 461 Appendix E: MATLAB R _ Programs for Neural Control Design 473 Appendix F: MATLAB R _ Programs for Evolutionary Algorithms 489 Appendix G: MATLAB R _ Programs for Neuro-Fuzzy Systems 497 Index 507

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsPreface to the Second Edition xiii Preface to the First Edition: Why Thermodynamics? xv Acknowledgments xxi Notes for Instructors xxiii List of Variables xxv I Historical Roots: From Heat Engines to Cosmology 1 Basic Concepts and the Laws of Gases 3 Introduction 3 1.1 Thermodynamic Systems 4 1.2 Equilibrium and Nonequilibrium Systems 6 1.3 Biological and Other Open Systems 8 1.4 Temperature, Heat and Quantitative Laws of Gases 9 1.5 States of Matter and the van der Waals Equation 17 1.6 An Introduction to the Kinetic Theory of Gases 24 Appendix 1.1 Partial Derivatives 32 Appendix 1.2 Elementary Concepts in Probability Theory 33 Appendix 1.3 Mathematica Codes 34 References 39 Examples 39 Exercises 41 2 The First Law of Thermodynamics 45 The Idea of Energy Conservation Amidst New Discoveries 45 2.1 The Nature of Heat 46 2.2 The First Law of Thermodynamics: The Conservation of Energy 50 2.3 Elementary Applications of the First Law 57 2.4 Thermochemistry: Conservation of Energy in Chemical Reactions 61 2.5 Extent of Reaction: A State Variable for Chemical Systems 68 2.6 Conservation of Energy in Nuclear Reactions and Some General Remarks 69 2.7 Energy Flows and Organized States 71 Appendix 2.1 Mathematica Codes 79 Appendix 2.2 Energy Flow in the USA for the Year 2013 79 References 82 Examples 82 Exercises 85 3 The Second Law of Thermodynamics and the Arrow of Time 89 3.1 The Birth of the Second Law 89 3.2 The Absolute Scale of Temperature 96 3.3 The Second Law and the Concept of Entropy 99 3.4 Modern Formulation of the Second Law 104 3.5 Examples of Entropy Changes due to Irreversible Processes 112 3.6 Entropy Changes Associated with Phase Transformations 114 3.7 Entropy of an Ideal Gas 115 3.8 Remarks about the Second Law and Irreversible Processes 116 Appendix 3.1 The Hurricane as a Heat Engine 117 Appendix 3.2 Entropy Production in Continuous Systems 120 References 121 Examples 122 Exercises 123 4 Entropy in the Realm of Chemical Reactions 125 4.1 Chemical Potential and Affinity: The Thermodynamic Force for Chemical Reactions 125 4.2 General Properties of Affinity 132 4.3 Entropy Production Due to Diffusion 135 4.4 General Properties of Entropy 136 Appendix 4.1 Thermodynamics Description of Diffusion 138 References 139 Example 139 Exercises 140 II Equilibrium Thermodynamics 5 Extremum Principles and General Thermodynamic Relations 145 Extremum Principles in Nature 145 5.1 Extremum Principles Associated with the Second Law 145 5.2 General Thermodynamic Relations 153 5.3 Gibbs Energy of Formation and Chemical Potential 156 5.4 Maxwell Relations 159 5.5 Extensivity with Respect to N and Partial Molar Quantities 160 5.6 Surface Tension 162 References 165 Examples 165 Exercises 166 6 Basic Thermodynamics of Gases, Liquids and Solids 169 Introduction 169 6.1 Thermodynamics of Ideal Gases 169 6.2 Thermodynamics of Real Gases 172 6.3 Thermodynamics Quantities for Pure Liquids and Solids 180 Reference 183 Examples 183 Exercises 184 7 Thermodynamics of Phase Change 187 Introduction 187 7.1 Phase Equilibrium and Phase Diagrams 187 7.2 The Gibbs Phase Rule and Duhem’s Theorem 192 7.3 Binary and Ternary Systems 194 7.4 Maxwell’s Construction and the Lever Rule 198 7.5 Phase Transitions 201 References 203 Examples 203 Exercises 204 8 Thermodynamics of Solutions 207 8.1 Ideal and Nonideal Solutions 207 8.2 Colligative Properties 211 8.3 Solubility Equilibrium 217 8.4 Thermodynamic Mixing and Excess Functions 222 8.5 Azeotropy 225 References 225 Examples 225 Exercises 227 9 Thermodynamics of Chemical Transformations 231 9.1 Transformations of Matter 231 9.2 Chemical Reaction Rates 232 9.3 Chemical Equilibrium and the Law of Mass Action 239 9.4 The Principle of Detailed Balance 243 9.5 Entropy Production due to Chemical Reactions 245 9.6 Elementary Theory of Chemical Reaction Rates 248 9.7 Coupled Reactions and Flow Reactors 251 Appendix 9.1 Mathematica Codes 256 References 260 Examples 260 Exercises 261 10 Fields and Internal Degrees of Freedom 265 The Many Faces of Chemical Potential 265 10.1 Chemical Potential in a Field 265 10.2 Membranes and Electrochemical Cells 270 10.3 Isothermal Diffusion 277 10.4 Chemical Potential for an Internal Degree of Freedom 281 References 284 Examples 284 Exercises 285 11 Thermodynamics of Radiation 287 Introduction 287 11.1 Energy Density and Intensity of Thermal Radiation 287 11.2 The Equation of State 291 11.3 Entropy and Adiabatic Processes 293 11.4 Wien’s Theorem 295 11.5 Chemical Potential of Thermal Radiation 296 11.6 Matter–Antimatter in Equilibrium with Thermal Radiation: The State of Zero Chemical Potential 297 11.7 Chemical Potential of Radiation not in Thermal Equilibrium with Matter 299 11.8 Entropy of Nonequilibrium Radiation 300 References 302 Example 302 Exercises 302 III Fluctuations and Stability 12 The Gibbs Stability Theory 307 12.1 Classical Stability Theory 307 12.2 Thermal Stability 308 12.3 Mechanical Stability 309 12.4 Stability and Fluctuations in Nk 310 References 313 Exercises 313 13 Critical Phenomena and Configurational Heat Capacity 315 Introduction 315 13.1 Stability and Critical Phenomena 315 13.2 Stability and Critical Phenomena in Binary Solutions 317 13.3 Configurational Heat Capacity 320 Further Reading 321 Exercises 321 14 Entropy Production, Fluctuations and Small Systems 323 14.1 Stability and Entropy Production 323 14.2 Thermodynamic Theory of Fluctuations 326 14.3 Small Systems 331 14.4 Size-Dependent Properties 333 14.5 Nucleation 336 References 339 Example 339 Exercises 340 IV Linear Nonequilibrium Thermodynamics 15 Nonequilibrium Thermodynamics: The Foundations 343 15.1 Local Equilibrium 343 15.2 Local Entropy Production 345 15.3 Balance Equation for Concentration 346 15.4 Energy Conservation in Open Systems 348 15.5 The Entropy Balance Equation 351 Appendix 15.1 Entropy Production 354 References 356 Exercises 356 16 Nonequilibrium Thermodynamics: The Linear Regime 357 16.1 Linear Phenomenological Laws 357 16.2 Onsager Reciprocal Relations and the Symmetry Principle 359 16.3 Thermoelectric Phenomena 363 16.4 Diffusion 366 16.5 Chemical Reactions 371 16.6 Heat Conduction in Anisotropic Solids 375 16.7 Electrokinetic Phenomena and the Saxen Relations 377 16.8 Thermal Diffusion 379 References 382 Further Reading 382 Exercises 383 17 Nonequilibrium Stationary States and Their Stability: Linear Regime 385 17.1 Stationary States under Nonequilibrium Conditions 385 17.2 The Theorem of Minimum Entropy Production 391 17.3 Time Variation of Entropy Production and the Stability of Stationary States 398 References 400 Exercises 400 V Order Through Fluctuations 18 Nonlinear Thermodynamics 405 18.1 Far-from-Equilibrium Systems 405 18.2 General Properties of Entropy Production 405 18.3 Stability of Nonequilibrium Stationary States 407 18.4 Linear Stability Analysis 411 Appendix 18.1 A General Property of dFP/dt 415 Appendix 18.2 General Expression for the Time Derivative of 𝛿 2S 416 References 418 Exercises 418 19 Dissipative Structures 421 19.1 The Constructive Role of Irreversible Processes 421 19.2 Loss of Stability, Bifurcation and Symmetry Breaking 421 19.3 Chiral Symmetry Breaking and Life 424 19.4 Chemical Oscillations 431 19.5 Turing Structures and Propagating Waves 436 19.6 Dissipative Structures and Machines 440 19.7 Structural Instability and Biochemical Evolution 441 Appendix 19.1 Mathematica Codes 442 References 447 Further Reading 448 Exercises 449 20 Elements of Statistical Thermodynamics 451 Introduction 451 20.1 Fundamentals and Overview 452 20.2 Partition Function Factorization 454 20.3 The Boltzmann Probability Distribution and Average Values 456 20.4 Microstates, Entropy and the Canonical Ensemble 457 20.5 Canonical Partition Function and Thermodynamic Quantities 460 20.6 Calculating Partition Functions 461 20.7 Equilibrium Constants 467 20.8 Heat Capacities of Solids 469 20.9 Planck’s Distribution Law for Thermal Radiation 472 Appendix 20.1 Approximations and Integrals 474 Reference 475 Example 475 Exercises 475 21 Self-Organization and Dissipative Structures in Nature 477 21.1 Dissipative Structures in Diverse Disciplines 477 21.2 Towards a Thermodynamic Theory of Organisms 483 References 485 Epilogue 487 Physical Constants and Data 489 Standard Thermodynamic Properties 491 Energy Units and Conversions 501 Answers to Exercises 503 Author Index 511 Subject Index 513

Read more less

Book SynopsisDiscover how to butcher your own meat and make homemade sausage With interest in a back-to-basics approach to food on the rise, more and more people are becoming interested in butchering their own meat and making high-quality, preservative-free sausages. With easy-to-follow instructions and illustrations, Butchery & Sausage-Making For Dummies offers readers a look at how to butcher poultry, rabbit, beef, pork, lamb, and goats. The book will also explore sausage-making, with tips and recipes, and will look at preserving meat through curing and smoking. Offers natural, healthier alternatives for sausages and preserved meats for people wary of processed foods Provides helpful tips and guidance for home cooks and beginner butchers Provides needed guidance for those looking to explore this long-overlooked profession Butchery & Sausage Making For Dummies is an invaluable resource for home cooks interested in being mTable of ContentsIntroduction 1 About This Book 1 Conventions Used in This Book 2 What You’re Not to Read 2 Foolish Assumptions 3 How This Book is Organized 3 Part I: Time to Meet Your Meat! 3 Part II: Poultry, Rabbit, and Lamb Butchery 4 Part III: Pork Butchery 4 Part IV: Beef Butchery 4 Part V: Sausage-Making and Using the Whole Animal 4 Part VI: The Part of Tens 5 Icons Used in This Book 5 Where to Go from Here 5 Part I: Time to Meet Your Meat! 7 Chapter 1: The Butchery Room 9 Understanding the Importance of Ye Ol’ Butcher Shoppe 10 Identifying what butchers do 11 Patronizing your local shop 14 Assuming the Role of Butcher in Your Own Home 14 Knowledge and equipment you need 15 The benefits of butchering your own meat 15 Preserving Traditions: Sausage-Making and Other Preservation Methods 17 Making sausage 17 Other preservation techniques 19 Promoting Healthy Food Systems 19 Chapter 2: Meat is Meat, Right? Wrong! 21 Knowing What You’re Getting 21 You say “tomato”; I say “porcupine” — Playing the name game 22 Think cooking instead of cutting 22 Deciphering labels 24 Focusing on Flavor 26 The amount and kind of fat 26 The age of the animal 28 The meat’s grade 28 Whether the meat is dry or wet aged 29 Ensuring you get the best flavor 30 Broadening Your Definition of “Good” 31 Chapter 3: Cuts and Terminology: The Basics of Butchery 33 Breaking It Down the Easy Way: Meat Maps 34 Making Heads or Tails of Butchery Terminology 36 Keeping track of body parts and positions 36 Understanding cut terminology 38 Breaking news: Bench (or table) or hanging 38 Sourcing the Freshest Cuts from the Supplier or Meat Counter 39 Finding a reputable supplier 39 Judging freshness at the meat counter 40 Identifying standard and specialty cuts 41 Substituting Cuts in Recipe Planning 41 Braising, slow cooking cuts 41 Grilling or quick-searing cuts 42 Roasting cuts 43 Chapter 4: Basic Knife Skills, Tools, and Techniques 45 Knives, Mallets, and More: Gathering Your Butchery Tools 46 The essential cutting implements 46 Other necessary items 48 Useful but nonessential items 49 Making Confident and Fluid Cuts: Basic Grips and Posture 49 Get a grip! Holding your knife properly 50 Maintaining good posture 52 Special Techniques Every Butcher Should Know 53 Denuding 53 Cutting steaks 54 Frenching 55 Butterflying 56 Cubing meats for braising 58 Being Safe While Using Sharp Pointy Metal Tools 58 Part II: Poultry, Rabbit, and Lamb Butchery 61 Chapter 5: Duck, Duck, Goose, Chickens: Starting with Poultry 63 A Word about Cutting Up Birds 64 Getting familiar with poultry musculature 65 Basic chicken-butchering tools and techniques 66 Pieces of Eight: Cutting Up a Fryer 67 Removing the head and feet 67 Removing the wings 68 Removing the legs 69 Cutting out the spine 70 Splitting the breast 72 Dividing the legs into two pieces 73 Finishing up 73 Cutting the Chicken into Five Equal Portions 74 Freeing the oysters 74 Removing the legs and spine 75 Sectioning the wing portions 76 Making Boneless, Skinless Chicken Pieces 77 Removing the skin 77 Cutting up the skinned chicken 78 Deboning the breast 78 Deboning the thigh and drumsticks 79 Impressing Your Neighbors: Boneless Chicken Halves 81 Chapter 6: What’s Up, Doc? Rascally Rabbits! 85 Cutting Up Fryers and Roasters 85 Removing the offal and silver skin 86 Removing the back legs 87 Removing the front legs 88 Cutting through the ribs 88 Removing the pelvis 90 Sectioning the saddle 90 Portioning the loin 91 Finishing up the rack 92 Deboning the Rabbit 93 Removing the rib cage 94 Cutting out the skeleton 95 Removing the leg bones 96 Removing the arm bones 97 Chapter 7: Baaaaack to Basics: Lamb and Goat Butchery 99 Getting to Know Your Little Bovids 99 The lowdown on lamb 100 Getting (to know) your goat 100 Covering Lamb and Goat Butchery Basics 101 On the bench or on the hook? 101 The cuts 101 Dealing with the Neck/Shoulder 104 Slicing the Skirt Free 105 Removing the Flank 106 Two Tasks in One: Removing the Breast and Foreshank 107 Removing the foreshank 107 Removing the breast 108 Removing the Hindshanks 109 Using a saw to remove the hindshank 109 Using a boning knife to remove the hindshank 110 Removing the Shoulder 111 The Leg 112 Removing the legs from the loin 112 Sawing the legs in two 114 Working with the Rib 115 Separating the rib from the loin 115 Chining the rib 116 Cutting Denver ribs 118 Portioning the rib chops 118 The Loin 119 Part III: Pork Butchery 121 Chapter 8: Porky Pig: Understanding the Beast 123 Pork and Pigs: Getting to Know the Beast 124 Pork production 125 Weighty matters: Making sense of pork poundage 125 Pork’s USDA identification categories 125 Fundamentals of Pork Butchery 126 Inspecting the carcass 126 Paying attention to safety issues 127 Getting Familiar with Pig Primals, Subprimals, and Retail Cuts 127 First and second cuts: Primals and subprimals 127 The retail cuts 129 Chapter 9: Pork: Cutting It Up 133 A Bit of Advice before You Begin 133 Removing the Head 134 Removing the Front Trotters (Feet) 136 Removing the trotters with your boning knife 136 Removing the trotters by sawing 137 Removing the Foreshanks 138 Splitting the Breast-plate 139 Dealing with the Shoulders 140 Removing the shoulders 140 Splitting the shoulders in two 142 Trim work: Cleaning up the shoulder 143 Removing the Hind Trotters 143 Sectioning the Legs from the Loin 144 Freeing the legs from the belly 144 Separating the loin from the legs 145 Sawing the legs in two 146 Removing the Pork Skirt Steaks 147 Cutting the Belly from the Loin 148 Chapter 10: Moving into Pork Subprimals 151 From the Shoulder: The Boston Butt and Pork Shoulder (Picnic) 152 Separating the Boston butt from the picnic 152 Making retails cuts from the picnic 156 Producing Retails Cuts from the Loin 158 Cutting center loin chops 158 Boneless loin roast and chops 161 Baby back ribs 164 Removing the tenderloin 165 Porterhouse or T-bone steaks 166 Getting Great Cuts from the Leg (or Ham) 167 Spareribs from the Pork Belly 169 Trimming Meat for Grind 170 Part IV: Beef Butchery 173 Chapter 11: What’s Your Beef? Understanding the Cuts 175 The Lowdown on Beef Butchery 175 Muscles matter! Paying attention to beef musculature 176 Maximizing flavor and tenderness 177 Playing it safe 178 Dividing Up the Task: Primals, Subprimals, and Retail Cuts 178 Forequarter and hindquarter primals and subprimals 179 The retail cuts 180 Chapter 12: Beef: The Forequarter 185 Breaking the Forequarter: The Basics 185 Fashioning a hook and rail 186 Cutting on the rail 187 Removing the Outside Skirt (Rail) 189 Separating Out the Chuck, Arm, and Brisket from the Plate and Rib (Rail) 190 Step 1: Marking the chuck and rib 191 Step 2: Separating the rib from the chuck 192 Step 3: Scoring the brisket 193 Step 4: Removing the arm from the chuck 193 Step 5: Removing the brisket 195 Step 6: Removing the neck meat and atlas joint 196 Step 7: Removing the flat iron 197 Step 8: Removing the chuck 198 Squaring Up the Chuck Short Ribs (Rail) 199 Sectioning the Rib from the Plate (Rail) 201 Trimming the Brisket (Bench) 202 Trimming the Flat Iron (Bench) 203 Removing the Foreshank (Bench) 205 Cutting the foreshank from the arm 205 Osso bucco 206 The Arm/Shoulder Clod (Bench) 206 Removing the arm bone 207 Extracting the petite filet 208 Preparing a cross rib roast 209 Tying the arm roast 210 The Rib and Bone-in Ribeye Steaks (Bench) 210 Cutting bone-in rib eyes 210 Frenching the bone-in rib eye 211 Chuck Short Ribs (Bench) 212 Fabricating the chuck roll 212 Seaming out the mock tender 213 Removing the neck and spine 214 The last stages of the chuck 216 On the Bench: The Plate 217 Removing the inside skirt 217 Cutting the short ribs 217 Cleaning the breastbones 219 Chapter 13: Beef: The Hindquarter 221 Breaking the Hindquarter: The Basics 221 Removing the Elephant Ear (Rail) 223 Pulling the Cod Fat (Rail) 224 Dealing with the Flank 225 Removing the flank (rail) 225 Freeing the flank steak (bench) 226 Pulling the Tri-Tip (Rail) 227 Removing the Full Loin (Rail) 228 Removing and Portioning the Round (Rail) 230 Removing the knuckle from the round 230 Cutting the top sirloin free from the round 231 Removing the gooseneck (bottom round) 233 Cutting the Full Loin Down (Bench) 234 Removing the flank from the full loin 234 Seaming out the inside skirt 235 Seaming out the bottom sirloin flap (bavette steak) 236 Cutting the Tri-Tip Free (Bench) 237 Separating the Short Loin from the Sirloin (Bench) 238 Taking Care of the Top Sirloin (Bench) 239 Removing the head filet 239 Deboning the top sirloin 240 Cutting Steaks from the Short Loin (Bench) 241 Cutting bone-in steaks 242 Frenching the bone-in steaks 242 Producing Osso Bucco from the Hindshank (Bench) 243 Part V: Sausage-Making and Using the Whole Animal 245 Chapter 14: Setting Yourself Up for Sausage 247 Gathering the Right Equipment 247 Thinking about your sausage-making needs 248 Choosing a grinder 248 Looking at mixers 249 Have stuffer, will sausage 251 Other essentials 252 A word about casings 252 Picking from a Plethora of Sausages 254 Common sausage flavor combos 254 Types of sausages 255 Chapter 15: Sausage-Making Techniques 257 Getting in Touch with Your Inner Nerd: Sausage Science 257 Using quality ingredients 258 Getting the right amount of moisture 258 Achieving the right texture 259 Ensuring a good bind 259 Using the proper technique 260 Fermented sausages and guarding against botulism 261 Making Sausage: The Basic Steps 262 Gathering your ingredients 262 Preparing the meat for grinding 264 Chilling the meat before grinding and mixing 265 Grinding and mixing your sausage 265 Stuffing the sausage into the casing 268 Tying the knot: Linking and drying sausages 269 Hanging your links to dry 270 Storing Your Sausage 271 Chapter 16: Scrumptious Sausage Recipes 273 Chicken and Rabbit Sausage 274 Beef Sausage 280 Pork Sausage 285 Lamb and Goat Sausage 294 Chapter 17: Processing Techniques: The Good Kind 299 Whole-Muscle Curing 299 Following the general process 300 Identifying the equipment you need 301 Ensuring safe curing practices 302 Time for the cure 303 Smoke ’Em If You Got ’Em 305 Gathering (or building) your equipment 305 Choosing your wood chips 306 Smoking tips 307 Making bacon 307 From Scraps to Elegant Dining: Pâté, Terrines, and More 307 Making a meat paste: Pâtés 308 Creating scrumptious layers: Terrines 308 Upping the elegance factor: Galantines 309 Stocks and Sauces: It’s All Gravy, Baby 309 The secrets to a solid stock 310 Whipping up a hearty sauce 311 Praise the Lard, Save the Fats 312 Part VI: The Part of Tens 313 Chapter 18: Top Ten Mistakes to Avoid When Butchering 315 Keeping a Messy Workspace 315 Letting Your Meat Get Warm 316 Not Following the Separation of Time or Space Rule 316 Not Watching Your Posture 316 Improperly Storing Your Meat 317 Letting Your Knives Get Dull 318 Wasting Perfectly Useful Scrap 318 Rushing through the Process 318 Being Careless or Distracted 319 Being Fearful 319 Chapter 19: Top Ten Grilling Cuts 321 Chicken — The Whole Thing, Every Last Part 321 Ribs, Any Kind 322 Hamburgers, That Glorious Staple 322 Show Me Some Leg, Lamb 323 Flat Steaks and Their Three-Dimensional Flavor 323 Pork Chops — Brine and Shine 324 Flat Iron, a Butchers’ Discovery 324 Lamb Saratoga, a Treasure Seeker’s Prize 324 Strip Steak, America’s Sweetheart 325 The Rib Eye — There, I’ve Said It 325 Chapter 20: Ten Sssshhhhausage-Making Secrets 327 Keep It Cool 327 Keep It Clean 328 Keep Notes 328 Grind It Right 328 Get in the Mix 329 Test the Texture and Taste 329 Hone Your Stuffing Technique 330 Practice Linking Tricks 331 Store the Sausage Properly 331 Use Quality Seasonings 331 Index 333

Read more less

Book SynopsisAlready renowned as a user-friendly beginners guide to soil science, Soil Science Simplified, 6th Edition is an updated version of the beloved textbook that includes even more thorough applications of soil science to interdisciplinary fields.Table of ContentsPreface vii 1 Introduction to Soil 1 2 Soil Formation 7 3 Soil Physical Properties 23 4 Soil Biological Properties 35 5 Soil Chemical Properties 57 6 Soil Water 77 7 Soil Temperature 95 8 Soil Fertility and Plant Nutrition 107 9 Soil Management 145 10 Soil Conservation and the Environment 159 11 Conservation Agriculture 175 12 Soil Classification and Surveys 187 13 Soil and Its Uses 223 Glossary 243 Index 255

Read more less

Book SynopsisCombines aspects of engineering seismology, structural and geotechnical earthquake engineering to assemble the vital components required for a deep understanding of response of structures to earthquake ground motion: from the seismic source to the evaluation of actions and deformation required for design.Table of ContentsPreface xi Foreword xii Acknowledgements xiii Introduction xiv List of Abbreviations xix List of Symbols xxii 1 Earthquake Characteristics 1 1.1 Causes of Earthquakes 1 1.1.1 Plate Tectonics Theory 1 1.1.2 Faulting 7 1.1.3 Seismic Waves 11 1.2 Measuring Earthquakes 17 1.2.1 Intensity 17 1.2.2 Magnitude 21 1.2.3 Intensity–Magnitude Relationships 26 1.3 Source]to]Site Effects 29 1.3.1 Directional Effects 30 1.3.2 Site Effects 32 1.3.3 Dispersion and Incoherence 35 1.4 Effects of Earthquakes 36 1.4.1 Damage to Buildings and Lifelines 39 1.4.2 Effects on the Ground 41 1.4.2.1 Surface Rupture 43 1.4.2.2 Settlement and Uplift 43 1.4.2.3 Liquefaction 44 1.4.2.4 Landslides 44 1.4.3 Human and Financial Losses 47 References 51 2 Response of Structures 54 2.1 General 54 2.2 Conceptual Framework 55 2.2.1 Definitions 55 2.2.2 Strength] versus Ductility]Based Response 56 2.2.3 Member] versus System]Level Consideration 58 2.2.4 Nature of Seismic Effects 60 2.2.5 Fundamental Response Quantities 60 2.2.6 Social and Economic Limit States 62 2.3 Structural Response Characteristics 63 2.3.1 Stiffness 63 2.3.1.1 Factors Influencing Stiffness 65 2.3.1.2 Effects on Action and Deformation Distributions 71 2.3.1.3 Non]structural Damage Control 80 2.3.2 Strength 82 2.3.2.1 Factors Influencing Strength 84 2.3.2.2 Effects on Load Path 90 2.3.2.3 Structural Damage Control 94 2.3.3 Ductility 97 2.3.3.1 Factors Influencing Ductility 100 2.3.3.2 Effects on Action Redistribution 111 2.3.3.3 Structural Collapse Prevention 113 2.3.4 Overstrength 116 2.3.5 Damping 122 2.3.6 Relationship between Strength, Overstrength and Ductility: Force Reduction Factor ‘Supply’ 128 References 132 3 Earthquake Input Motion 136 3.1 General 136 3.2 Earthquake Occurrence and Return Period 136 3.3 Ground]Motion Models (Attenuation Relationships) 140 3.3.1 Features of Strong]Motion Data for Attenuation Relationships 143 3.3.2 Attenuation Relationship for Europe 144 3.3.3 Attenuation Relationship for Japan 145 3.3.4 Attenuation Relationships for North America 146 3.3.4.1 Central and Eastern United States 146 3.3.4.2 Western North America 147 3.3.5 Worldwide Attenuation Relationships 148 3.4 Earthquake Spectra 149 3.4.1 Factors Influencing Response Spectra 149 3.4.2 Elastic and Inelastic Spectra 151 3.4.3 Simplified Spectra 158 3.4.3.1 Spectra from Attenuation Relationships 159 3.4.3.2 Spectra from Ground]Motion Parameters 165 3.4.4 Force Reduction Factors (Demand) 167 3.4.4.1 Newmark and Hall (1982) 168 3.4.4.2 Krawinkler and Nassar (1992) 169 3.4.4.3 Miranda and Bertero (1994) 169 3.4.4.4 Vidic et al. (1994) 170 3.4.4.5 Borzi and Elnashai (2000) 171 3.4.4.6 Comparison between Response Modification Factor Models 173 3.4.5 Design Spectra 174 3.4.6 Vertical Component of Ground Motion 176 3.4.7 Vertical Motion Spectra 178 3.5 Earthquake Records 180 3.5.1 Natural Records 180 3.5.1.1 Regional Differences 180 3.5.1.2 Selection Criteria 182 3.5.2 Artificial Records 184 3.5.3 Records Based on Mathematical Formulations 185 3.5.4 Scaling of Earthquake Records 187 3.5.4.1 Scaling Based on Peak Ground Parameters 187 3.5.4.2 Scaling Based on Spectrum Intensity 188 3.6 Duration and Number of Cycles of Earthquake Ground Motions 194 3.7 Use of Earthquake Databases 199 3.8 Software for Deriving Spectra and Generation of Ground]Motion Records 200 3.8.1 Derivation of Earthquake Spectra 200 3.8.2 Generation of Ground]Motion Records 202 References 203 4 Response Evaluation 211 4.1 General 211 4.2 Conceptual Framework 211 4.3 Ground Motion and Load Modelling 214 4.4 Seismic Load Combinations 215 4.5 Structural Modelling 218 4.5.1 Materials 222 4.5.1.1 Metals 222 4.5.1.2 Reinforced Concrete 224 4.5.2 Sections 227 4.5.3 Components and Systems for Structural Modelling 231 4.5.3.1 Beams and Columns 233 4.5.3.2 Connections 237 4.5.3.3 Diaphragms 238 4.5.3.4 Infills 240 4.5.3.5 Frames 241 4.5.3.6 Structural Walls 245 4.5.4 Masses 248 4.6 Methods of Analysis 250 4.6.1 Dynamic Analysis 252 4.6.1.1 Modal and Spectral Analyses 254 4.6.1.2 Response]History Analysis 260 4.6.1.3 Incremental Dynamic Analysis 262 4.6.2 Static Analysis 265 4.6.2.1 Equivalent Static Analysis 265 4.6.2.2 Pushover Analysis 266 4.6.3 Simplified Code Method 272 4.7 Performance Levels and Objectives 278 4.8 Output for Assessment 285 4.8.1 Actions 287 4.8.2 Deformations 287 References 294 5 Fragility Relationships for Structures 300 5.1 General 300 5.2 Theory and Applications 301 5.3 Empirical Functions 313 5.4 Analytical Functions 321 References 335 6 Seismic Soil–Structure Interaction 340 6.1 General 340 6.2 Effects of SSI on Structural Response 342 6.3 Modelling Methods for the Soil–Foundation System 344 6.3.1 Lumped Elastic Springs and Dampers 344 6.3.2 Frequency]Dependent Stiffness and Damping 346 6.3.3 Inelastic Elements for Near]Field Soil 349 6.3.4 Modelling of Pile and Pile Group Foundations 350 6.3.5 Lumped Spring–Mass–Damper System 351 6.3.6 Time Series Representation of Foundation Reaction 352 6.4 Analysis Methods 354 6.4.1 Frequency]Domain Analyses 355 6.4.2 Direct Approach 355 6.4.3 Multistep Approach 357 6.5 Application Examples 359 6.5.1 Pile–Soil Interaction Analysis 360 6.5.1.1 Site Properties 361 6.5.1.2 Finite Element Model 361 6.5.1.3 Analysis and Results 362 6.5.2 Meloland Road Overcrossing – Embankment–Structure Interaction 363 6.5.2.1 Bridge and Site Properties 364 6.5.2.2 Embankment and Foundation Model 364 6.5.2.3 Soil–Structure]Interaction Analysis Configuration 366 6.5.2.4 Dynamic Properties of the Embankment–Bridge System 366 6.5.2.5 Time]History Analysis Results 368 6.5.3 Caruthersville Bridge 368 References 372 Concluding Remarks 377 Appendix A – Structural Configurations and Systems for Effective Earthquake Resistance 379 A.1 Structural Configurations 379 A.1.1 Plan Regularity 383 A.1.2 Elevation Regularity 387 A.2 Structural Systems 391 A.2.1 Horizontal Systems 391 A.2.2 Vertical Systems 393 A.2.2.1 Moment]Resisting Frames 395 A.2.2.2 Braced Frames 396 A.2.2.3 Structural Walls 399 A.2.2.4 Hybrid Frames 401 A.2.2.5 Tube Systems 403 References 407 Appendix B – Damage to Structures 409 B.1 Structural Deficiencies 409 B.1.1 Buildings 409 B.1.2 Bridges 411 B.2 Examples of Damage to Buildings 411 B.2.1 RC Buildings 412 B.2.1.1 Beams 412 B.2.1.2 Columns 413 B.2.1.3 Beam]to]Column Joints 417 B.2.1.4 Frames 419 B.2.1.5 Walls 427 B.2.2 Masonry Buildings 428 B.2.2.1 Failure in Load]Bearing Walls 429 B.2.2.2 Failure in Non]bearing Walls 431 B.2.2.3 Failure of Wall Connections 432 B.2.3 Steel and Composite Buildings 432 B.2.3.1 Member Failures 433 B.2.3.2 Connection Failures 435 B.2.3.3 System Failures 439 B.3 Examples of Damage to Bridges 440 B.3.1 Span Failure 441 B.3.2 Abutment Failure 444 B.3.3 Pier Failure 445 B.3.3.1 Column Flexural Failure 446 B.3.3.2 Column Shear Failure 447 B.3.3.3 Column Buckling and Fractures 447 B.3.4 Joint Failure 450 B.3.5 Footing Failure 450 B.3.6 Geotechnical Effects 454 B.4 Lessons Learnt from Previous Earthquakes 455 B.4.1 Requisites of RC Structures 455 B.4.2 Requisites of Masonry Structures 456 B.4.3 Requisites of Steel and Composite Structures 457 References 457 Index 459

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book begins with the premise that energy demands are directing scientists towards ever-greener methods of power management, so highly integrated power control ICs (integrated chip/circuit) are increasingly in demand for further reducing power consumption.Table of ContentsAbout the Author xii Preface xiii Acknowledgments xv 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Moore’s Law 1 1.2 Technology Process Impact: Power Management IC from 0.5 micro-meter to 28 nano-meter 1 1.2.1 MOSFET Structure 1 1.2.2 Scaling Effects 7 1.2.3 Leakage Power Dissipation 9 1.3 Challenge of Power Management IC in Advanced Technological Products 14 1.3.1 Multi-V th Technology 14 1.3.2 Performance Boosters 15 1.3.3 Layout-Dependent Proximity Effects 19 1.3.4 Impacts on Circuit Design 20 1.4 Basic Definition Principles in Power Management Module 22 1.4.1 Load Regulation 22 1.4.2 Transient Voltage Variations 23 1.4.3 Conduction Loss and Switching Loss 24 1.4.4 Power Conversion Efficiency 25 References 25 2 Design of Low Dropout (LDO) Regulators 28 2.1 Basic LDO Architecture 29 2.1.1 Types of Pass Device 31 2.2 Compensation Skills 34 2.2.1 Pole Distribution 34 2.2.2 Zero Distribution and Right-Half-Plane (RHP) Zero 40 2.3 Design Consideration for LDO Regulators 42 2.3.1 Dropout Voltage 43 2.3.2 Efficiency 44 2.3.3 Line/Load Regulation 45 2.3.4 Transient Output Voltage Variation Caused by Sudden Load Current Change 46 2.4 Analog-LDO Regulators 50 2.4.1 Characteristics of Dominant-Pole Compensation 50 2.4.2 Characteristics of C-free Structure 56 2.4.3 Design of Low-Voltage C-free LDO Regulator 62 2.4.4 Alleviating Minimum Load Current Constraint through the Current Feedback Compensation (CFC) Technique in the Multi-stage C-free LDO Regulator 66 2.4.5 Multi-stage LDO Regulator with Feedforward Path and Dynamic Gain Adjustment (DGA) 75 2.5 Design Guidelines for LDO Regulators 79 2.5.1 Simulation Tips and Analyses 81 2.5.2 Technique for Breaking the Loop in AC Analysis Simulation 82 2.5.3 Example of the Simulation Results of the LDO Regulator with Dominant-Pole Compensation 85 2.6 Digital-LDO (D-LDO) Design 93 2.6.1 Basic D-LDO 94 2.6.2 D-LDO with Lattice Asynchronous Self-Timed Control 96 2.6.3 Dynamic Voltage Scaling (DVS) 100 2.7 Switchable Digital/Analog-LDO (D/A-LDO) Regulator with Analog DVS Technique 110 2.7.1 ADVS Technique 110 2.7.2 Switchable D/A-LDO Regulator 113 References 120 3 Design of Switching Power Regulators 122 3.1 Basic Concept 122 3.2 Overview of the Control Method and Operation Principle 125 3.3 Small Signal Modeling and Compensation Techniques in SWR 131 3.3.1 Small Signal Modeling of Voltage-Mode SWR 131 3.3.2 Small Signal Modeling of the Closed-Loop Voltage-Mode SWR 135 3.3.3 Small Signal Modeling of Current-Mode SWR 150 References 169 4 Ripple-Based Control Technique Part I 170 4.1 Basic Topology of Ripple-Based Control 171 4.1.1 Hysteretic Control 173 4.1.2 On-Time Control 176 4.1.3 Off-Time Control 179 4.1.4 Constant Frequency with Peak Voltage Control and Constant Frequency with Valley Voltage Control 182 4.1.5 Summary of Topology of Ripple-Based Control 183 4.2 Stability Criterion of On-Time Controlled Buck Converter 185 4.2.1 Derivation of the Stability Criterion 185 4.2.2 Selection of Output Capacitor 197 4.3 Design Techniques When Using MLCC with a Small Value of R ESR 201 4.3.1 Use of Additional Ramp Signal 202 4.3.2 Use of Additional Current Feedback Path 204 4.3.3 Comparison of On-Time Control with an Additional Current Feedback Path 254 4.3.4 Ripple-Reshaping Technique to Compensate a Small Value of R ESR 256 4.3.5 Experimental Result of Ripple-Reshaped Function 262 References 269 5 Ripple-based Control Technique Part II 270 5.1 Design Techniques for Enhancing Voltage Regulation Performance 270 5.1.1 Accuracy in DC Voltage Regulation 270 5.1.2 V 2 Structure for Ripple-based Control 271 5.1.3 V 2 On-time Control with An Additional Ramp Or Current Feedback Path 275 5.1.4 Compensator for V 2 Structure with Small R ESR 277 5.1.5 Ripple-Based Control with Quadratic Differential and Integration Technique if Small R ESR is Used 283 5.1.6 Robust Ripple Regulator (R3) 294 5.2 Analysis of Switching Frequency Variation to Reduce Electromagnetic Interference 297 5.2.1 Improvement of Noise Immunity of Feedback Signal 298 5.2.2 Bypassing Path to Filter the High-Frequency Noise of the Feedback Signal 299 5.2.3 Technique of PLL Modulator 302 5.2.4 Full Analysis of Frequency Variation Under Different V in ,v Out , And I Load 304 5.2.5 Adaptive On-Time Controller for Pseudo-Constant f SW 313 5.3 Optimum On-Time Controller for Pseudo-Constant f SW 321 5.3.1 Algorithm for Optimum On-Time Control 322 5.3.2 Type-I Optimum On-Time Controller with Equivalent V IN and V Out,eq 323 5.3.3 Type-II Optimum On-Time Controller with Equivalent V DUTY 331 5.3.4 Frequency Clamper 333 5.3.5 Comparison of Different On-Time Controllers 333 5.3.6 Simulation Result of Optimum On-Time Controller 335 5.3.7 Experimental Result of Optimum On-Time Controller 335 References 343 6 Single-Inductor Multiple-Output (SIMO) Converter 345 6.1 Basic Topology of SIMO Converters 345 6.1.1 Architecture 345 6.1.2 Cross Regulation 347 6.2 Applications of SIMO Converters 348 6.2.1 System-on-Chip 348 6.2.2 Portable Electronics Systems 350 6.3 Design Guidelines of SIMO Converters 351 6.3.1 Energy Delivery Paths 351 6.3.2 Classifications of Control Methods 359 6.3.3 Design Goals 363 6.4 SIMO Converter Techniques for Soc 364 6.4.1 Superposition Theorem in Inductor Current Control 364 6.4.2 Dual-Mode Energy Delivery Methodology 366 6.4.3 Energy-Mode Transition 367 6.4.4 Automatic Energy Bypass 371 6.4.5 Elimination of Transient Cross Regulation 372 6.4.6 Circuit Implementations 376 6.4.7 Experimental Results 387 6.5 SIMO Converter Techniques for Tablets 397 6.5.1 Output Independent Gate Drive Control in SIMO Converter 397 6.5.2 CCM/GM Relative Skip Energy Control in SIMO Converter 405 6.5.3 Bidirectional Dynamic Slope Compensation in SIMO Converter 415 6.5.4 Circuit Implementations 420 6.5.5 Experimental Results 427 References 441 7 Switching-Based Battery Charger 443 7.1 Introduction 443 7.1.1 Pure Charge State 447 7.1.2 Direct Supply State 448 7.1.3 Plug Off State 448 7.1.4 CAS State 448 7.2 Small Signal Analysis of Switching-Based Battery Charger 449 7.3 Closed-Loop Equivalent Model 454 7.4 Simulation with PSIM 461 7.5 Turbo-boost Charger 465 7.6 Influence of Built-In Resistance in the Charger System 470 7.7 Design Example: Continuous Built-In Resistance Detection 472 7.7.1 CBIRD Operation 473 7.7.2 CBIRD Circuit Implementation 476 7.7.3 Experimental Results 480 References 482 8 Energy-Harvesting Systems 483 8.1 Introduction to Energy-Harvesting Systems 483 8.2 Energy-Harvesting Sources 486 8.2.1 Vibration Electromagnetic Transducers 487 8.2.2 Piezoelectric Generator 490 8.2.3 Electrostatic Energy Generator 491 8.2.4 Wind-Powered Energy Generator 492 8.2.5 Thermoelectric Generator 494 8.2.6 Solar Cells 496 8.2.7 Magnetic Coil 498 8.2.8 RF/Wireless 501 8.3 Energy-Harvesting Circuits 502 8.3.1 Basic Concept of Energy-Harvesting Circuits 502 8.3.2 AC Source Energy-Harvesting Circuits 505 8.3.3 DC-Source Energy-Harvesting Circuits 511 8.4 Maximum Power Point Tracking 514 8.4.1 Basic Concept of Maximum Power Point Tracking 514 8.4.2 Impedance Matching 515 8.4.3 Resistor Emulation 516 8.4.4 MPPT Method 518 References 523 Index 527

Read more less

Book SynopsisGraphs and Networks A unique blend of graph theory and network science for mathematicians and data science professionals alike. Featuring topics such as minors, connectomes, trees, distance, spectral graph theory, similarity, centrality, small-world networks, scale-free networks, graph algorithms, Eulerian circuits, Hamiltonian cycles, coloring, higher connectivity, planar graphs, flows, matchings, and coverings, Graphs and Networks contains modern applications for graph theorists and a host of useful theorems for network scientists. The book begins with applications to biology and the social and political sciences and gradually takes a more theoretical direction toward graph structure theory and combinatorial optimization. A background in linear algebra, probability, and statistics provides the proper frame of reference. Graphs and Networks also features: Applications to neuroscience, climate science, and the social and political sciencesA research outlook integrated directly into tTable of ContentsList of Figures iv Preface viii Chapter 1. From Königsberg to Connectomes 1 1.1. Introduction 1 1.2. Isomorphism 18 1.3. Minors and Constructions 25 Chapter 2. Fundamental Topics 39 2.1. Trees 39 2.2. Distance 44 2.3. Degree Sequences 52 2.4. Matrices 56 Chapter 3. Similarity and Centrality 70 3.1. Similarity Measures 70 3.2. Centrality Measures 74 3.3. Eigenvector and Katz Centrality 78 3.4. PageRank 84 Chapter 4. Types of Networks 91 4.1. Small-World Networks 91 4.2. Scale-Free Networks 95 4.3. Assortative Mixing 97 4.4. Covert Networks 102 Chapter 5. Graph Algorithms 107 5.1. Traversal Algorithms 107 5.2. Greedy Algorithms 113 5.3. Shortest Path Algorithms 118 Chapter 6. Structure, Coloring, Higher Connectivity 126 6.1. Eulerian Circuits 126 6.2. Hamiltonian Cycles 131 6.3. Coloring 136 6.4. Higher Connectivity 142 6.5. Menger's Theorem 148 Chapter 7. Planar Graphs 159 7.1. Properties of Planar Graphs 159 7.2. Euclid's Theorem on Regular Polyhedra 167 7.3. The Five Color Theorem 172 7.4. Invariants for Non-Planar Graphs 174 Chapter 8. Flows and Matchings 182 8.1. Flows in Networks 182 8.2. Stable Sets, Matchings, Coverings 188 8.3. Min-Max Theorems 192 8.4. Maximum Matching Algorithm 196 Appendix A. Linear Algebra 211 Appendix B. Probability and Statistics 215 Appendix C. Complexity of Algorithms 218 Appendix D. Stacks and Queues 222 Appendix. Bibliography 226

Read more less

a huge range and FREE tracked UK delivery on ALL orders.

Read more less

Book SynopsisWritten by noted experts in the field, Handbook of Mango Fruit: Production, Postharvest Science, Processing Technology and Nutrition offers a comprehensive resource regarding the production, trade, and consumption of this popular tropical fruit. The authors review the geographic areas where the fruit is grown and harvested, including information on the ever-expanding global marketplace that highlights United States production, imports and exports, and consumption, as well as data on the outlook for the European market. Handbook of Mango Fruit outlines the postharvest handling and packaging techniques and reviews the fruit's processed products and byproducts that are gleaned from the processing of waste. The authors include information on the nutritional profile of the mango and review the food safety considerations for processing and transport of mangoes. This comprehensive resource: Reviews global mango production trends and countries that are the Table of ContentsPreface vii List of Contributors ix 1 Mango Production, Global Trade, Consumption Trends, and Postharvest Processing and Nutrition 1Edward A. Evans, Fredy H. Ballen and Muhammad Siddiq 2 Mango Production 17Chantalak Tiyayon and Robert E. Paull 3 Biology, Postharvest Physiology, and Biochemistry of Mango 37Maria Gloria Lobo and Jiwan S. Sidhu 4 Pests of Mango 61Daniel Carrillo, Andrea Birke, Larissa Guillen and J.E. Peña 5 Mango Pathology and Diseases 91Andressa de Souza-Pollo and Antonio de Goes 6 Harvesting and Postharvest Technology of Mango 105Jeffrey K. Brecht and Elhadi M. Yahia 7 Packaging of Fresh Mangoes and Processed Mango Products 131Aman Ullah Malik, Farihah Siddiq and Muhammad Siddiq 8 Processing and Quality of Fresh-cut Mangoes 151Blanca Salinas-Roca, Jorge Welti-Chanes, Olga Martin-Belloso and Robert Soliva-Fortuny 9 Innovative Processing Technologies for Mango Products 169Deepti Salvi, Ender Arserim and Mukund Karwe 10 Mango Processing and Processed Products 195Muhammad Siddiq, Dalbir S. Sogi and Sunisa Roidoung 11 Composition and Nutritional Properties of Mangoes 217Tasleem A. Zafar and Jiwan S. Sidhu 12 Phytochemical Compounds in Functional Properties of Mangoes 237Yearul Kabir, Hossain Uddin Shekhar and Jiwan S. Sidhu 13 Microbiology of Fresh Mangoes and Processed Products 255Anu Kalia and Rajinder P. Gupta 14 Value-added Processing and Utilization of Mango By-products 279Poonam Aggarwal, Amarjeet Kaur and Suresh Bhise Index 295

Read more less

Book SynopsisAdvanced Computational Nanomechanics is a state-of-the-art publication on computational nanomechanics and contains eleven chapters prepared by world experts in this field.Table of ContentsList of Contributors xi Series Preface xiii Preface xv 1 Thermal Conductivity of Graphene and Its Polymer Nanocomposites: A Review 1Yingyan Zhang, Yu Wang, Chien Ming Wang and Yuantong Gu 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Graphene 1 1.2.1 Introduction of Graphene 1 1.2.2 Properties of Graphene 6 1.2.3 Thermal Conductivity of Graphene 7 1.3 Thermal Conductivity of Graphene–Polymer Nanocomposites 9 1.3.1 Measurement of Thermal Conductivity of Nanocomposites 9 1.3.2 Modelling of Thermal Conductivity of Nanocomposites 9 1.3.3 Progress and Challenge for Graphene–Polymer Nanocomposites 14 1.3.4 Interfacial Thermal Resistance 16 1.3.5 Approaches for Reduction of Interfacial Thermal Resistance 19 1.4 Concluding Remarks 22 References 22 2 Mechanics of CNT Network Materials 29Mesut Kirca and Albert C. To 2.1 Introduction 29 2.1.1 Types of CNT Network Materials 30 2.1.2 Synthesis of CNT Network Materials 31 2.1.3 Applications 35 2.2 Experimental Studies on Mechanical Characterization of CNT Network Materials 39 2.2.1 Non-covalent CNT Network Materials 40 2.2.2 Covalently Bonded CNT Network Materials 45 2.3 Theoretical Approaches Toward CNT Network Modeling 48 2.3.1 Ordered CNT Networks 48 2.3.2 Randomly Organized CNT Networks 50 2.4 Molecular Dynamics Study of Heat-Welded CNT Network Materials 55 2.4.1 A Stochastic Algorithm for Modeling Heat-Welded Random CNT Network 56 2.4.2 Tensile Behavior of Heat-Welded CNT Networks 60 References 65 3 Mechanics of Helical Carbon Nanomaterials 71Hiroyuki Shima and Yoshiyuki Suda 3.1 Introduction 71 3.1.1 Historical Background 71 3.1.2 Classification: Helical “Tube” or “Fiber”? 73 3.1.3 Fabrication and Characterization 74 3.2 Theory of HN-Tubes 76 3.2.1 Microscopic Model 76 3.2.2 Elastic Elongation 79 3.2.3 Giant Stretchability 80 3.2.4 Thermal Transport 82 3.3 Experiment of HN-Fibers 84 3.3.1 Axial Elongation 84 3.3.2 Axial Compression 87 3.3.3 Resonant Vibration 89 3.3.4 Fracture Measurement 92 3.4 Perspective and Possible Applications 93 3.4.1 Reinforcement Fiber for Composites 93 3.4.2 Morphology Control in Synthesis 93 References 94 4 Computational Nanomechanics Investigation Techniques 99Ghasem Ghadyani and Moones Rahmandoust 4.1 Introduction 99 4.2 Fundamentals of the Nanomechanics 100 4.2.1 Molecular Mechanics 101 4.2.2 Newtonian Mechanics 101 4.2.3 Lagrangian Equations of Motion 102 4.2.4 Hamilton Equations of a Γ-Space 104 4.3 Molecular Dynamics Method 106 4.3.1 Interatomic Potentials 106 4.3.2 Link Between Molecular Dynamics and Quantum Mechanics 112 4.3.3 Limitations of Molecular Dynamics Simulations 114 4.4 Tight Binding Method 115 4.5 Hartree–Fock and Related Methods 116 4.6 Density Functional Theory 118 4.7 Multiscale Simulation Methods 120 4.8 Conclusion 120 References 120 5 Probabilistic Strength Theory of Carbon Nanotubes and Fibers 123Xi F. Xu and Irene J. Beyerlein 5.1 Introduction 123 5.2 A Probabilistic Strength Theory of CNTs 124 5.2.1 Asymptotic Strength Distribution of CNTs 124 5.2.2 Nonasymptotic Strength Distribution of CNTs 127 5.2.3 Incorporation of Physical and Virtual Testing Data 130 5.3 Strength Upscaling from CNTs to CNT Fibers 135 5.3.1 A Local Load Sharing Model 136 5.3.2 Interpretation of CNT Bundle Tensile Testing 139 5.3.3 Strength Upscaling Across CNT-Bundle-Fiber Scales 141 5.4 Conclusion 145 References 145 6 Numerical Nanomechanics of Perfect and Defective Hetero-junction CNTs 147Ali Ghavamian, Moones Rahmandoust and Andreas Öchsner 6.1 Introduction 147 6.1.1 Literature Review: Mechanical Properties of Homogeneous CNTs 147 6.1.2 Literature Review: Mechanical Properties of Hetero-junction CNTs 150 6.2 Theory and Simulation 152 6.2.1 Atomic Geometry and Finite Element Simulation of Homogeneous CNTs 152 6.2.2 Atomic Geometry and Finite Element Simulation of Hetero-junction CNTs 153 6.2.3 Finite Element Simulation of Atomically Defective Hetero-junction CNTs 155 6.3 Results and Discussion 156 6.3.1 Linear Elastic Properties of Perfect Hetero-junction CNTs 156 6.3.2 Linear Elastic Properties of Atomically Defective Hetero-junction CNTs 162 6.4 Conclusion 164 References 171 7 A Methodology for the Prediction of Fracture Properties in Polymer Nanocomposites 175Samit Roy and Avinash Akepati 7.1 Introduction 175 7.2 Literature Review 175 7.3 Atomistic J-Integral Evaluation Methodology 176 7.4 Atomistic J-Integral at Finite Temperature 181 7.5 Cohesive Contour-based Approach for J-Integral 184 7.6 Numerical Evaluation of Atomistic J-Integral 185 7.7 Atomistic J-Integral Calculation for a Center-Cracked Nanographene Platelet 187 7.8 Atomistic J-Integral Calculation for a Center-Cracked Nanographene Platelet at Finite Temperature (T = 300 K) 190 7.9 Atomistic J-Integral Calculation for a Center-Cracked Nanographene Platelet Using ReaxFF 192 7.10 Atomistic J-Integral Calculation for a Center-Cracked EPON 862 Model 194 7.11 Conclusions and Future Work 197 Acknowledgment 198 References 199 8 Mechanical Characterization of 2D Nanomaterials and Composites 201Ruth E. Roman, Nicola M. Pugno and Steven W. Cranford 8.1 Discovering 2D in a 3D World 201 8.2 2D Nanostructures 203 8.2.1 Graphene 203 8.2.2 Graphynes and Graphene Allotropes 204 8.2.3 Silicene 205 8.2.4 Boron Nitride 206 8.2.5 Molybdenum Disulfide 207 8.2.6 Germanene, Stanene, and Phosphorene 208 8.3 Mechanical Assays 210 8.3.1 Experimental 210 8.3.2 Computational 211 8.4 Mechanical Properties and Characterization 212 8.4.1 Defining Stress 213 8.4.2 Uniaxial Stress, Plane Stress, and Plane Strain 214 8.4.3 Stiffness 216 8.4.4 Effect of Bond Density 218 8.4.5 Bending Rigidity 219 8.4.6 Adhesion 222 8.4.7 Self-Adhesion and Folding 225 8.5 Failure 227 8.5.1 Quantized Fracture Mechanics 228 8.5.2 Nanoscale Weibull Statistics 231 8.6 Multilayers and Composites 233 8.7 Conclusion 236 Acknowledgment 236 References 237 9 The Effect of Chirality on the Mechanical Properties of Defective Carbon Nanotubes 243Keka Talukdar 9.1 Introduction 243 9.2 Carbon Nanotubes, Their Molecular Structure and Bonding 245 9.2.1 Diameter and Chiral Angle 245 9.2.2 Bonding Speciality in CNTs 246 9.2.3 Defects in CNT Structure 246 9.3 Methods and Modelling 247 9.3.1 Simulation Method 247 9.3.2 Berendsen Thermostat 248 9.3.3 Second-Generation REBO Potential 249 9.3.4 C–C Non-bonding Potential 251 9.3.5 Method of Calculation 251 9.4 Results and Discussions 251 9.4.1 Results for SWCNTs 251 9.4.2 Results for SWCNT Bundle and MWCNTs 255 9.4.3 Chirality Dependence 260 9.5 Conclusions 262 References 263 10 Mechanics of Thermal Transport in Mass-Disordered Nanostructures 265Ganesh Balasubramanian 10.1 Introduction 265 10.2 Equilibrium Molecular Dynamics to Understand Vibrational Spectra 266 10.3 Nonequilibrium Molecular Dynamics for Property Prediction 268 10.4 Quantum Mechanical Calculations for Phonon Dispersion Features 270 10.5 Mean-Field Approximation Model for Binary Mixtures 272 10.6 Materials Informatics for Design of Mass-Disordered Structures 275 10.7 Future Directions in Mass-Disordered Nanomaterials 278 References 279 11 Thermal Boundary Resistance Effects in Carbon Nanotube Composites 281Dimitrios V. Papavassiliou, Khoa Bui and Huong Nguyen 11.1 Introduction 281 11.2 Background 282 11.3 Techniques to Enhance the Thermal Conductivity of CNT Nanocomposites 285 11.4 Dual-Walled CNTs and Composites with CNTs Encapsulated in Silica 286 11.4.1 Simulation Setup 287 11.4.2 Results 289 11.5 Discussion and Conclusions 291 Acknowledgment 291 References 291 Index 295

Read more less

Book SynopsisINTRODUCTION TO THEORETICAL AND MATHEMATICAL FLUID DYNAMICS A practical treatment of mathematical fluid dynamics In Introduction to Theoretical and Mathematical Fluid Dynamics, distinguished researcher Dr. Bhimsen K. Shivamoggi delivers a comprehensive and insightful exploration of fluid dynamics from a mathematical point of view. The book introduces readers to the mathematical study of fluid behavior and highlights areas of active research in fluid dynamics. With coverage of advances in the field over the last 15 years, this book provides in-depth examinations of theoretical and mathematical fluid dynamics with a particular focus on incompressible and compressible fluid flows. Introduction to Theoretical and Mathematical Fluid Dynamics includes practical applications and exercises to illustrate the concepts discussed within, and real-world examples are explained throughout the text. Clear and explanatory material accompanies the rigorous maTable of ContentsContents Preface to the Third Edition xv Acknowledgments xvii Part I Basic Concepts and Equations of Fluid Dynamics 1 1 Introduction to the Fluid Model 3 1.1 The Fluid State 4 1.2 Description of the Flow-Field 5 1.3 Volume Forces and Surface Forces 7 1.4 Relative Motion Near a Point 10 1.5 Stress–Strain Relations 13 2 Equations of Fluid Flows 15 2.1 The Transport Theorem 16 2.2 The Material Derivative 18 2.3 The Law of Conservation of Mass 18 2.4 Equation of Motion 19 2.5 The Energy Equation 19 2.6 The Equation of Vorticity 22 2.7 The Incompressible Fluid 23 2.8 Boundary Conditions 24 2.9 A Program for Analysis of the Governing Equations 25 3 Hamiltonian Formulation of Fluid-Flow Problems 27 3.1 Hamiltonian Dynamics of Continuous Systems 28 3.2 Three-Dimensional Incompressible Flows 32 3.3 Two-Dimensional Incompressible Flows 35 4 Surface Tension Effects 39 4.1 Shape of the Interface between Two Fluids 39 4.2 Capillary Rises in Liquids 41 Part II Dynamics of Incompressible Fluid Flows 45 5 Fluid Kinematics and Dynamics 47 5.1 Stream Function 47 5.2 Equations of Motion 50 5.3 Integrals of Motion 50 5.4 Capillary Waves on a Spherical Drop 51 5.5 Cavitation 54 5.6 Rates of Change of Material Integrals 55 5.7 The Kelvin Circulation Theorem 57 5.8 The Irrotational Flow 58 5.9 Simple-Flow Patterns 62 (i) The Source Flow 62 (ii) The Doublet Flow 63 (iii) The Vortex Flow 66 (iv) Doublet in a Uniform Stream 66 (v) Uniform Flow Past a Circular Cylinder with Circulation 67 6 The Complex-Variable Method 71 6.1 The Complex Potential 71 6.2 Conformal Mapping of Flows 74 6.3 Hydrodynamic Images 82 6.4 Principles of Free-Streamline Flow 84 (i) Schwarz-Christoffel Transformation 84 (ii) Hodograph Method 93 7 Three-Dimensional Irrotational Flows 99 7.1 Special Singular Solutions 99 (i) The Source Flow 99 (ii) The Doublet Flow 101 7.2 d’Alembert’s Paradox 104 7.3 Image of a Source in a Sphere 105 7.4 Flow Past an Arbitrary Body 107 7.5 Unsteady Flows 109 7.6 Renormalized (or Added) Mass of Bodies Moving through a Fluid 111 8 Vortex Flows 115 8.1 Vortex Tubes 115 8.2 Induced Velocity Field 117 8.3 Biot-Savart’s Law 117 8.4 von Kármán Vortex Street 121 8.5 Vortex Ring 124 8.6 Hill’s Spherical Vortex 129 8.7 Vortex Sheet 131 8.8 Vortex Breakdown: Brooke Benjamin’s Theory 135 9 Rotating Flows 143 9.1 Governing Equations and Elementary Results 143 9.2 Taylor-Proudman Theorem 144 9.3 Propagation of Inertial Waves in a Rotating Fluid 146 9.4 Plane Inertial Waves 147 9.5 Forced Wavemotion in a Rotating Fluid 150 (i) The Elliptic Case 153 (ii) The Hyperbolic Case 154 9.6 Slow Motion along the Axis of Rotation 155 9.7 Rossby Waves 160 10 Water Waves 167 10.1 Governing Equations 168 10.2 A Variational Principle for Surface Waves 169 10.3 Water Waves in a Semi-Infinite Fluid 171 10.4 Water Waves in a Fluid Layer of Finite Depth 172 10.5 Shallow-Water Waves 174 (i) Analogy with Gas Dynamics 175 (ii) Breaking of Waves 176 10.6 Water Waves Generated by an Initial Displacement over a Localized Region 176 10.7 Waves on a Steady Stream 182 (i) One-Dimensional Gravity Waves 183 (ii) One-Dimensional Capillary-Gravity Waves 184 (iii) Ship Waves 185 10.8 Gravity Waves in a Rotating Fluid 188 10.9 Theory of Tides 193 10.10 Hydraulic Jump 195 (i) Tidal Bores 195 (ii) The Dam-Break Problem 199 10.11 Nonlinear Shallow-Water Waves 202 (i) Solitary Waves 206 (ii) Periodic Cnoidal Waves 208 (iii) Interacting Solitary Waves 214 (iv) Stokes Waves 219 (v) Modulational Instability and Envelope Solutions 220 10.12 Nonlinear Capillary-Gravity Waves 230 (i) Resonant Three-Wave Interactions 230 (ii) Second-Harmonic Resonance 235 11 Applications to Aerodynamics 241 11.1 Airfoil Theory: Method of Complex Variables 242 (i) Force and Moments on an Arbitrary Body 242 (ii) Flow Past an Arbitrary Cylinder 245 (iii) Flow Around a Flat Plate 248 (iv) Flow Past an Airfoil 250 (v) The Joukowski Transformation 253 11.2 Thin Airfoil Theory 259 (i) Thickness Problem 262 (ii) Camber Problem 264 (iii) Flat Plate at an Angle of Attack 269 (iv) Combined Aerodynamic Characteristics 271 (v) The Leading-Edge Problem of a Thin Airfoil 271 11.3 Slender-Body Theory 275 11.4 Prandtl’s Lifting-Line Theory for Wings 277 11.5 Oscillating Thin-Airfoil Problem: Theodorsen’s Theory 282 Part III Dynamics of Compressible Fluid Flows 297 12 Review of Thermodynamics 299 12.1 Thermodynamic System and Variables of State 299 12.2 The First Law of Thermodynamics and Reversible and Irreversible Processes 300 12.3 The Second Law of Thermodynamics 303 12.4 Entropy 304 12.5 Liquid and Gaseous Phases 307 13 Isentropic Fluid Flows 309 13.1 Applications of Thermodynamics to Fluid Flows 309 13.2 Linear Sound Wave Propagation 310 13.3 The Energy Equation 310 13.4 Stream-Tube Area and Flow Velocity Relations 312 14 Potential Flows 317 14.1 Governing Equations 317 14.2 Streamline Coordinates 319 14.3 Conical Flows: Prandtl-Meyer Flow 320 14.4 Small Perturbation Theory 324 14.5 Characteristics 326 (i) Compatibility Conditions in Streamline Coordinates 328 (ii) A Singular-Perturbation Problem for Hyperbolic Systems 331 15 Nonlinear Theory of Plane Sound Waves 343 15.1 Riemann Invariants 343 15.2 Simple Wave Solutions 344 15.3 Nonlinear Propagation of a Sound Wave 352 15.4 Nonlinear Resonant Three-Wave Interactions of Sound Waves 355 15.5 Burgers Equation 361 16 Shock Waves 371 16.1 The Normal Shock Wave 371 16.2 The Oblique Shock Wave 384 16.3 Blast Waves: Taylor’s Self-similarity and Sedov’s Exact Solution 387 17 The Hodograph Method 393 17.1 The Hodograph Transformation of Potential Flow Equations 393 17.2 The Chaplygin Equation 394 17.3 The Tangent-Gas Approximation 396 17.4 The Lost Solution 401 17.5 The Limit Line 402 18 Applications to Aerodynamics 411 18.1 Thin Airfoil Theory 411 (i) Thin Airfoil in Linearized Supersonic Flows 411 (ii) Far-Field Behavior of Supersonic Flow Past a Thin Airfoil 414 (iii) Thin Airfoil in Transonic Flows 417 18.2 Slender Bodies of Revolution 420 18.3 Oscillating Thin Airfoil in Subsonic Flows: Possio’s Theory 427 18.4 Oscillating Thin Airfoils in Supersonic Flows: Stewartson’s Theory 435 Part IV Dynamics of Viscous Fluid Flows 439 19 Exact Solutions to Equations of Viscous Fluid Flows 441 19.1 Channel Flows 442 19.2 Decay of a Line Vortex: The Lamb-Oseen Vortex 443 19.3 Line Vortex in a Uniform Stream 446 19.4 Diffusion of a Localized Vorticity Distribution 446 19.5 Burgers Vortex 451 19.6 Flow Due to a Suddenly Accelerated Plane 453 19.7 The Round Laminar Jet: Landau-Squire Solution 456 19.8 Ekman Layer at a Free Surface in a Rotating Fluid 459 19.9 Centrifugal Flow Due to a Rotating Disk: von Kármán Solution 462 19.10 Shock Structure: Becker’s Solution 464 19.11 Couette Flow of a Gas 467 20 Flows at Low Reynolds Numbers 469 20.1 Dimensional Analysis 469 20.2 Stokes’ Flow Past a Rigid Sphere: Stokes’ Formula 470 20.3 Stokes’ Flow Past a Spherical Drop 474 20.4 Stokes’ Flow Past a Rigid Circular Cylinder: Stokes’ Paradox 478 20.5 Oseen’s Flow Past a Rigid Sphere 479 20.6 Oseen’s Approximation for Periodically Oscillating Wakes 483 21 Flows at High Reynolds Numbers 489 21.1 Prandtl’s Boundary-Layer Concept 489 21.2 The Method of Matched Asymptotic Expansions 490 21.3 Location and Nature of the Boundary Layers 497 21.4 Incompressible Flow Past a Flat Plate 500 (i) The Outer Expansion 501 (ii) The Inner Expansion 502 (iii) Flow Due to Displacement Thickness 507 21.5 Separation of Flow in a Boundary Layer: Landau’s Theory 509 21.6 Boundary Layers in Compressible Flows 512 (i) Crocco’s Integral 514 (ii) Flow Past a Flat Plate: Howarth-Dorodnitsyn Transformation 516 21.7 Flow in a Mixing Layer between Two Parallel Streams 517 (i) Geometrical Characteristics of the Mixing Flow 520 21.8 Narrow Jet: Bickley’s Solution 521 21.9 Wakes 524 21.10 Periodic Boundary Layer Flows 524 22 Jeffrey-Hamel Flow 529 22.1 The Exact Solution 529 (i) Only 𝑒1 Is Real and Positive 531 (ii) 𝑒1, 𝑒2, and 𝑒3 Are Real and Distinct 532 22.2 Flows at Low Reynolds Numbers 535 22.3 Flows at High Reynolds Numbers 541 References 545 Bibliography 549 Index 551

Read more less

Book SynopsisApplications of remote sensing technology for monitoring and predicting water-related hazards Water-related hazards such as floods and droughts have serious impacts on society. Their incidence has increased in recent decades, a trend set to continue with ongoing climate change. Adaptation and mitigation measures require accurate detection, monitoring, and forecasting, much of which comes from remote sensing technologies. Remote Sensing of Water-Related Hazards takes an interdisciplinary approach, presenting recent advances in the available data, sensors, models, and indicators developed for monitoring and prediction. Volume highlights include: Progress in remote sensing of precipitation, storms, and tornados Different techniques for flood mapping, forecasting, and early warning Integrated approach for predicting flood and landslide cascading hazards Satellite monitoring of water cycle variation, water scarcity, and drought cTable of ContentsList of Contributors vii Preface xi 1. Interdisciplinary Perspectives on Remote Sensing for Monitoring and Predicting Water-Related Hazards 1Ke Zhang, Yang Hong, and Amir AghaKouchak Part I Remote Sensing of Precipitation and Storms 2. Progress in Satellite Precipitation Products over the Past Two Decades: Evaluation and Application in Flash Flood Warning 13Guoqiang Tang, Tsechun Wang, Meihong Ma, Wentao Xiong, Feng Lyu, and Ziqiang Ma 3. Observations of Tornadoes and Their Parent Supercells Using Ground-Based, Mobile Doppler Radars 31Howard B. Bluestein Part II Remote Sensing of Floods and Associated Hazards 4. Remote Sensing Mapping and Modeling for Flood Hazards in Data-Scarce Areas: A Case Study in Nyaungdon Area, Myanmar 71Ke Zhang, Zaw Myo Khaing, and Zhijia Li 5. Multisensor Remote Sensing and the Multidimensional Modeling of Extreme Flood Events: A Case Study of Hurricane Harvey--Triggered Floods in Houston, Texas, USA 87Mengye Chen, Zhi Li, and Shang Gao 6. A Multisource, Data-Driven, Web-GIS-Based Hydrological Modeling Framework for Flood Forecasting and Prevention 105Zhanming Wan, Xianwu Xue, Ke Zhang, Yang Hong, Jonathan J. Gourley, and Humberto Vergara 7. An Ensemble-Based, Remote-Sensing-Driven, Flood-Landslide Early Warning System 123Ke Zhang, Guoding Chen, Yi Xia, and Sheng Wang 8. Detection of Hazard-Damaged Bridges Using Multitemporal High-Resolution SAR Imagery 135Wen Liu, Kazuki Inoue, and Fumio Yamazaki Part III Remote Sensing of Droughts and Associated Hazards 9. Drought Monitoring Based on Remote Sensing 151Xin Li, Ran Tao, and Ke Zhang 10. Remote Sensing of Vegetation Responses to Drought Disturbances Using Spaceborne Optical and Near-Infrared Sensors 169Ke Zhang, Linxin Liu, Yunping Li, and Ran Tao 11. Recent Advances in Physical Water Scarcity Assessment Using GRACE Satellite Data 187Emad Hasan and Aondover Tarhule 12. Study of Water Cycle Variation in the Yellow River Basin Based on Satellite Remote Sensing and Numerical Modeling 203Meixia Lv and Zhuguo Ma 13. Assessing the Impact of Climate Change-Induced Droughts on Soil Salinity Development in Agricultural Areas Using Ground and Satellite Sensors 223Dennis L. Corwin and Elia Scudiero Index 245

Read more less

Book SynopsisSPREADSHEET APPLICATIONS IN CHEMISTRY USING MICROSOFT EXCEL Find step-by-step tutorials on scientific data processing in the latest versions of Microsoft Excel The Second Edition of Spreadsheet Applications in Chemistry Using Microsoft Excel delivers a comprehensive and up-to-date exploration of the application of scientific data processing in Microsoft Excel. Written to incorporate the latest updates and changes found in Excel 2021, as well as later versions, this practical textbook is tutorial-focused and offers simple, step-by-step instructions for scientific data processing tasks commonly used by undergraduate students. Readers will also benefit from an online repository of experimental datasets that can be used to work through the tutorials to gain familiarity with data processing and visualization in Excel. This latest edition incorporTable of Contents Introduction to Excel Statistical Analysis of Experimental Data Regression Analysis Calibration Plots in Analytical Chemistry Visualizing concepts in Physical Chemistry Regression Analysis using Solver

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book offers a comprehensive overview of recently developed methods for assessing and optimizing system reliability. It consists of two main parts, for treating assessment methods and optimization methods, respectively. The first part covers methods of multi-state system reliability modelling and evaluation, Markov processes, Monte Carlo simulation and uncertainty analysis. The methods considered range from piecewise-deterministic Markov processes to belief function analysis. The second part covers optimization methods of mathematical programming and evolutionary algorithms, and problems of multi-objective optimization and optimization under uncertainty. The methods of this part range from non-dominated sorting genetic algorithm to robust optimization. The book also includes the application of the assessment and optimization methods considered on real case studies, particularly with respect to the reliability assessment and optimization of renewable energy systems,Table of ContentsSeries Editor’s Foreword by Dr. Andre V. Kleyner xv Preface xvii Acknowledgments xix List of Abbreviations xx Notations xxii Part I The Fundamentals 1 1 Reliability Assessment 3 1.1 Definitions of Reliability 3 1.1.1 Probability of Survival 3 1.2 Component Reliability Modeling 6 1.2.1 Discrete Probability Distributions 6 1.2.2 Continuous Probability Distributions 8 1.2.3 Physics-of-Failure Equations 13 1.3 System Reliability Modeling 15 1.3.1 Series System 15 1.3.2 Parallel System 16 1.3.3 Series-parallel System 16 1.3.4 K-out-of-n System 17 1.3.5 Network System 18 1.4 System Reliability Assessment Methods 18 1.4.1 Path-set and Cut-set Method 18 1.4.2 Decomposition and Factorization 19 1.4.3 Binary Decision Diagram 19 1.5 Exercises 20 References 22 2 Optimization 23 2.1 Optimization Problems 23 2.1.1 Component Reliability Enhancement 23 2.1.2 Redundancy Allocation 24 2.1.3 Component Assignment 25 2.1.4 Maintenance and Testing 26 2.2 Optimization Methods 30 2.2.1 Mathematical Programming 30 2.2.2 Meta-heuristics 34 2.3 Exercises 36 References 37 Part II Reliability Techniques 41 3 Multi-State Systems (MSSs) 43 3.1 Classical Multi-state Models 43 3.2 Generalized Multi-state Models 45 3.3 Time-dependent Multi-State Models 46 3.4 Methods to Evaluate Multi-state System Reliability 48 3.4.1 Methods Based on MPVs or MCVs 48 3.4.2 Methods Derived from Binary State Reliability Assessment 48 3.4.3 Universal Generating Function Approach 49 3.4.4 Monte Carlo Simulation 50 3.5 Exercises 51 References 51 4 Markov Processes 55 4.1 Continuous Time Markov Chain (CMTC) 55 4.2 In homogeneous Continuous Time Markov Chain 61 4.3 Semi-Markov Process (SMP) 66 4.4 Piecewise Deterministic Markov Process (PDMP) 74 4.5 Exercises 82 References 84 5 Monte Carlo Simulation (MCS) for Reliability and Availability Assessment 87 5.1 Introduction 87 5.2 Random Variable Generation 87 5.2.1 Random Number Generation 87 5.2.2 Random Variable Generation 89 5.3 Random Process Generation 93 5.3.1 Markov Chains 93 5.3.2 Markov Jump Processes 94 5.4 Markov Chain Monte Carlo (MCMC) 97 5.4.1 Metropolis-Hastings (M-H) Algorithm 97 5.4.2 Gibbs Sampler 98 5.4.3 Multiple-try Metropolis-Hastings (M-H) Method 99 5.5 Rare-Event Simulation 101 5.5.1 Importance Sampling 101 5.5.2 Repetitive Simulation Trials after Reaching Thresholds (RESTART) 102 5.6 Exercises 103 Appendix 104 References 115 6 Uncertainty Treatment under Imprecise or Incomplete Knowledge 117 6.1 Interval Number and Interval of Confidence 117 6.1.1 Definition and Basic Arithmetic Operations 117 6.1.2 Algebraic Properties 118 6.1.3 Order Relations 119 6.1.4 Interval Functions 120 6.1.5 Interval of Confidence 121 6.2 Fuzzy Number 121 6.3 Possibility Theory 123 6.3.1 Possibility Propagation 124 6.4 Evidence Theory 125 6.4.1 Data Fusion 128 6.5 Random-fuzzy Numbers (RFNs) 128 6.5.1 Universal Generating Function (UGF) Representation of Random-fuzzy Numbers 129 6.5.2 Hybrid UGF (HUGF) Composition Operator 130 6.6 Exercises 132 References 133 7 Applications 135 7.1 Distributed Power Generation System Reliability Assessment 135 7.1.1 Reliability of Power Distributed Generation (DG) System 135 7.1.2 Energy Source Models and Uncertainties 136 7.1.3 Algorithm for the Joint Propagation of Probabilistic and Possibilistic Uncertainties 138 7.1.4 Case Study 140 7.2 Nuclear Power Plant Components Degradation 140 7.2.1 Dissimilar Metal Weld Degradation 140 7.2.2 MCS Method 145 7.2.3 Numerical Results 147 References 149 Part III Optimization Methods and Applications 151 8 Mathematical Programming 153 8.1 Linear Programming (LP) 153 8.1.1 Standard Form and Duality 155 8.2 Integer Programming (IP) 159 8.3 Exercises 164 References 165 9 Evolutionary Algorithms (EAs) 167 9.1 Evolutionary Search 168 9.2 Genetic Algorithm (GA) 170 9.2.1 Encoding and Initialization 171 9.2.2 Evaluation 172 9.2.3 Selection 173 9.2.4 Mutation 174 9.2.5 Crossover 175 9.2.6 Elitism 178 9.2.7 Termination Condition and Convergence 178 9.3 Other Popular EAs 179 9.4 Exercises 181 References 182 10 Multi-Objective Optimization (MOO) 185 10.1 Multi-objective Problem Formulation 185 10.2 MOO-to-SOO Problem Conversion Methods 187 10.2.1 Weighted-sum Approach 188 10.2.2 ε-constraint Approach 189 10.3 Multi-objective Evolutionary Algorithms 190 10.3.1 Fast Non-dominated Sorting Genetic Algorithm (NSGA-II) 190 10.3.2 Improved Strength Pareto Evolutionary Algorithm (SPEA 2) 193 10.4 Performance Measures 197 10.5 Selection of Preferred Solutions 200 10.5.1 “Min-Max” Method 200 10.5.2 Compromise Programming Approach 201 10.6 Guidelines for Solving RAMS+C Optimization Problems 201 10.7 Exercises 203 References 204 11 Optimization under Uncertainty 207 11.1 Stochastic Programming (SP) 207 11.1.1 Two-stage Stochastic Linear Programs with Fixed Recourse 209 11.1.2 Multi-stage Stochastic Programs with Recourse 217 11.2 Chance-Constrained Programming 218 11.2.1 Model and Properties 219 11.2.2 Example 221 11.3 Robust Optimization (RO) 222 11.3.1 Uncertain Linear Optimization (LO) and its Robust Counterparts 223 11.3.2 Tractability of Robust Counterparts 224 11.3.3 Robust Optimization (RO) with Cardinality Constrained Uncertainty Set 225 11.3.4 Example 226 11.4 Exercises 228 References 229 12 Applications 231 12.1 Multi-objective Optimization (MOO) Framework for the Integration of Distributed Renewable Generation and Storage 231 12.1.1 Description of Distributed Generation (DG) System 232 12.1.2 Optimal Power Flow (OPF) 234 12.1.3 Performance Indicators 235 12.1.4 MOO Problem Formulation 237 12.1.5 Solution Approach and Case Study Results 238 12.2 Redundancy Allocation for Binary-State Series-Parallel Systems (BSSPSs) under Epistemic Uncertainty 240 12.2.1 Problem Description 240 12.2.2 Robust Model 241 12.2.3 Experiment 243 References 244 Index 245

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe Book The behaviour of helicopters and tiltrotor aircraft is so complex that understanding the physical mechanisms at work in trim, stability and response, and thus the prediction of Flying Qualities, requires a framework of analytical and numerical modelling and simulation. Good Flying Qualities are vital for ensuring that mission performance is achievable with safety and, in the first and second editions of Helicopter Flight Dynamics, a comprehensive treatment of design criteria was presented, relating to both normal and degraded Flying Qualities. Fully embracing the consequences of Degraded Flying Qualities during the design phase will contribute positively to safety. In this third edition, two new Chapters are included. Chapter 9 takes the reader on a journey from the origins of the story of Flying Qualities, tracing key contributions to the developing maturity and to the current position. Chapter 10 provides a comprehensive treatment of the Flight Dynamics of tTable of ContentsSeries Preface xv Preface to Third Edition xvii Preface to Second Edition xix Preface to First Edition xxiii Acknowledgements xxvii Notation xxix List of Abbreviations xxxix Chapter 1 Introduction 1.1 Simulation Modelling 2 1.2 Flying Qualities 3 1.3 Missing Topics 4 1.4 Simple Guide to the Book 5 Chapter 2 Helicopter and Tiltrotor Flight Dynamics – An Introductory Tour 2.1 Introduction 8 2.2 Four Reference Points 9 2.2.1 The Mission and Piloting Tasks 9 2.2.2 The Operational Environment 12 2.2.3 The Vehicle Configuration, Dynamics, and Flight Envelope 13 2.2.4 The Pilot and Pilot–Vehicle Interface 19 2.2.5 Résumé of the Four Reference Points 20 2.3 Modelling Helicopter/Tiltrotor Flight Dynamics 21 2.3.1 The Problem Domain 21 2.3.2 Multiple Interacting Subsystems 22 2.3.3 Trim, Stability, and Response 24 2.3.4 The Flapping Rotor in a Vacuum 25 2.3.5 The Flapping Rotor in Air – Aerodynamic Damping 28 2.3.6 Flapping Derivatives 31 2.3.7 The Fundamental 90∘ Phase Shift 31 2.3.8 Hub Moments and Rotor/Fuselage Coupling 32 2.3.9 Linearization in General 35 2.3.10 Stability and Control Résumé 36 2.3.11 The Static Stability Derivative Mw 37 2.3.12 Rotor Thrust, Inflow, Zw, and Vertical Gust Response in Hover 39 2.3.13 Gust Response in Forward Flight 41 2.3.14 Vector-Differential Form of Equations of Motion 42 2.3.15 Validation 45 2.3.16 Inverse Simulation 48 2.3.17 Modelling Review 49 2.4 Flying Qualities 50 2.4.1 Pilot Opinion 50 2.4.2 Quantifying Quality Objectively 51 2.4.3 Frequency and Amplitude – Exposing the Natural Dimensions 52 2.4.4 Stability – Early Surprises Compared with Aeroplanes 53 2.4.5 Pilot-in-the-Loop Control; Attacking a Manoeuvre 56 2.4.6 Bandwidth – A Parameter for All Seasons? 57 2.4.7 Flying a Mission Task Element 59 2.4.8 The Cliff Edge and Carefree Handling 60 2.4.9 Agility Factor 60 2.4.10 Pilot’s Workload 61 2.4.11 Inceptors and Displays 63 2.4.12 Operational Benefits of Flying Qualities 63 2.4.13 Flying Qualities Review 65 2.5 Design for Flying Qualities; Stability and Control Augmentation 66 2.5.1 Impurity of Primary Response 67 2.5.2 Strong Cross-Couplings 67 2.5.3 Response Degradation at Flight Envelope Limits 67 2.5.4 Poor Stability 68 2.5.5 The Rotor as a Control Filter 68 2.5.6 Artificial Stability 69 2.6 Tiltrotor Flight Dynamics 71 2.7 Chapter Review 71 Chapter 3 Modelling Helicopter Flight Dynamics: Building a Simulation Model 3.1 Introduction and Scope 74 3.2 The Formulation of Helicopter Forces and Moments in Level 1 Modelling 78 3.2.1 Main Rotor 79 3.2.2 The Tail Rotor 120 3.2.3 Fuselage and Empennage 122 3.2.4 Powerplant and Rotor Governor 127 3.2.5 Flight Control System 129 3.3 Integrated Equations of Motion of the Helicopter 134 3.4 Beyond Level 1 Modelling 136 3.4.1 Rotor Aerodynamics and Dynamics 137 3.4.2 Interactional Aerodynamics 143 3.5 Chapter 3 Epilogue 147 Appendix 3A Frames of Reference and Coordinate Transformations 153 3A.1 The Inertial Motion of the Aircraft 153 3A.2 The Orientation Problem – Angular Coordinates of the Aircraft 156 3A.3 Components of Gravitational Acceleration along the Aircraft Axes 158 3A.4 The Rotor System – Kinematics of a Blade Element 158 3A.5 Rotor Reference Planes – Hub, Tip Path, and No-Feathering 161 Chapter 4 Modelling Helicopter Flight Dynamics: Trim and Stability Analysis 4.1 Introduction and Scope 164 4.2 Trim Analysis 168 4.2.1 The General Trim Problem 170 4.2.2 Longitudinal Partial Trim 171 4.2.3 Lateral/Directional Partial Trim 176 4.2.4 Rotorspeed/Torque Partial Trim 178 4.2.5 Balance of Forces and Moments 178 4.2.6 Control Angles to Support the Forces and Moments 179 4.3 Stability Analysis 181 4.3.1 Linearization 183 4.3.2 The Derivatives 187 4.3.3 The Natural Modes of Motion 205 Appendix 4A The Analysis of Linear Dynamic Systems (with Special Reference to 6-Dof Helicopter Flight) 218 Appendix 4B The Three Case Helicopters: Lynx, Bo105 and Puma 227 4B.1 Aircraft Configuration Parameters 227 The RAE (DRA) Research Lynx, ZD559 227 The DLR Research Bo105, S123 229 The RAE (DRA) Research Puma, XW241 231 Fuselage Aerodynamic Characteristics 233 Lynx 233 Bo105 233 Puma 233 Empennage Aerodynamic Characteristics 234 Lynx 234 Bo105 234 Puma 234 4B.2 Stability and Control Derivatives 234 4B.3 Tables of Stability and Control Derivatives and System Eigenvalues 242 Appendix 4C The Trim Orientation Problem 258 Chapter 5 Modelling Helicopter Flight Dynamics: Stability Under Constraint and Response Analysis 5.1 Introduction and Scope 262 5.2 Stability Under Constraint 263 5.2.1 Attitude Constraint 264 5.2.2 Flight Path Constraint 275 5.3 Analysis of Response to Controls 283 5.3.1 General 283 5.3.2 Heave Response to Collective Control Inputs 284 5.3.3 Pitch and Roll Response to Cyclic Pitch Control Inputs 291 5.3.4 Yaw/Roll Response to Pedal Control Inputs 301 5.4 Response to Atmospheric Disturbances 309 Appendix 5A Speed Stability Below Minimum Power; A Forgotten Problem? 315 Chapter 6 Flying Qualities: Objective Assessment and Criteria Development 6.1 General Introduction to Flying Qualities 334 6.2 Introduction and Scope: The Objective Measurement of Quality 338 6.3 Roll Axis Response Criteria 341 6.3.1 Task Margin and Manoeuvre Quickness 341 6.3.2 Moderate to Large Amplitude/Low to Moderate Frequency: Quickness and Control Power 347 6.3.3 Small Amplitude/Moderate to High Frequency: Bandwidth 353 6.3.4 Small Amplitude/Low to Moderate Frequency: Dynamic Stability 371 6.3.5 Trim and Quasi-Static Stability 372 6.4 Pitch Axis Response Criteria 374 6.4.1 Moderate to Large Amplitude/Low to Moderate Frequency: Quickness and Control Power 374 6.4.2 Small Amplitude/Moderate to High Frequency: Bandwidth 377 6.4.3 Small Amplitude/Low to Moderate Frequency: Dynamic Stability 378 6.4.4 Trim and Quasi-Static Stability 381 6.5 Heave Axis Response Criteria 385 6.5.1 Criteria for Hover and Low-Speed Flight 388 6.5.2 Criteria for Torque and Rotorspeed During Vertical Axis Manoeuvres 391 6.5.3 Heave Response Criteria in Forward Flight 392 6.5.4 Heave Response Characteristics in Steep Descent 393 6.6 Yaw Axis Response Criteria 395 6.6.1 Moderate to Large Amplitude/Low to Moderate Frequency: Quickness and Control Power 396 6.6.2 Small Amplitude/Moderate to High Frequency: Bandwidth 398 6.6.3 Small Amplitude/Low to Moderate Frequency: Dynamic Stability 398 6.6.4 Trim and Quasi-Static Stability 401 6.7 Cross-Coupling Criteria 402 6.7.1 Pitch-to-Roll and Roll-to-Pitch Couplings 402 6.7.2 Collective to Yaw Coupling 404 6.7.3 Sideslip to Pitch and Roll Coupling 405 6.8 Multi-Axis Response Criteria and Novel-Response Types 406 6.8.1 Multi-Axis Response Criteria 406 6.8.2 Novel Response Types 407 6.9 Objective Criteria Revisited 410 Chapter 7 Flying Qualities: Subjective Assessment and Other Topics 7.1 Introduction and Scope 418 7.2 The Subjective Assessment of Flying Quality 419 7.2.1 Pilot Handling Qualities Ratings – HQRs 420 7.2.2 Conducting a Handling Qualities Experiment 425 7.3 Special Flying Qualities 438 7.3.1 Agility 438 7.3.2 The Integration of Controls and Displays for Flight in Degraded Visual Environments 445 7.3.3 Carefree Flying Qualities 455 7.4 Pilot’s Controllers 462 7.5 The Contribution of Flying Qualities to Operational Effectiveness and the Safety of Flight 464 Chapter 8 Flying Qualities: Forms of Degradation 8.1 Introduction and Scope 470 8.2 Flight in Degraded Visual Environments 472 8.2.1 Recapping the Usable Cue Environment 472 8.2.2 Visual Perception in Flight Control – Optical Flow and Motion Parallax 475 8.2.3 Time to Contact; Optical Tau, 𝜏 483 8.2.4 𝜏 Control in the Deceleration-to-Stop Manoeuvre 486 8.2.5 Tau-Coupling – A Paradigm for Safety in Action 487 8.2.6 Terrain-Following Flight in Degraded Visibility 494 8.2.7 What Now for Tau? 507 8.3 Handling Qualities Degradation through Flight System Failures 511 8.3.1 Methodology for Quantifying Flying Qualities Following Flight Function Failures 512 8.3.2 Loss of Control Function 514 8.3.3 Malfunction of Control – Hard-Over Failures 517 8.3.4 Degradation of Control Function – Actuator Rate Limiting 522 8.4 Encounters with Atmospheric Disturbances 524 8.4.1 Helicopter Response to Aircraft Vortex Wakes 525 8.4.2 Severity of Transient Response 538 8.5 Chapter Review 542 Appendix 8A HELIFLIGHT, HELIFLIGHT-R, and FLIGHTLAB at the University of Liverpool 545 8A.1 FLIGHTLAB 545 8A.2 Immersive Cockpit Environment 547 8A.3 HELIFLIGHT-R 551 Chapter 9 Flying Qualities: The Story of an Idea 9.1 Introduction and Scope 554 9.2 Historical Context of Rotorcraft Flying Qualities 557 9.2.1 The Early Years; Some Highlights from the 1940s–1950s 557 9.2.2 The Middle Years – Some Highlights from the 1960s–1970s 564 9.3 Handling Qualities as a Performance Metric – The Development of ADS-33 577 9.3.1 The Evolution of a Design Standard – The Importance of Process 578 9.3.2 Some Critical Innovations in ADS-33 579 9.4 The UK MoD Approach 579 9.5 Roll Control; A Driver for Rotor Design 580 9.6 Helicopter Agility 583 9.6.1 ADS-33 Tailoring and Applications 585 9.6.2 Handling Qualities as a Safety Net; The Pilot as a System Component 587 9.7 The Future Challenges for Rotorcraft Handling Qualities Engineering 593 Chapter 10 Tiltrotor Aircraft: Modelling and Flying Qualities 10.1 Introduction and Scope 598 10.2 Modelling and Simulation of Tiltrotor Aircraft Flight Dynamics 604 10.2.1 Building a Simulation Model 605 10.2.2 Interactional Aerodynamics in Low-Speed Flight 620 10.2.3 Vortex Ring State and the Consequences for Tiltrotor Aircraft 621 10.2.4 Trim, Linearisation, and Stability 626 10.2.5 Response Analysis 632 10.3 The Flying Qualities of Tiltrotor Aircraft 635 10.3.1 General 635 10.3.2 Developing Tiltrotor Mission Task Elements 638 10.3.3 Flying Qualities of Tiltrotors; Clues from the Eigenvalues 644 10.3.4 Agility and Closed-Loop Stability of Tiltrotors 652 10.3.5 Flying Qualities during the Conversion 670 10.3.6 Improving Tiltrotor Flying Qualities with Stability and Control Augmentation 673 10.4 Load Alleviation versus Flying Qualities for Tiltrotor Aircraft 686 10.4.1 Drawing on the V-22 Experience 686 10.4.2 Load Alleviation for the European Civil Tiltrotor 688 10.5 Chapter Epilogue; Tempus Fugit for Tiltrotors 698 Appendix 10A Flightlab Axes Systems and Gimbal Flapping Dynamics 700 10A.1 FLIGHTLAB Axes Systems 700 10A.2 Gimbal Flapping Dynamics 703 Appendix 10B The XV-15 Tiltrotor 705 Aircraft Configuration Parameters 705 XV-15 3-view 707 XV-15 Control Ranges and Gearings 707 Appendix 10C The FXV-15 Stability and Control Derivatives 710 10C.1 Graphical Forms 710 10C.2 FXV-15 Stability and Control Derivative and Eigenvalue Tables 725 Helicopter Mode (Matrices Shown with and without (nointf) Aerodynamic Interactions) 725 Conversion Mode 733 Airplane Mode 737 Appendix 10D Proprotor Gimbal Dynamics in Airplane Mode 742 Appendix 10E Tiltrotor Directional Instability Through Constrained Roll Motion: An Elusive, Paradoxical Dynamic 746 10E.1 Background and the Effective Directional Stability 746 10E.2 Application to Tiltrotors 747 References 753 Index 789

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book provides an introduction to the theory and design of composite structures of steel and concrete. Material applicable to both buildings and bridges is included, with more detailed information relating to structures for buildings. Throughout, the design methods are illustrated by calculations in accordance with the Eurocode for composite structures, EN 1994, Part 1-1, General rules and rules for buildings' and Part 1-2, Structural fire design', and their cross-references to ENs 1990 to 1993. The methods are stated and explained, so that no reference to Eurocodes is needed. The use of Eurocodes has been required in the UK since 2010 for building and bridge structures that are publicly funded. Their first major revision began in 2015, with the new versions due in the early 2020s. Both authors are involved in the work on Eurocode 4. They explain the expected additions and changes, and their effect in the worked examples for a multi-storey framed structure for a building,Table of ContentsPreface xi Symbols, Terminology and Units xv 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Composite beams and slabs 1 1.2 Composite columns and frames 2 1.3 Design philosophy and the Eurocodes 3 1.3.1 Background 3 1.3.2 Limit state design philosophy 4 1.4 Properties of materials 8 1.4.1 Concrete 9 1.4.2 Reinforcing steel 10 1.4.3 Structural steel 10 1.4.4 Profiled steel sheeting 10 1.4.5 Shear connectors 11 1.5 Direct actions (loading) 11 1.6 Methods of analysis and design 12 1.6.1 Typical analyses 13 1.6.2 Non-linear global analysis 17 2 Shear Connection 19 2.1 Introduction 19 2.2 Simply-supported beam of rectangular cross-section 20 2.2.1 No shear connection 20 2.2.2 Full interaction 22 2.3 Uplift 24 2.4 Methods of shear connection 25 2.4.1 Bond 25 2.4.2 Shear connectors 25 2.4.3 Shear connection for profiled steel sheeting 29 2.5 Properties of shear connectors 29 2.5.1 Stud connectors used with profiled steel sheeting 33 2.5.2 Stud connectors in a ‘lying’ position 38 2.5.3 Example: stud connectors in a ‘lying’ position 39 2.6 Partial interaction 41 2.7 Effect of degree of shear connection on stresses and deflections 43 2.8 Longitudinal shear in composite slabs 44 2.8.1 The shear-bond test 45 2.8.2 Design by the m–k method 47 2.8.3 Defects of the m–k method 47 3 Simply-supported Composite Slabs and Beams 49 3.1 Introduction 49 3.2 Example: layout, materials and loadings 49 3.2.1 Properties of concrete 50 3.2.2 Properties of other materials 50 3.2.3 Resistance of the shear connectors 51 3.2.4 Permanent actions 51 3.2.5 Variable actions 51 3.3 Composite floor slabs 51 3.3.1 Resistance of composite slabs to sagging bending 54 3.3.2 Resistance of composite slabs to longitudinal shear by the partial-interaction method 56 3.3.3 Resistance of composite slabs to vertical shear 58 3.3.4 Punching shear 59 3.3.5 Bending moments from concentrated point and line loads 60 3.3.6 Serviceability limit states for composite slabs 62 3.4 Example: composite slab 63 3.4.1 Profiled steel sheeting as formwork 64 3.4.2 Composite slab – flexure and vertical shear 65 3.4.3 Composite slab – longitudinal shear 66 3.4.4 Local effects of point load 68 3.4.5 Composite slab – serviceability 69 3.4.6 Example: composite slab for a shallow floor using deep decking 70 3.4.7 Comments on the designs of the composite slab 73 3.5 Composite beams – sagging bending and vertical shear 73 3.5.1 Effective cross-section 73 3.5.2 Classification of steel elements in compression 74 3.5.3 Resistance to sagging bending 76 3.5.4 Resistance to vertical shear 84 3.5.5 Resistance of beams to bending combined with axial force 85 3.6 Composite beams – longitudinal shear 86 3.6.1 Critical lengths and cross-sections 86 3.6.2 Non-ductile, ductile and super-ductile stud shear connectors 87 3.6.3 Transverse reinforcement 90 3.6.4 Detailing rules 94 3.7 Stresses, deflections and cracking in service 95 3.7.1 Elastic analysis of composite sections in sagging bending 96 3.7.2 The use of limiting span-to-depth ratios 98 3.8 Effects of shrinkage of concrete and of temperature 99 3.9 Vibration of composite floor structures 99 3.9.1 Prediction of fundamental natural frequency 101 3.9.2 Response of a composite floor to pedestrian traffic 103 3.10 Hollow-core and solid precast floor slabs 104 3.10.1 Joints, longitudinal shear and transverse reinforcement 105 3.10.2 Design of composite beams that support precast slabs 105 3.11 Example: simply-supported composite beam 107 3.11.1 Composite beam – full-interaction flexure and vertical shear 108 3.11.2 Composite beam – partial shear connection, non-ductile connectors and transverse reinforcement 110 3.11.3 Composite beam – deflection and vibration 113 3.12 Shallow floor construction 117 3.13 Example: composite beam for a shallow floor using deep decking 119 3.14 Composite beams with large web openings 122 4 Continuous Beams and Slabs, and Beams in Frames 129 4.1 Types of global analysis and of beam-to-column joint 129 4.2 Hogging moment regions of continuous composite beams 133 4.2.1 Resistance to bending 133 4.2.2 Vertical shear, and moment-shear interaction 137 4.2.3 Longitudinal shear 138 4.2.4 Lateral buckling 139 4.2.5 Cracking of concrete 144 4.3 Global analysis of continuous beams 149 4.3.1 General 149 4.3.2 Elastic analysis 150 4.3.3 Rigid-plastic analysis 154 4.4 Stresses and deflections in continuous beams 156 4.5 Design strategies for continuous beams 157 4.6 Example: continuous composite beam 158 4.6.1 Data 158 4.6.2 Flexure and vertical shear 160 4.6.3 Lateral buckling 162 4.6.4 Shear connection and transverse reinforcement 164 4.6.5 Check on deflections 165 4.6.6 Control of cracking 168 4.7 Continuous composite slabs 169 5 Composite Columns and Frames 171 5.1 Introduction 171 5.2 Composite columns 173 5.3 Beam-to-column joints 173 5.3.1 Properties of joints 173 5.3.2 Classification of joints 179 5.4 Design of non-sway composite frames 180 5.4.1 Imperfections 180 5.4.2 Elastic stiffnesses of members 182 5.4.3 Methods of global analysis 183 5.4.4 First-order global analysis of braced frames 184 5.4.5 Outline sequence for design of a composite braced frame 186 5.5 Example: composite frame 187 5.5.1 Data 187 5.5.2 Design action effects and load arrangements 188 5.6 Simplified design method of EN 1994-1-1, for columns 189 5.6.1 Introduction 189 5.6.2 Detailing rules, and resistance to fire 190 5.6.3 Properties of column lengths 191 5.6.4 Resistance of a cross-section to combined compression and uniaxial bending 192 5.6.5 Verification of a column length 193 5.6.6 Transverse and longitudinal shear 195 5.6.7 Concrete-filled steel tubes 196 5.7 Example (continued): external column 197 5.7.1 Action effects 197 5.7.2 Properties of the cross-section, and y-axis slenderness 198 5.7.3 Resistance of the column length, for major-axis bending 201 5.7.4 Resistance of the column length, for minor-axis bending 202 5.7.5 Checks on shear, and closing comment 204 5.8 Example (continued): internal column 205 5.8.1 Global analysis 205 5.8.2 Resistance of an internal column 207 5.8.3 Comment on column design 207 5.9 Example (continued): design of frame for horizontal forces 207 5.9.1 Design loadings, ultimate limit state 208 5.9.2 Stresses and stiffness 209 5.10 Example (continued): joints between beams and columns 209 5.10.1 Nominally-pinned joint at external column 209 5.10.2 End-plate joint at internal column 210 5.11 Example: concrete-filled steel tube with high-strength materials 216 5.11.1 Loading 216 5.11.2 Action effects for the column length 216 5.11.3 Effect of creep 217 5.11.4 Slenderness 218 5.11.5 Bending moment 218 5.11.6 Interaction polygon, and resistance 218 5.11.7 Discussion 219 6 Fire Resistance 223 Yong C.Wang 6.1 General introduction and additional symbols 223 6.1.1 Fire resistance requirements 224 6.1.2 Fire resistance design procedure 225 6.1.3 Partial safety factors and material properties 226 6.2 Composite slabs 226 6.2.1 General calculation method 226 6.2.2 Tabulated data 227 6.2.3 Tensile membrane action 227 6.3 Composite beams 229 6.3.1 Critical temperature method 229 6.3.2 Temperature of protected steel 232 6.3.3 Load-carrying capacity calculation method 234 6.3.4 Appraisal of different calculation methods for composite beams 238 6.3.5 Shear resistance 238 6.4 Composite columns 239 6.4.1 General calculation method and methods for different types of columns 240 6.4.2 Concrete-filled tubes 241 6.4.3 Worked example for concrete-filled tubes with eccentric loading 244 A Partial-interaction theory 247 A.1 Theory for simply-supported beam 247 A.2 Example: partial interaction 250 References 253 Index 259

Read more less

Book SynopsisValuable insights into the extraction, production, and properties of a large number of natural and synthetic oxides utilized in applications worldwide from ceramics, electronic components, and coatings This handbook describes each of the major oxides chronologicallystarting from the processes of extraction of ores containing oxides, their purification and transformations into pure alloyed powders, and their appropriate characterization up to the processes of formation of 2D films by such methods as PVD, CVD, and coatings by thermal spraying or complicated 3D objects by sintering and rapid prototyping. The selection of oxides has been guided by the current context of industrial applications. An important point that is considered in the book concerns the strategic aspects of oxides. Some oxides (e.g. rare earth ones) become more expensive due to the growing demand for them, others, because of the strategic importance of countries producing raw materials and the countries that are using tTable of ContentsPreface xiii Acknowledgments xvii Abbreviations and Symbols xix 1 Technical and Economic Importance of Oxides 1Lech Pawowski 1.1 Industrial Sectors in Development 1 1.1.1 Mechanical Applications of Oxides 1 1.1.1.1 Al2O3 3 1.1.1.2 ZrO2 3 1.1.2 Application of Oxides in Electrical and Electronic Engineering 4 1.1.3 Oxides for High-temperature Applications 7 1.1.4 Biomedical applications of oxides 9 1.2 Reserves, Availability and Economic Aspects of Oxides and their Ores 10 1.2.1 Al2O3 10 1.2.2 ZrO2 11 1.2.3 TiO2 12 1.2.4 Rare earth oxides: Y2O3 and CeO2 13 1.2.5 BaO 17 1.2.6 Cu2O 17 1.2.7 CaO 18 1.2.8 P2O5 19 References 20 2 Fundamentals of Oxide Manufacturing 25Lech Paw³owski 2.1 Introduction 25 2.1.1 Principal Manufacturing Processes 25 2.1.2 Oxide Powders 27 2.1.3 Major Phenomena in Manufacturing 27 2.2 Fundamentals of Selected Processes related to Oxide Manufacturing 28 2.2.1 Introduction 28 2.2.2 Fundamentals of Reactions in Gaseous Phase 28 2.2.2.1 Types of Reaction 28 2.2.2.2 Thermodynamic Calculations 29 2.2.2.3 Gas in Motion 30 2.2.2.4 Thermodynamics of Condensation 34 2.2.3 Fundamental Phenomena in Solutions 36 2.2.3.1 Introduction 36 2.2.3.2 Diffusion 36 2.2.3.3 Brownian Motion and Stokes’ Law 37 2.2.4 Fundamental Phenomena in Suspensions 38 2.2.4.1 Introduction 38 2.2.4.2 Forces and Energies in Suspension 39 2.2.4.3 Characterization of Suspensions 43 2.2.4.4 Gelation 47 2.2.5 Characterization of Powders 48 2.2.5.1 Size and Shape 48 2.2.5.2 Chemical and Phase Composition 49 2.2.5.3 External and InternalMorphology 53 2.2.5.4 Apparent Density and Flowability 53 2.3 Selected Oxide Powder Production Methods 54 2.3.1 Introduction 54 2.3.2 Granulation of Powders 55 2.3.2.1 Direct Granulation 55 2.3.2.2 Spray Drying 56 2.3.3 High-temperature Synthesis of Powders 60 2.3.3.1 Sintering and Melting 60 2.3.3.2 Self-propagating High-temperature Synthesis 61 2.3.3.3 Mechanofusion 63 2.3.4 Synthesis of Powders from Solutions 63 2.3.4.1 Sol–Gel 64 2.3.4.2 Synthesis by Reaction of Liquids (Wet Precipitation) 64 2.3.5 Powder Synthesis by CVD 64 2.4 Manufacturing Objects in 2D: Films and Coatings 70 2.4.1 Introduction 70 2.4.2 Chemical Methods of Thin Film Deposition 71 2.4.2.1 Sol–Gel 71 2.4.2.2 Electrolytic anodization 74 2.4.3 Physical Methods of Thin Film Deposition 76 2.4.3.1 CVD Methods 76 2.4.3.2 PVD Methods 79 2.4.4 Methods of Coating Deposition 86 2.4.4.1 Thermal Spraying 86 2.4.4.2 Bulk Coatings Methods 96 2.5 Manufacturing Objects in 3D 102 2.5.1 Introduction 102 2.5.2 Forming 103 2.5.3 Sintering 106 2.5.4 Rapid Prototyping 114 3 Extraction, Properties and Applications of Alumina 125Lech Paw³owski 3.1 Introduction 125 3.2 Reserves of Bauxite and Mining 125 3.3 Methods of Obtaining Alumina 127 3.3.1 Bayer Process 127 3.3.1.1 Chemical Backgrounds 128 3.3.1.2 Technology of the Bayer Process 128 3.3.1.3 Waste Management 130 3.3.2 Pure Alumina Powder Synthesis 131 3.3.3 Alumina Recovery from Coal Ashes 132 3.3.3.1 Sintering Process 134 3.3.3.2 Leaching Process 135 3.4 Properties of Alumina 135 3.4.1 Thermodynamical and Chemical Properties of Monocristalline Alumina 137 3.4.2 Properties of Alumina 137 3.4.2.1 Thermophysical Properties of Alumina 138 3.4.2.2 Self-diffusion Data of Alumina 139 3.4.2.3 Electrical Properties of Alumina 139 3.4.2.4 Dielectric Properties of Alumina 140 3.4.2.5 Mechanical Properties of Alumina 142 3.5 Methods of Alumina Functionalizing 145 3.5.1 Introduction 145 3.5.2 Alumina in 2D: Films and Coatings 145 3.5.2.1 Chemical Methods of Alumina Film Deposition 145 3.5.2.2 Atomistic Methods of Alumina Films Deposition 146 3.5.2.3 Granular Methods of Alumina Coating Deposition 147 3.5.3 Alumina in 3D 147 3.5.3.1 Forming 147 3.5.3.2 Sintering 147 3.5.3.3 Laser Machining 149 3.6 Applications of Alumina in Different Industries 150 3.6.1 Mechanical Engineering 150 3.6.1.1 Thread Guides in Textile Industries 150 3.6.1.2 Armor 151 3.6.1.3 Cutting Tools 151 3.6.2 Electronic and Electrical Applications 152 3.6.2.1 Substrates for Microelectronics 153 3.6.2.2 Corona Rolls 153 3.6.3 Biomedical 154 3.6.3.1 Hip Prosthesis 154 3.6.3.2 Dental Prostheses 155 3.6.3.3 Other Biomedical Applications 155 3.6.4 Chemical and Thermal Industries 155 3.6.4.1 Catalyst Supports 156 3.6.4.2 Heat Exchanger 156 3.6.5 Emerging Applications 156 Questions 157 References 158 4 Extraction, Properties and Applications of Zirconia 165Philippe Blanchart 4.1 Introduction 165 4.2 World Reserves of Ores and Mining Industry 165 4.3 Metallurgy of Zirconia 167 4.3.1 Chlorination andThermal Decomposition 167 4.3.2 Alkaline Oxide Decomposition 168 4.3.3 Lime Fusion 168 4.3.4 Thermal Decomposition of Zircon in a Plasma 168 4.4 Properties of Zirconia 169 4.4.1 Monocrystal 169 4.4.2 Partially and Fully Stabilized Zirconia Powders 170 4.4.3 Binary System ZrO2–MgO 171 4.4.4 Binary System ZrO2–CaO 172 4.4.5 Binary System ZrO2–Y2O3 173 4.4.6 Binary system ZrO2–CeO2 174 4.5 Physical Properties of Zirconia 175 4.5.1 Dilatation Coefficient with Temperature 175 4.5.2 Ionic Conductivity 176 4.5.3 Mechanical Properties and Toughness 177 4.5.4 Corrosion Resistance inWater Environment 179 4.5.5 Zirconia Composite Ceramics 181 4.6 Ceramic Sintering 182 4.6.1 Zirconia Sintering 182 4.6.2 Sintering of Alumina–Zirconia Composite Ceramics: 186 4.7 Industrial Applications of Zirconia 189 4.7.1 Biomedical 189 4.7.2 Solid Electrolyte 194 4.7.3 Zirconia Sensor 197 4.7.4 Thermal Barrier Coatings 199 4.8 Future Trends of Zirconia Materials 204 Questions 206 References 206 5 Synthesis, Properties and Applications of YBa2Cu3O7−x 211Lech Paw³owski 5.1 Introduction 211 5.2 Phase Diagram 212 5.3 Methods of YBa2Cu3O7−x Powder Manufacturing 213 5.3.1 Reactive Sintering 214 5.3.2 Synthesis of Powder from Solutions 215 5.3.2.1 Sol–gel 215 5.3.2.2 Wet PrecipitationMethods 215 5.3.2.3 Freeze-dryingMethod 216 5.4 Superconductivity of YBa2Cu3O7−x 216 5.4.1 Fundamentals of Superconductivity 217 5.4.2 High-temperature Superconductors 220 5.5 Properties of YBCO 221 5.6 Methods of YBa2Cu3O7−x Functionalizing 221 5.6.1 Introduction 221 5.6.2 YBCO in 2D: Films and Coatings 221 5.6.2.1 Thin Films 222 5.6.2.2 Thick Coatings byThermal Spraying 229 5.6.3 YBCO in 3D 232 5.6.3.1 Manufacturing ofWires 235 5.6.3.2 Manufacturing of Discs, Rings and Parallelepipeds 235 5.7 Industrial Applications of YBa2Cu3O7−X 239 5.7.1 Superconducting Cables 239 5.7.2 Fault Current Limiter 242 5.7.3 Magnetic Levitation Devices 243 5.7.4 High-power Superconducting Synchronous Generators 244 5.7.5 Magnetic Energy Storage Systems 245 5.7.6 Superconducting Transformers 246 5.7.7 YBCO Superconductors for Magnets in Tokamak Devices 246 5.7.8 Other Applications 247 References 247 6 Extraction, Properties and Applications of Titania 255Philippe Blanchart 6.1 Introduction 255 6.2 World Reserves and Mining Industry 255 6.3 Structural Characteristics of Titania 259 6.3.1 Anatase 259 6.3.2 Rutile 259 6.3.3 Brookite 260 6.3.4 TiOx phases 261 6.3.5 Structural Transformation of Anatase to Rutile 261 6.3.6 Synthesis of TiO2 263 6.4 Properties of Titanium Dioxide 265 6.4.1 General Physical Properties 265 6.4.2 General Chemical Properties 265 6.4.3 Structural Properties 266 6.4.4 Defect Chemistry of TiO2 268 6.4.5 Dielectric Properties of TiO2 Phases 269 6.4.6 Dielectric Properties vs. Microstructure of Ceramics 272 6.4.7 Dielectric Properties of TiO2 Films 274 6.4.8 TiO2 Sintering 276 6.4.9 TiO2 Coating Processing Methods 279 6.4.10 Optical Properties ofThin Films 282 6.4.11 Catalytic Properties 284 6.5 Industrial Applications of Titania 289 6.5.1 Titania Pigment 289 6.5.2 Industrial Uses of TiO2 Pigments 291 6.5.2.1 Vitreous Enamels on Steel and Aluminum 291 6.5.2.2 Paints 293 6.5.2.3 Paper 294 6.5.2.4 Textiles 295 6.5.3 Photocatalysts 296 6.6 Future Perspectives 300 6.6.1 Pigments 300 6.6.2 Photocatalysis 301 6.6.3 Solar Energy 302 6.6.4 TiO2 Nanotubes 302 Questions 303 References 303 7 Synthesis, Properties and Applications of Hydroxyapatite 311Lech Paw³owski 7.1 Introduction 311 7.2 Phase Diagram 311 7.3 Methods of Ca10(PO4)6(OH)2 Powder Manufacturing 313 7.3.1 Solid-state Synthesis 315 7.3.2 Wet-route Methods 316 7.3.2.1 Wet PrecipitationMethod 317 7.3.2.2 Sol–Gel Method 317 7.3.2.3 HA Synthesis by Atomization 318 7.3.3 Powder Synthesis using Natural Precursors 320 7.3.4 Synthesis of Nanopowders 321 7.3.5 Composite Powder Synthesis 322 7.4 Properties of Ca10(PO4)6(OH)2 324 7.4.1 Thermodynamic and Thermophysical Properties of HA 324 7.4.2 Mechanical Properties of HA 325 7.4.2.1 Single Crystals 326 7.4.2.2 Coatings 326 7.4.2.3 3D Objects 326 7.4.2.4 Electric Properties 328 7.4.3 Biochemical Properties 328 7.5 Methods of Ca10(PO4)6(OH)2 Functionalizing 330 7.5.1 Introduction 330 7.5.2 HA in 2D: Films and Coatings 330 7.5.2.1 Physical Methods of Film and Coatings Deposition 330 7.5.2.2 Chemical Methods of Film and Coating Deposition 336 7.5.3 HA in 3D 337 7.5.3.1 Conventional Sintering 337 7.5.3.2 Activated Sintering 338 7.6 Practical Applications of HA 340 7.6.1 Medical Applications 340 7.6.1.1 Hip Prostheses 340 7.6.1.2 Knee Prostheses 342 7.6.1.3 Dental Prostheses 343 7.6.1.4 Possible Future Applications 344 7.6.2 Catalysis 345 7.6.3 Biosensors 345 7.6.4 Other Possible Applications 345 Questions 345 References 346 Answers to Questions 353 Index 367

Read more less

Book SynopsisStart a successful career in machining Metalworking is an exciting field that's currently experiencing a shortage of qualified machinistsand there's no time like the present to capitalize on the recent surge in manufacturing and production opportunities. Covering everything from lathe operation to actual CNC programming, Machining For Dummies provides you with everything it takes to make a career for yourself as a skilled machinist. Written by an expert offering real-world advice based on experience in the industry, this hands-on guide begins with basic topics like tools, work holding, and ancillary equipment, then goes into drilling, milling, turning, and other necessary metalworking processes. You'll also learn about robotics and new developments in machining technology that are driving the future of manufacturing and the machining market. Be profitable in today's competitive manufacturing environmentSet up and operate a variety of computer-controlled and mechanically controlled machTable of ContentsIntroduction 1 About This Book 2 Foolish Assumptions 2 Icons Used in This Book 3 Beyond the Book 4 Where to Go from Here 4 Part 1: Turning Cranks and Pulling Handles 5 Chapter 1: Climbing the Manufacturing Ropes 7 Going Caveman: A World without Machining 8 Why it’s called chipmaking 9 What’s your job title? 11 Meeting Our Founding Fathers 11 Who got the machining ball rolling? 12 The other tools in the toolbox 15 Grappling with Machine Basics 16 Motoring about 17 Ways and means 19 Pulleys and gears 20 Turrets and tool changers 21 Spindle time 22 Bearing down 23 The nuts and bolts of motion 24 Chapter 2: Demystifying Machine Tools 25 Making Machine Tools Automatic 27 Screwing around with cam-operated machines 27 Multispindle madness 28 Mill-o-matic 28 The path to numerical control 28 Cutting through the red tape 29 Computer control 30 Halfway there 31 Milling About: Mills and Machining Centers 32 Taking the stand-up tour 33 Looking at it from all sides 35 Gantrification 37 Going horizontal 38 Sorry, this part’s boring 39 Turning It Up: Exploring Lathes 39 Engine lathes 40 Turret lathes 41 Twice as nice 41 Looking up 42 Going gangsta’43 Sliding about 43 It’s a Mill, It’s a Lathe It’s Supermachine! 44 Mill turn, or turn mill 44 Multitaskers 45 Chapter 3: Rounding Out the Rest of the Machining Processes 47 Touring Toolmaking 47 Cutting without cutters: EDM 48 Grinding 51 Sawing 53 Honing 54 Hobbing, shaving, and milling gears 55 Gun drilling 55 Peering into the Niches 57 Electron beam machining 57 From ECM to PECM 57 Ultrasonics 58 Appreciating the Alternatives 58 When we were fab 59 Welding 101 61 Chapter 4: Being Materialistic 63 Grappling with the Elements 64 Meditating on Metal Removal 66 Machinability according to AISI 66 Like cutting sandpaper 66 Harder than the dickens 67 Stringy like spaghetti 67 Gummier than Juicy Fruit 68 Exploring Metals 68 Ironing things out 68 Segueing to steel 70 Surveying the superalloys 74 Wrapping It Up with the Easy Stuff 76 From superchargers to soda cans 76 Red metals 77 Magnesium and zinc 77 Peeking at the polymers 78 Part 2: Tooling Up 81 Chapter 5: The Cutting Edge: Staying Sharp 83 Facing the Hard Facts 84 Getting Tough with High-Speed Steel 85 Going Fast and Furious: Carbide 87 Meet PEG 87 Micrograin marvels 88 Getting technical with ceramics 88 Coating conundrums 89 Round Tools: Notating on Rotating 90 Holemaking 101 90 All about drills 91 Selecting the right drill 92 Being productive 94 Holes need help, too 95 Tapping, tapping, at the door 96 Milling cutters 97 Staying put 100 Sticking with Stick Tools 100 The heavy lifters 101 Get in the groove 102 Nice threads 103 Not so boring 104 Cutting Advice 105 Chapter 6: Hanging on Tight with Workholding 107 Chucking Up on Lathes 108 Deciding how many and what type of jaws are needed 110 Collets, ho! 111 Making sense of shafts 113 It’s Not Spelled Vice: Going Orthogonal with Workholding 114 Doubling down 116 Not so fast 117 Five ways better 117 Holding horizontally 118 Hanging on to the Weird Ones 119 Chapter 7: Entering the Toolholding No Spin Zone 123 Hanging around with Rotary Tools 124 It’s taper time 125 Why 7/24 isn’t a date in the calendar 126 Faster, faster! 127 Cruising through the Toolholding Catalog 128 Hit me sideways 129 Meet Chuck’s little brother 129 Preventing pullout 130 The incredible shrinking toolholder 132 A few toolholding odds and ends 133 Turning about Is Fair Play 135 Giving lathe tools a wedgie 136 A bit about bushings and sleeves 137 Going Faster with Quick-Change 138 Chapter 8: Accessorizing for Success 141 Palletizing Your Parts 142 Buying a pallet changer–equipped machining center 142 Adding a pallet changer to an existing machine 143 Putting pallets on pallets 143 Giving Rotary Tables a Whirl 144 Viva, la difference 145 Round and round we go 146 Trunnion time 146 Raising the Bar with Bar Feeders 147 Step on up to the bar 148 Rattling about 149 Happiness through hydraulics 149 Collaborating with R2D2 151 Measuring Up 152 Touching off 153 Finding home 154 Taking It Offline 155 Presetting particulars 155 Achieving a nice balance 157 Going soft 158 Vending machines 158 Choosing the Right Machine Options 159 Cooling Down with High Pressure 161 Making Your Job Easier (and Safer) 162 Chip conveyors 162 It’s called smog for a reason 163 Part 3: Putting It All Together: Making Parts 165 Chapter 9: Succeeding with Software 167 Deciphering Software Acronyms 168 Here’s to Being a CAD 170 Playing with Models 171 Wondrous wireframes 172 Doing me a solid 172 CAMming It Up 173 Simulating Reality 175 Having Meaningful Conversations 176 Exploring File Formats 177 Making It Manufacturable 178 DFM and DFMA 179 FEA 180 Managing the Shop Floor 180 MES 181 TMS 181 Chapter 10: Measuring Up 183 Drawing Pretty Pictures 185 Tolerance is a good thing 185 Enter GD&T 186 Characterizing characteristics 188 Blocking and Tackling: Hard Gages 189 Playing with your blocks 190 Pinned down 191 Gages, gages, everywhere 192 Meeting Mic(rometer) 192 Filling the Shopping Cart 194 Touching the surface 195 Checking holes 196 Jumping at shadows 197 Checking around 198 Measuring with Machines 199 Hitting the Quality Road 200 Chapter 11: Demystifying G-Code 203 Eating the CNC Alphabet Soup 204 Moving along with G-Codes 206 Giddyup! 207 Straightening out 207 Round the clock 208 Coordinating Coordinates 209 Homing the machine 210 Thinking in absolutes 211 Compensating for Size (and Location) 212 Offset success 212 Go left, or right? 213 Cycling About: Canned and Multiple Repetitive Cycles 215 One line, or two 215 Best of both worlds 215 Don’t forget to cancel 216 Switching On with M-Codes 217 Making It with Macros 219 Chapter 12: Touring Some Machining Operations 221 Happy Holemaking 223 Threading the Needle 224 Internal threads 224 External threads 226 Taking the Right Turn 227 Facing About 228 Milling Madness 229 Face milling 229 Pocket milling 230 Surfacing 230 Slotting 231 Boring Better 232 Taming Interpolation 233 Getting the Burrs Off 234 Bouncing about 234 A charged situation 235 Chapter 13: Looking toward Tomorrow 237 Turning Out the Lights 238 Embracing an FMS 239 Getting cellular 241 Monitoring machines remotely 241 Unplugging Along 243 Staying Bug-Free 243 Making Tools Smarter 245 Busting chatter 246 Tagging along 247 Part 4: The Part of Tens 249 Chapter 14: Ten Ways to Make Processes Predictable 251 Thinking Scientifically 252 Learning Your Feeds and Speeds 253 Cutting speeds 254 Feed rates 256 Depth of cut 256 Watching for Tool Wear 257 Writing It Down 259 Staying Cool 259 Keeping Machines Healthy 260 Getting Torqued 261 Poka-yoking 262 Buying Right 262 Standardizing Everything 263 Chapter 15: Ten Terrific Tools, Tips, and Technologies 265 Adding It Up with Additive 266 Surfing the Internet of Things 267 Looking to the Cloud 269 Automating Everything 270 Riding Virtual Rollercoasters 271 Becoming Sustainable 272 Lightweighting the World 273 Losing the Paper Trail 274 Having Fun with Hybrids 275 Getting Small: MEMS Devices and Other Lilliputian Parts 277 Chapter 16: Ten Tips for Successful Machining 279 Machining Is Not a Dirty Word 280 Returning to School: Certification 281 Staying Lean 282 Developing Vertical Markets 283 Taking Tools Faster and Farther 284 Keeping Parts and Tools Put 285 Keeping Things (and People) Cool, Clean, and Safe 287 Setting Up Successfully 289 Taking Off the Gloves (and Putting On the Safety Glasses) 290 Embracing Change 292 Index 293

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsPreface xxxiii Chapter 1 Introduction to CMOS Design 1 1.1 The CMOS IC Design Process 1 1.1.1 Fabrication 2 1.2 CMOS Background 5 1.3 An Introduction to SPICE 8 Chapter 2 The Well 31 2.1 Patterning 32 2.1.1 Patterning the N-well 35 2.2 Laying Out the N-well 35 2.2.1 Design Rules for the N-well 36 2.3 Resistance Calculation 36 2.3.1 The N-well Resistor 38 2.4 The N-well/Substrate Diode 39 2.4.1 A Brief Introduction to PN Junction Physics 39 2.4.2 Depletion Layer Capacitance 42 2.4.3 Storage or Diffusion Capacitance 45 2.4.4 SPICE Modeling 46 2.5 The RC Delay through the N-well 48 2.6 Twin Well Processes 51 Chapter 3 The Metal Layers 59 3.1 The Bonding Pad 59 3.1.1 Laying Out the Pad I 60 3.2 Design and Layout Using the Metal Layers 63 3.2.1 Metal1 and Via1 63 3.2.2 Parasitics Associated with the Metal Layers 63 3.2.3 Current-Carrying Limitations 67 3.2.4 Design Rules for the Metal Layers 68 3.2.5 Contact Resistance 69 3.3 Crosstalk and Ground Bounce 70 3.3.1 Crosstalk 71 3.3.2 Ground Bounce 72 3.4 Layout Examples 74 3.4.1 Laying Out the Pad II 74 3.4.2 Laying Out Metal Test Structures 76 Chapter 4 The Active and Poly Layers 83 4.1 Layout Using the Active and Poly Layers 83 4.1.1 Process Flow 90 4.2 Connecting Wires to Poly and Active 93 4.3 Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Protection 99 Chapter 5 Resistors, Capacitors, MOSFETs 107 5.1 Resistors 107 5.2 Capacitors 115 5.3 MOSFETs 118 5.4 Layout Examples 125 Chapter 6 MOSFET Operation 135 6.1 MOSFET Capacitance Overview/Review 136 6.2 The Threshold Voltage 139 6.3 IV Characteristics of MOSFETs 144 6.3.1 MOSFET Operation in the Triode Region 144 6.3.2 The Saturation Region 146 6.4 SPICE Modeling of the MOSFET 149 6.4.1 Some SPICE Simulation Examples 151 6.4.2 The Subthreshold Current 152 6.5 Short-Channel MOSFETs 154 6.5.1 MOSFET Scaling 155 6.5.2 Short-Channel Effects 156 6.5.3 SPICE Models for Our Short-Channel CMOS Process 157 Chapter 7 CMOS Fabrication by Jeff Jessing 165 7.1 CMOS Unit Processes 165 7.1.1 Wafer Manufacture 165 7.1.2 Thermal Oxidation 167 7.1.3 Doping Processes 168 7.1.4 Photolithography 170 7.1.5 Thin Film Removal 173 7.1.6 Thin Film Deposition 177 7.2 CMOS Process Integration 180 7.2.1 Frontend-of-the-Line Integration 182 7.2.2 Backend-of-the-Line Integration 196 7.3 Backend Processes 210 7.4 Advanced CMOS Process Integration 212 7.4.1 FinFETs 213 7.4.2 Dual Damascene Low-k/Cu Interconnects 216 7.5 Summary 219 Chapter 8 Electrical Noise: An Overview 221 8.1 Signals 221 8.1.1 Power and Energy 221 8.1.2 Power Spectral Density 223 8.2 Circuit Noise 226 8.2.1 Calculating and Modeling Circuit Noise 227 8.2.2 Thermal Noise 231 8.2.3 Signal-to-Noise Ratio 237 8.2.4 Shot Noise 247 8.2.5 Flicker Noise 251 8.2.6 Other Noise Sources 258 8.3 Discussion 260 8.3.1 Correlation 260 8.3.2 Noise and Feedback 264 8.3.3 Some Final Notes Concerning Notation 267 Chapter 9 Models for Analog Design 277 9.1 Long-Channel MOSFETs 277 9.1.1 The Square-Law Equations 279 9.1.2 Small Signal Models 286 9.1.3 Temperature Effects 300 9.2 Short-Channel MOSFETs 302 9.2.1 General Design (A Starting Point) 303 9.2.2 Specific Design (A Discussion) 306 9.3 MOSFET Noise Modeling 308 Chapter 10 Models for Digital Design 327 10.1 The Digital MOSFET Model 328 10.1.2 Process Characteristic Time Constant 331 10.1.3 Delay and Transition Times 333 10.1.4 General Digital Design 326 10.2 The MOSFET Pass Gate 326 10.2.1 Delay through a Pass Gate 338 10.2.2 Delay through Series-Connected PGs 340 10.3 A Final Comment Concerning Measurements 341 Chapter 11 The Inverter 347 11.1 DC Characteristics 347 11.2 Switching Characteristics 352 11.3 Layout of the Inverter 356 11.4 Sizing for Large Capacitive Loads 358 11.5 Other Inverter Configurations 364 Chapter 12 Static Logic Gates 369 12.1 DC Characteristics of the NAND and NOR Gates 369 12.1.1 DC Characteristics of the NAND Gate 369 12.1.2 DC Characteristics of the NOR Gate 372 12.2 Layout of the NAND and NOR Gates 373 12.3 Switching Characteristics 374 12.3.1 NAND Gate 375 12.3.2 Number of Inputs 378 12.4 Complex CMOS Logic Gates 379 Chapter 13 Clocked Circuits 389 13.1 The CMOS TG 389 13.2 Applications of the Transmission Gate 391 13.3 Latches and Flip-Flops 395 13.4 Examples 402 Chapter 14 Dynamic Logic Gates 411 14.1 Fundamentals of Dynamic Logic 411 14.1.1 Charge Leakage 411 14.1.2 Simulating Dynamic Circuits 414 14.1.3 Nonoverlapping Clock Generation 415 14.1.4 CMOS TG in Dynamic Circuits 416 14.2 Clocked CMOS Logic 417 Chapter 15 CMOS Layout Examples 425 15.1 Chip Layout 426 15.2 Layout Steps by Dean Moriarty 434 Chapter 16 Memory Circuits 445 16.1 Array Architectures 446 16.1.1 Sensing Basics 446 16.1.2 The Folded Array 452 16.1.3 Chip Organization 458 16.2 Peripheral Circuits 458 16.2.1 Sense Amplifier Design 458 16.2.2 Row/Column Decoders 467 16.2.3 Row Drivers 470 16.3 Memory Cells 471 16.3.1 The SRAM Cell 473 16.3.2 Read-Only Memory (ROM) 473 16.3.3 Floating Gate Memory 473 Chapter 17 Sensing Using Modulation 493 17.1 Qualitative Discussion 494 17.1.1 Examples of DSM 494 17.1.2 Using DSM for Sensing in Flash Memory 496 17.2 Sensing Resistive Memory 506 17.3 Sensing in CMOS Imagers 513 Chapter 18 Special Purpose CMOS Circuits 533 18.1 The Schmitt Trigger 533 18.1.1 Design of the Schmitt Trigger 534 18.1.2 Applications of the Schmitt Trigger 536 18.2 Multivibrator Circuits 538 18.2.1 The Monostable Multivibrator 539 18.2.2 The Astable Multivibrator 540 18.3 Input Buffers 541 18.3.1 Basic Circuits 541 18.3.2 Differential Circuits 543 18.3.3 DC Reference 547 18.3.4 Reducing Buffer Input Resistance 550 18.4 Charge Pumps (Voltage Generators) 551 18.4.1 Increasing the Output Voltage 553 18.4.2 Generating Higher Voltages: The Dickson Charge Pump 553 18.4.3 Example 556 Chapter 19 Digital Phase-Locked Loops 561 19.1 The Phase Detector 563 19.1.1 The XOR Phase Detector 563 19.1.2 The Phase Frequency Detector 567 19.2 The Voltage-Controlled Oscillator 570 19.2.1 The Current-Starved VCO 570 19.2.2 Source-Coupled VCOs 574 19.3 The Loop Filter 576 19.3.1 XOR DPLL 577 19.3.2 PFD DPLL 583 19.4 System Concerns 590 19.4.1 Clock Recovery from NRZ Data 593 19.5 Delay-Locked Loops 600 19.6 Some Examples 603 19.6.1 A 2 GHz DLL 603 19.6.2 A 1 Gbit/s Clock-Recovery Circuit 609 Chapter 20 Current Mirrors 621 20.1 The Basic Current Mirror 621 20.1.1 Long-Channel Design 622 20.1.2 Matching Currents in the Mirror 624 20.1.3 Biasing the Current Mirror 628 20.1.4 Short-Channel Design 634 20.1.5 Temperature Behavior 638 20.1.6 Biasing in the Subthreshold Region 642 20.2 Cascoding the Current Mirror 643 20.2.1 The Simple Cascode 643 20.2.2 Low-Voltage (Wide-Swing) Cascode 645 20.2.3 Wide-Swing, Short-Channel Design 648 20.2.4 Regulated Drain Current Mirror 651 20.3 Biasing Circuits 653 20.3.1 Long-Channel Biasing Circuits 653 20.3.2 Short-Channel Biasing Circuits 656 20.3.3 A Final Comment 657 Chapter 21 Amplifiers 671 21.1 Gate-Drain Connected Loads 671 21.1.1 Common-Source (CS) Amplifiers 671 21.1.2 The Source Follower (Common-Drain Amplifier) 683 21.1.3 Common Gate Amplifier 684 21.2 Current Source Loads 685 21.2.1 Common-Source Amplifier 685 21.2.2 The Cascode Amplifier 698 21.2.3 The Common-Gate Amplifier 702 21.2.4 The Source Follower (Common-Drain Amplifier) 702 21.3 The Push-Pull Amplifier 710 21.3.1 DC Operation and Biasing 711 21.3.2 Small-Signal Analysis 714 21.3.3 Distortion 716 Chapter 22 Differential Amplifiers 735 22.1 The Source-Coupled Pair 735 22.1.1 DC Operation 735 22.1.2 AC Operation 741 22.1.3 Common-Mode Rejection Ratio 745 22.1.4 Matching Considerations 746 22.1.5 Noise Performance 749 22.1.6 Slew-Rate Limitations 750 22.2 The Source Cross-Coupled Pair 750 22.2.1 Current Source Load 754 22.3 Cascode Loads (The Telescopic Diff-Amp) 756 22.4 Wide-Swing Differential Amplifiers 758 22.4.1 Current Differential Amplifier 760 22.4.2 Constant Transconductance Diff-Amp 760 Chapter 23 Voltage References 773 23.1 MOSFET-Resistor Voltage References 774 23.1.1 The Resistor-MOSFET Divider 774 23.1.2 The MOSFET-Only Voltage Divider 777 23.1.3 Self-Biased Voltage References 778 23.2 Parasitic Diode-Based References 784 23.2.1 Long-Channel BGR Design 787 23.2.2 Short-Channel BGR Design 795 Chapter 24 Operational Amplifiers I 803 24.1 The Two-Stage Op-Amp 804 24.2 An Op-Amp with Output Buffer 822 24.3 The Operational Transconductance Amplifier (OTA) 824 24.4 Gain-Enhancement 835 24.5 Some Examples and Discussions 839 Chapter 25 Dynamic Analog Circuits 857 25.1 The MOSFET Switch 857 25.1.1 Sample-and-Hold Circuits 861 25.2 Fully-Differential Circuits 864 25.2.1 A Fully-Differential Sample-and-Hold 866 25.3 Switched-Capacitor Circuits 869 25.3.1 Switched-Capacitor Integrator 871 25.4 Circuits 879 Chapter 26 Operational Amplifiers II 889 26.1 Biasing for Power and Speed 889 26.1.1 Device Characteristics 890 26.1.2 Biasing Circuit 891 26.2 Basic Concepts 892 26.3 Basic Op-Amp Design 900 26.4 Op-Amp Design Using Switched-Capacitor CMFB 920 Chapter 27 Nonlinear Analog Circuits 933 27.1 Basic CMOS Comparator Design 933 27.1.1 Characterizing the Comparator 939 27.1.2 Clocked Comparators 942 27.1.3 Input Buffers Revisited 943 27.2 Adaptive Biasing 943 27.3 Analog Multipliers 946 27.3.1 The Multiplying Quad 947 Chapter 28 Data Converter Fundamentals by Harry Li 955 28.1 Analog Versus Discrete Time Signals 955 28.2 Converting Analog Signals to Digital Signals 956 28.3 Sample-and-Hold (S/H) Characteristics 959 28.4 Digital-to-Analog Converter (DAC) Specifications 961 28.5 Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) Specifications 970 28.6 Mixed-Signal Layout Issues 979 Chapter 29 Data Converter Architectures by Harry Li 987 29.1 DAC Architectures 987 29.1.1 Digital Input Code 987 29.1.2 Resistor String 987 29.1.3 R-2R Ladder Networks 992 29.1.4 Current Steering 995 29.1.5 Charge-Scaling DACs 999 29.1.6 Cyclic DAC 1003 29.1.7 Pipeline DAC 1005 29.2 ADC Architectures 1006 29.2.1 Flash 1006 29.2.2 The Two-Step Flash ADC 1010 29.2.3 The Pipeline ADC 1014 29.2.4 Integrating ADCs 1018 29.2.5 The Successive Approximation ADC 1022 29.2.6 The Oversampling ADC 1027 Chapter 30 Implementing Data Converters 1043 30.1 R-2R Topologies for DACs 1043 30.1.1 The Current-Mode R-2R DAC 1044 30.1.2 The Voltage-Mode R-2R DAC 1045 30.1.3 A Wide-Swing Current-Mode R-2R DAC 1047 30.1.4 Topologies Without an Op-Amp 1057 30.2 Op-Amps in Data Converters 1063 30.2.1 Op-Amp Gain 1066 30.2.2 Op-Amp Unity Gain Frequency 1067 30.2.3 Op-Amp Offset 1067 30.3 Implementing ADCs 1070 30.3.1 Implementing the S/H 1071 30.3.2 The Cyclic ADC 1077 30.3.3 The Pipeline ADC 1084 Chapter 31 Feedback Amplifiers with Harry Li 1115 31.1 The Feedback Equation 1115 31.2 Properties of Negative Feedback on Amplifier Design 1117 31.2.1 Gain Desensitivity 1117 31.3 Recognizing Feedback Topologies 1120 31.3.1 Input Mixing 1121 31.3.2 Output Sampling 1121 31.3.3 The Feedback Network 1122 31.3.4 Calculating Open-Loop Parameters 1125 31.3.5 Calculating Closed-Loop Parameters 1127 31.4 The Voltage Amp (Series-Shunt Feedback) 1128 31.5 The Transimpedance Amp (Shunt-Shunt Feedback) 1134 31.5.1 Simple Feedback Using a Gate-Drain Resistor 1140 31.6 The Transconductance Amp (Series-Series Feedback) 1142 31.7 The Current Amplifier (Shunt-Series Feedback) 1146 31.8 Stability 1148 31.8.1 The Return Ratio 1151 31.9 Design Examples 1154 31.9.1 Voltage Amplifiers 1154 31.9.2 A Transimpedance Amplifier 1158 Chapter 32 Hysteretic Power Converters 1175 32.1 A Review of Power and Energy Basics 1176 32.1.1 Energy Storage in Inductors and Capacitors 1177 32.1.2 Energy Use in Transmitting Data 1180 32.1.3 Selection and use of Switches 1181 32.2 Switching Power Supplies: Some Examples 1189 32.2.1 The Buck SPS 1189 32.2.2 The Boost SPS 1196 32.2.3 The Flyback SPS 1200 32.2.4 Pulse Width Modulation: A Control Loop Example 1204 32.3 Hysteretic Control 1210 32.3.1 Topologies 1211 32.3.2 Examples 1212 Index 1219 About the Author 1235

Read more less

Book SynopsisDIATOM MORPHOGENESIS A unique book presenting the range of silica structures formed by diatoms, theories and hypotheses of how they are made, and applications to nanotechnology by use or imitation of diatom morphogenesis. There are up to 200,000 species of diatoms, each species of these algal cells bearing an ornate, amorphous silica glass shell. The silica is structured at 7 orders of magnitude size range and is thus the most complex multiscalar solid structure known. Recent research is beginning to unravel how a single cell marshals chemical, physical, biochemical, genetic, and cytoskeletal processes to produce these single-cell marvels. The field of diatom nanotechnology is advancing as this understanding matures. Diatoms have been actively studied over the recent 10-20 years with various modern equipment, experimental and computer simulation approaches, including molecular biology, fluorescence-based methods, electron, confocal, and AFM microscopy. This has resulted in a huge amouTable of ContentsPreface xv Part 1: General Issues 1 1 Introduction for a Tutorial on Diatom Morphology 3Kalina Manoylov and Mohamed Ghobara 1.1 Diatoms in Brief 3 1.2 Tools to Explore Diatom Frustule Morphology 7 1.3 Diatom Frustule 3D Reconstruction 12 1.3.1 Recommended Steps to Understand the Complex Diatom Morphology: A Guide for Beginners 13 1.4 Conclusion 15 Acknowledgements 15 References 15 2 The Uncanny Symmetry of Some Diatoms and Not of Others: A Multi-Scale Morphological Characteristic and a Puzzle for Morphogenesis 19Janice L. Pappas, Mary Ann Tiffany and Richard Gordon 2.1 Introduction 20 2.1.1 Recognition and Symmetry 21 2.1.2 Symmetry and Growth 24 2.1.3 Diatom Pattern Formation, Growth, and Symmetry 25 2.1.4 Diatoms and Uncanny Symmetry 27 2.1.5 Purpose of This Study 28 2.2 Methods 28 2.2.1 Centric Diatom Images Used for Analysis 28 2.2.2 Centric Diatoms, Morphology, and Valve Formation 34 2.2.3 Image Entropy and Symmetry Measurement 36 2.2.4 Image Preparation for Measurement 37 2.2.5 Image Tilt and Slant Measurement Correction for Entropy Values 38 2.2.6 Symmetry Analysis 39 2.2.7 Entropy, Symmetry, and Stability 40 2.2.8 Randomness and Instability 42 2.3 Results 43 2.3.1 Symmetry Analysis 43 2.3.2 Valve Formation—Stability and Instability Analyses 49 2.4 Discussion 51 2.4.1 Symmetry and Scale in Diatoms 55 2.4.2 Valve Formation and Stability 56 2.4.3 Symmetry, Stability and Diatom Morphogenesis 57 2.4.4 Future Research—Symmetry, Stability and Directionality in Diatom Morphogenesis 58 References 59 3 On the Size Sequence of Diatoms in Clonal Chains 69Thomas Harbich 3.1 Introduction 70 3.2 Mathematical Analysis of t he Size Sequence 73 3.2.1 Alternative Method for Calculating the Size Sequence 73 3.2.2 Self-Similarity and Fractal Structure 75 3.2.3 Matching Fragments to a Generation Based on Known Size Indices of the Fragment 76 3.2.4 Sequence of the Differences of the Size Indices 78 3.2.5 Matching Fragments to a Generation Based on Unknown Size Indices of the Fragment 80 3.2.6 Synchronicity of Cell Divisions 81 3.3 Observations 82 3.3.1 Challenges in Verifying the Sequence of Sizes 82 3.3.2 Materials and Methods 83 3.3.3 Investigation of the Size Sequence of a Eunotia sp. 84 3.3.4 Synchronicity 86 3.4 Conclusions 87 Acknowledgements 88 Appendix 3A L-System for the Generation of the Sequence of Differences in Size Indices of Adjacent Diatoms 88 Appendix 3B Probability Consideration for Loss of Synchronicity 89 References 91 4 Valve Morphogenesis in Amphitetras antediluviana Ehrenburg 93Mary A. Tiffany and Bonnie L. Hurwitz 4.1 Introduction 93 4.2 Material and Methods 94 4.3 Observations 94 4.3.1 Amphitetras antediluviana Mature Valves 94 4.3.2 Amphitetras antediluviana Forming Valves 96 4.3.3 Amphitetras antediluviana Girdle Band Formation 101 4.4 Conclusion 101 Acknowledgments 102 References 102 Glossary 104 Part 2: Simulation 105 5 Geometric Models of Concentric and Spiral Areola Patterns of Centric Diatoms 107Anton M. Lyakh 5.1 Introduction 107 5.2 Set of Common Rules Used in the Models 109 5.3 Concentric Pattern of Areolae 109 5.4 Spiral Patterns of Areolae 110 5.4.1 Unidirectional Spiral Pattern 111 5.4.2 Bidirectional Spiral Pattern 113 5.4.3 Common Genesis of Unidirectional and Bidirectional Spiral Patterns 113 5.5 Conversion of an Areolae-Based Model Into a Frame-Based Model 114 5.6 Conclusion 114 Acknowledgements 114 References 115 6 Diatom Pore Arrays’ Periodicities and Symmetries in the Euclidean Plane: Nature Between Perfection and Imperfection 117Mohamed M. Ghobara, Mary Ann Tiffany, Richard Gordon and Louisa Reissig 6.1 Introduction 118 6.2 Materials and Methods 122 6.2.1 Micrograph Segmentation 123 6.2.2 Two-Dimensional Fast Fourier Analysis and Autocorrelation Function Analysis 123 6.2.3 Lattice Measurements and Recognition 123 6.2.4 Accuracy of 2D ACF-Based Calculations 125 6.2.5 The Perfection of the Unit Cell Parameters Between Different Parts (Groups of Pore Arrays) of the Same Valve and the Same Micrograph 126 6.3 Results and Discussion 126 6.3.1 Toward Standardization of the Methodology for the Recognition of 2D Periodicities of Pore Arrays in Diatom Micrographs 126 6.3.1.1 Using Two-Dimensional Fast Fourier Transform Analysis 126 6.3.1.2 Using Two-Dimensional Autocorrelation Function 131 6.3.1.3 The Accuracy of Lattice Parameters’ Measurements Using the Proposed 2D ACF Analysis 134 6.3.2 Exploring the Periodicity in Our Studied Micrographs and the Possible Presence of Different Types of 2D Lattices in Diatoms 137 6.3.2.1 Irregular Pore Scattering (Non-Periodic Pores) 137 6.3.2.2 Linear Periodicity of Pores in Striae (1D Periodicity) 138 6.3.2.3 The Different 2D Lattices in Diatom Pore Arrays 140 6.3.3 How Perfectly Can Diatoms Build Their 2D Pore Arrays? 146 6.3.3.1 Variation of the 2D Lattice Within the Connected Pore Array of the Valve 146 6.3.3.2 Comparison of 2D Lattice Parameters and Degree of Perfection of Distinct Pore Array Groups in the Same Micrograph and Valve but With Different Rotational or Reflection Symmetry 148 6.3.3.3 The Perfection of 2D Lattices of Diatom Pore Arrays Compared to Perfect (Non-Oblique) 2D Bravais Lattices 148 6.3.4 Planar Symmetry Groups to Describe the Whole Diatom Valve Symmetries and Additionally Describe the Complicated 2D Periodic Pore Arrays’ Symmetries 149 6.3.4.1 Rosette Groups 150 6.3.4.2 Frieze Groups 151 6.3.4.3 Wallpaper Groups 153 6.4 Conclusion 153 Acknowledgment 154 Glossary 154 References 155 7 Quantified Ensemble 3D Surface Features Modeled as a Window on Centric Diatom Valve Morphogenesis 159Janice L. Pappas 7.1 Introduction 159 7.1.1 From 3D Surface Morphology to Morphogenesis 160 7.1.2 Geometric Basis of 3D Surface Models and Analysis 163 7.1.3 Differential Geometry of 3D Surface 163 7.1.4 3D Surface Feature Geometry and Morphological Attributes 165 7.1.5 Centric Diatom Taxa Used as Exemplars in 3D Surface Models for Morphogenetic Analysis 166 7.1.6 Morphogenetic Descriptors of Centric Diatoms in Valve Formation as Sequential Change in 3D Surface Morphology 166 7.1.7 Purposes of This Study 167 7.2 Methods 168 7.2.1 Measurement of Ensemble Surface Features and 3D Surface Morphology: Derivation and Solution of the Jacobian, Hessian, Laplacian, and Christoffel Symbols 168 7.2.1.1 The Jacobian of 3D Surface Morphology 168 7.2.1.2 Monge Patch 169 7.2.1.3 First and Second Fundamental Forms and Surface Characterization of the Monge Patch 169 7.2.1.4 3D Surface Characterization via Gauss and Weingarten Maps and the Fundamental Forms 170 7.2.1.5 Peaks, Valleys, and Saddles of Surface Morphology and the Hessian 170 7.2.1.6 Smoothness as a Characterization of Surface Morphology and the Laplacian 171 7.2.1.7 Point Connections of 3D Surface Morphology and Christoffel Symbols 171 7.2.1.8 Protocol for Using Centric Diatom 3D Surface Models and Their Ensemble Surface Features in Valve Formation Analysis 173 7.3 Results 174 7.4 Discussion 184 7.4.1 Ensemble Surface Features and Physical Characteristics of Valve Morphogenesis 186 7.4.2 Factors Affecting Valve Formation 187 7.4.3 Diatom Growth Patterns—Buckling and Wave Fronts 187 7.4.4 Valve Formation, Ensemble Surface Features, and Self-Similarity 189 7.4.5 Diatom Morphogenesis: Cytoplasmic Inheritance and Phenotypic Plasticity 189 7.4.6 Phenotypic Variation and Ensemble Surface Features: Epistasis and Canalization 190 7.5 Conclusions 190 Acknowledgment 191 References 191 8 Buckling: A Geometric and Biophysical Multiscale Feature of Centric Diatom Valve Morphogenesis 195Janice L. Pappas and Richard Gordon 8.1 Introduction 196 8.2 Purpose of Study 197 8.3 Background: Multiscale Diatom Morphogenesis 198 8.3.1 Valve Morphogenesis—Schemata of Schmid and Volcani and of Hildebrand, Lerch, and Shrestha 198 8.3.2 Valve Formation—An Overview at the Microscale 199 8.3.3 Valve Formation—An Overview at the Meso- and Microscale 200 8.3.4 Valve Formation—An Overview at the Meso- and Nanoscale 200 8.4 Biophysics of Diatom Valve Formation and Buckling 201 8.4.1 Buckling as a Multiscale Measure of Valve Formation 201 8.4.2 Valve Formation—Cytoplasmic Features and Buckling 202 8.4.3 Buckling: Microtubule Filaments and Bundles 203 8.4.4 Buckling: Actin Filament Ring 204 8.5 Geometrical and Biophysical Aspects of Buckling and Valve Formation 205 8.5.1 Buckling: Geometry of Valve Formation as a Multiscale Wave Front 205 8.5.2 Buckling: Valve Formation and Hamiltonian Biophysics 207 8.5.3 Buckling: Valve Formation and Deformation Gradients 208 8.5.4 Buckling: Multiscale Measurement With Respect to Valve Formation 210 8.5.5 Buckling: Krylov Methods and Association of Valve Surface Buckling With Microtubule and Actin Buckling 210 8.6 Methods 211 8.6.1 Constructing and Analyzing 3D Valve Surface and 2D Microtubule and Actin Filament Models 211 8.6.2 Krylov Methods: Associating Valve Surface With Microtubule and Actin Filament Buckling 212 8.7 Results 212 8.8 Conclusion 216 References 223 9 Are Mantle Profiles of Circular Centric Diatoms a Measure of Buckling Forces During Valve Morphogenesis? 231Janice L. Pappas and Richard Gordon 9.1 Introduction 231 9.2 Methods 233 9.2.1 Background: Circular Centric 2D Profiles and 3D Surfaces of Revolution 236 9.3 Results 238 9.3.1 Approximate Constant Profile Length Representing Approximate Same Sized Valves 239 9.3.2 Change in Profile Length Representing Size Reduction During Valve Morphogenesis 240 9.3.2.1 Inferences About Complementarity and Heterovalvy 242 9.3.3 Are Profiles Measures of Buckling Forces During Valve Morphogenesis? 243 9.4 Discussion 245 9.4.1 Laminated Structures and Mantle Buckling Forces Affecting the Valve Profile 247 9.5 Conclusion 248 Acknowledgement 248 References 248 Part 3: Physiology, Biochemistry and Applications 251 10 The Effect of the Silica Cell Wall on Diatom Transport and Metabolism 253Mark Hildebrand Publications by and about Mark Hildebrand 254 11 Diatom Plasticity: Trends, Issues, and Applications on Modern and Classical Taxonomy, Eco‑Evolutionary Dynamics, and Climate Change 261Lawrence Victor D. Vitug 11.1 Introduction 261 11.2 Model Species: Phaeodactylum tricornutum 262 11.3 Transformation Mechanisms of P. tricornutum 263 11.4 Future Advances in the Phenotypic Plasticity on P. tricornutum 263 11.4.1 Genomic and Molecular Mechanisms in Diatom Phenotypic Plasticity 263 11.4.2 Biogeography of Diatoms 263 11.4.3 Eco-Evolutionary Dynamics Approach on Diatoms Phenotypic Plasticity 264 11.4.4 Adaptive Behavior and Evolutionary Changes in Diatoms Linking to Diatom Plasticity 265 11.4.5 Climate Change and Phenotypic Plasticity 265 11.5 Conclusion 265 References 265 12 Frustule Photonics and Light Harvesting Strategies in Diatoms 269Johannes W. Goessling, Yanyan Su, Michael Kühl and Marianne Ellegaard 12.1 Introduction 270 12.2 Light Spectral Characteristics and Signaling 274 12.2.1 Variation of Light Regimes 274 12.2.2 Light Perception and Signaling 275 12.3 Photosynthesis and Photo-Protection in Diatoms 276 12.3.1 Pigment-Based Light Absorption 276 12.3.2 Molecular Photo-Protection Mechanisms 276 12.3.3 Intracellular Structural Adaptation in Response to Light 277 12.3.4 Motility as a Unique Photo-Protection Mechanism 278 12.4 Frustule Photonics Related to Diatom Photobiology 279 12.4.1 An Extracellular Structure With Optical Properties 279 12.4.2 Intraspecific and Intra-Individual Variation of Frustule Periodicity 281 12.4.3 Photonic Crystal Properties 281 12.4.4 Light Confinement and Focusing 282 12.4.5 Scattering and Dispersion of Light 283 12.4.6 Attenuation of UV Light for Photo-Protection 283 12.5 Frustule Photonics in Light of Niche Differentiation 285 12.6 Conclusion 291 References 292 13 Steps of Silicic Acid Transformation to Siliceous Frustules: Main Hypotheses and Discoveries 301Vadim V. Annenkov, Elena N. Danilovtseva and Richard Gordon 13.1 Introduction 301 13.2 Penetration of the Boundary Layer: The Diatom as an Antenna for Silica 303 13.3 Getting Past the Cloud of Extracellular Material 304 13.4 Adsorption of Silica Onto the Outer Organic Coat of the Diatom 305 13.5 Getting Past the Silica Frustule or Through Its Pores 306 13.6 Getting Past the Inner Organic Coat, the Diatotepum 306 13.7 Transport of Silica Across the Cell Membrane 307 13.8 Cytoplasm Storage and Trafficking of Silica to the Places of Synthesis of the Frustule Parts 309 13.9 Transport and Patterning of Silica Across the Silicalemma 311 13.10 Precipitation and Morphogenesis of the Nascent Valve Within the Silicalemma 314 13.11 Thickening of the Valve Within the Silicalemma 319 13.12 Exteriorization of the Valve 321 13.13 Future Work Needed 321 13.14 Conclusion 323 References 326 14 The Effects of Cytoskeletal Inhibitors on Diatom Valve Morphogenesis 349Yekaterina D. Bedoshvili and Yelena V. Likhoshway 14.1 Introduction 349 14.2 Cytoskeleton and Its Role in Cell Morphogenesis 350 14.3 Abnormalities of Diatom Valve Morphogenesis Induced by Cytoskeleton Inhibitors 352 14.4 Conclusion 358 Acknowledgment 360 References 360 15 Modeling Silicon Pools in Diatoms Using the Chemistry Toolbox 365Argyro Spinthaki and Konstantinos D. Demadis 15.1 Diatoms 365 15.2 “Silicon Pools” Biology 366 15.3 Silica Particle Formation From Silicic Acid 366 15.4 Stabilization of “Soluble” Silica Species (Monosilicic and Disilicic Acids) 370 15.4.1 Cationic Polymers 370 15.4.2 Neutral (Uncharged) Polymers 372 15.4.3 Zwitterionic Polymers 373 15.4.4 Blends of Cationic/Anionic Polymers 375 15.5 Chemical Mechanisms 376 15.6 Conclusions/Perspectives 377 Acknowledgments 378 References 378 16 The Mesopores of Raphid Pennate Diatoms: Toward Natural Controllable Anisotropic Mesoporous Silica Microparticles 383Mohamed M. Ghobara, Richard Gordon and Louisa Reissig 16.1 Introduction 384 16.2 Morphology and Very Fine Ultrastructure of Diatom Frustules 386 16.3 Synthetic Mesoporous Silica 391 16.4 The Potential of Raphid Pennates’ Mesoporous Bio-Silica, Similarities, and Dissimilarities Compared With Synthetic MSM/Ns 393 16.4.1 The Current Potential of Diatom Porous Silica in Applications 393 16.4.2 Why Should We Be Interested in the Mesoporous Silica of Raphid Pennate Frustules if the Frustules of Other Species With Larger Pores Work? 393 16.4.3 Similarities and Dissimilarities Compared With Synthetic MSM/Ns 394 16.5 Our Ability to Control the Diatom Frustule’s Ultrastructure 396 16.5.1 Physicochemical Parameters Alteration Approach 397 16.5.2 Genetic Engineering Approach 398 16.6 Conclusion 399 Acknowledgment 399 References 399 Glossary 408 Index 411

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe most accessible and practical roadmap to visualizing engineering projects In the newly revised Third Edition of Engineering Design Graphics: Sketching, Modeling, and Visualization, renowned engineering graphics expert James Leake delivers an intuitive and accessible guide to bringing engineering concepts and projects to visual life. Including updated coverage of everything from freehand sketching to solid modeling in CAD, the author comprehensively discusses the tools and skills you'll need to sketch, draw, model, document, design, manufacture, or simulate a project.Table of Contents1 ENGINEERING DESIGN 1 INTRODUCTION 1 ASPECTS OF ENGINEERING DESIGN 1 ANALYSIS AND DESIGN 4 PRODUCT ANATOMY 5 DESIGN PHASES 5 DESIGN PROCESS OVERVIEW 6 NEEDS ASSESSMENT 7 PROBLEM DEFINITION 7 BACKGROUND RESEARCH 7 DESIGN CRITERIA 8 DESIGN CONSTRAINTS 8 ALTERNATIVE SOLUTIONS 9 ANALYSIS 12 EVALUATION AND SELECTION 12 SPECIFICATION 16 COMMUNICATION 20 Written Reports 20 Recommended report-writing steps 20 Oral Presentations 21 BEGINNING VERSUS INFORMED DESIGNER PATTERNS (SIDEBAR) 23 CONCURRENT ENGINEERING 23 Design for Manufacture and Assembly 25 TEAMWORK 26 QUESTIONS 27 2 HUMAN-CENTERED DESIGN AND DESIGN THINKING 29 INTRODUCTION 29 ENGINEERING DESIGN, ART, AND SCIENCE Introduction Design: a fundamental human activity Engineering Design from 1400 to 1900 Engineering Education after 1900 TWO DESIGN PARADIGMS Design as rational problem solving Design as a reflective practice WICKED PROBLEMS DIVERGENT AND CONVERGENT QUESTIONING DOUBLE DIAMOND DESIGN PROCESS HUMAN-CENTERED DESIGN DESIGN THINKING Introduction Three spaces of innovation Inspiration Observation Empathy Ideation Empathy Ideation Brainstorming Prototyping Implementation Test and iterate T-shaped individuals (sidebar) Radical collaboration QUESTIONS 3 PRODUCT DISSECTION INTRODUCTION PRODUCT SUITABILITY PRODUCT DISSECTION PROCEDURE PRE-DISSECTION ANALYSIS DISSECTION Craftsman locking pliers disassembly steps PRODUCT DOCUMENTATION PRODUCT ANALYSIS PRODUCT IMPROVEMENT REASSEMBLY COMMUNICATION QUESTIONS 4 FREEHAND SKETCHING INTRODUCTION SKETCHING TOOLS AND MATERIALS SKETCHING TECHNIQUES Line Techniques Sketching Straight Lines Sketching Circles Sketching Ellipses PROPORTIONING Estimating Dimensions of Actual Objects Partitioning Lines INSTRUMENT USAGE—TRIANGLES Parallel Lines Perpendicular Lines LINE STYLES QUESTIONS 5 PLANAR PROJECTIONS AND PICTORIAL VIEWS PLANAR PROJECTIONS Introduction Classification of Planar Projections: Projector Characteristics Preliminary Definitions Block coefficient Classification of Planar Projections: Orientation of Object with Respect to Projection Plane Further Distinctions Between Parallel and Perspective Projections Classes of Parallel Projections OBLIQUE PROJECTIONS Oblique Projection Geometry Oblique Projection Angle Classes of Oblique Projections Oblique projection angle in 2D Receding Axis Angle ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS Orthographic Projection Geometry Orthographic Projection Categories AXONOMETRIC PROJECTIONS ISOMETRIC PROJECTIONS Isometric Drawings Multiview Projections INTRODUCTION TO PICTORIAL SKETCHING OBLIQUE SKETCHES Introduction Axis Orientation Receding Axis Scale Object Orientation Guidelines Sketching procedure for a simple extruded shape (see Figure 5-37) Step-by-step cabinet oblique sketch example for a cut block (see Figure 5-38) Step-by-step cavalier oblique sketch example for an object with circular features (see Figure 5-39) ISOMETRIC SKETCHES Introduction Axis Orientation Isometric Scaling Isometric Grid Paper Object Orientation Guidelines Step-by-step isometric sketch example for a cut block (see Figure 5-46) Circular Features in an Isometric View Step-by-step isometric sketch example for a cylinder (see Figure 5-47) Step-by-step isometric sketch example for a box with holes on three faces (see Figure 5-48) Step-by-step sketch example for an object with circular features (see Figure 5-49) Chapter review: pictorial sketching scalability QUESTIONS 6 PERSPECTIVE PROJECTIONS AND PERSPECTIVE SKETCHES PERSPECTIVE PROJECTION Historical Development Perspective Projection Characteristics Classes of Perspective Projection Vanishing Points One-Point Perspective Projection Two-Point Perspective Projection Three-Point Perspective Projection Perspective Projection Variables Perspective projection using a 3D CAD system Projection plane location Lateral movement of CP Vertical movement of CP Varying distance from CP PERSPECTIVE SKETCHES Introduction Terminology One-Point Perspective Sketches Two-Point Perspective Sketches Proportioning Techniques Step-by-step one-point perspective sketch example (see Figure 6-26) Step-by-step two-point perspective sketch example (see Figure 6-27) Summary: orientation of pictorial sketching axes (see Figure 6-28) QUESTIONS 7 MULTIVIEWS MULTIVIEW SKETCHING Introduction—Justification and Some Characteristics Glass Box Theory Alignment of Views Transfer of Depth View Selection Third-Angle and First-Angle Projection Line Conventions Multiview drawing of a cylinder (see Figure 7-21) Line Precedence Generic three multiview sketch procedure (see Figure 7-24) Step-by-step multiview sketch example (see Figure 7-25) Intersections and Tangency 92 Fillets and Rounds Machined Holes Conventional Representations: Rotated Features Step-by-step multiview sketch example: object with complex features (see Figure 7-33) VISUALIZATION TECHNIQUES FOR MULTIVIEW DRAWINGS Introduction and Motivation Treatment of Common Surfaces Normal surfaces Inclined surfaces Oblique surfaces Projection Studies Adjacent Areas Surface Labeling Similar Shapes Vertex Labeling Analysis by Feature Missing-Line and Missing-View Problems QUESTIONS 8 SECTION AND AUXILIARY VIEWS SECTION VIEWS Introduction Section View Process Section Lining (Hatch Patterns) Full Sections Half Sections Offset Sections Broken-Out Sections Revolved Sections Removed Sections Conventional Representations: Section Views Conventional Representations: Thin Features Section View Construction Process—Example 1 Section View Construction Process—Example 2 Conventional Representations: Aligned Sections Assembly Section Views AUXILIARY VIEWS Introduction Definitions Auxiliary View Projection Theory Auxiliary Views: Three Cases General Sketching Procedure for Finding a Primary Auxiliary View Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 (optional) Step 5 Step 6 Finding a Primary Auxiliary View of a Contoured Surface Finding a Partial Auxiliary View, an Isometric Pictorial, and a Missing View, Given Two Views QUESTIONS 9 DIMENSIONING AND TOLERANCING DIMENSIONING Introduction Units of Measurement Application of Dimensions Terminology Reading direction for dimensional values Arrangement, placement, and spacing of dimensions Using Dimensions to Specify Size and Locate Features Symbols, Abbreviations, and General Notes Dimensioning Rules and Guidelines Prisms Cylinders and arcs Finish Marks TOLERANCING Introduction Definitions Tolerance Declaration Tolerance Accumulation Mated Parts Basic Hole System: English Units Basic Shaft System: English Units Step-by-step tolerance calculation of a clearance fit using the basic hole system (see Figure 9-27) Step-by-step tolerance calculation of an interference fit using the basic hole system (see Figure 9-28) Preferred English Limits and Fits Running or sliding clearance fit (RC) Locational clearance fit (LC) Transition clearance or interference fit (LT) Step-by-step tolerance calculation of a clearance fit using the basic shaft system (see Figure 9-30) Locational interference fit (LN) Force or shrink fit (FN) Step-by-step tolerance calculation using English-unit fit tables, basic hole system (see Figure 9-31) Step-by-step tolerance calculation using English-unit fit tables, basic shaft (see Figure 9-32) Preferred Metric Limits and Fits Step-by-step tolerance calculation using metric-unit fit tables, hole basis (see Figure 9-39) Step-by-step tolerance calculation using metric-unit fit tables, shaft basis (see Figure 9-40) Tolerancing in CAD QUESTIONS 10 CAD: SOLID MODELING INTRODUCTION Computer-Aided Design Categories of CAD Systems Computer-aided drawing Solid modeling Topology (Sidebar) Parametric modeling Direct modeling Surface Modeling – NURBS and Freeform Building Information Modeling (BIM) (Sidebar) CAD Viewing and Display PARAMETRIC MODELING Introduction Terminology Part Modeling Introduction Sketch mode Feature creation Part editing Part creation process (see Figure 10-32) Assembly Modeling Introduction Joints CAD libraries Advanced Modeling Strategies Cloud-Based CAD QUESTIONS 241 11 CAD: NURBS AND FREEFORM SURFACE MODELING NURBS SURFACE MODELING Introduction Parametric Curves and Cubic Splines Parametric representation of a curve (sidebar) Bézier Curves B-Splines NURBS Surfaces Curvature Continuity Class A Surfaces FREEFORM SURFACE MODELING Introduction Polygon meshes and polygonal modeling Subdivision surfaces NURBS Limitations T-Splines The Bézier Award (Sidebar) QUESTIONS 12 PRODUCT DOCUMENTATION WORKING DRAWINGS Model-based definition DETAIL DRAWINGS ASSEMBLY DRAWING VIEWS BILL OF MATERIALS AND BALLOONS SHEET SIZES TITLE BLOCKS BORDERS AND ZONES REVISION BLOCKS DRAWING SCALE TOLERANCE NOTES STANDARD PARTS WORKING DRAWING CREATION USING PARAMETRIC MODELING SOFTWARE Extracting a detail drawing from a parametric part model (see Figure 12-16) Using existing part models to create an assembly model (see Figure 12-17) Extracting a sectioned assembly drawing (see Figure 12-18) Creating an exploded view (see Figure 12-19) Creating an exploded view drawing with parts list and balloons (see Figure 12-20) INDUSTRY SPOTLIGHT: FISKARS GROUP QUESTIONS 13 ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING INTRODUCTION AM TECHNOLOGIES Vat photopolymerization Material extrusion Powder bed fusion Material jetting CLASSIFICATION OF AM TECHNOLOGIES 3D PRINTER FILE FORMATS STL REPAIR TOOLS CHARACTERISTICS OF AM SYSTEMS Part orientation Support structure Hatch style LOW-COST AM Industrial category AM Professional category 3D printers Consumer (home and hobby, desktop) category 3D printers DESIGN FOR ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING Design for conventional manufacturing processes Design for AM QUESTIONS 9 3D SCANNING REVERSE ENGINEERING 3D SCANNING Introduction 3D Scanner Pipeline Mesh terminology 3D Scanning Technologies Contact-based scanners Noncontact scanners Laser triangulation Structured Light Reality Capture Photogrammetry Time of Flight Reverse Engineering Software Mesh reconstruction (or point processing) NURBS surface modeling from scan data Parametric CAD model from scan data QUESTIONS 15 SIMULATION UPFRONT ANALYSIS FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS Modeling and Meshing Boundary Conditions Contour plot Results FEA workflow GENERATIVE DESIGN Generative design workflow DYNAMICS SIMULATION SOFTWARE Dynamics Simulation Software Demonstration QUESTIONS A ANSI PREFERRED ENGLISH LIMITS AND FITS B ANSI PREFERRED METRIC LIMITS AND FITS INDEX 3 DRAWING SHEETS

Read more less

Book SynopsisFLEXIBLE SUPERCAPACITORS Comprehensive coverage of the latest advancements in flexible supercapacitors In Flexible Supercapacitors: Materials and Applications, a team of distinguished researchers deliver a comprehensive and insightful exploration of the foundational principles and real-world applications of flexible supercapacitors. This edited volume includes contributions from leading scientists working in the field of flexible supercapacitors. The book systematically summarizes the most recent research in the area, and covers fundamental concepts of electrode materials and devices, including on-chip microsupercapacitors and fiber supercapacitors. The latest progress and advancements in stretchable supercapacitors and healable supercapacitors are also discussed, as are problems and challenges commonly encountered in the development of flexible supercapacitors. The book concludes with suggestions and fresh perspectives on future research in this rapidly dTable of ContentsPreface 1 Flexible Asymmetric Supercapacitors: Design, Progress and ChallengesDun Lin, Xiyue Zhang, and Xihong Lu 1.1 Introduction 1.2 Configurations of AFSCs Device 1.3 Progress of Flexible AFSCs 1.3.1 Sandwich-type AFSCs 1.3.2 Fiber-type ASCs 1.4 Summary 2 Stretchable SupercapacitorsLa Li and Guozhen Shen 2.1 Overview of Stretchable Supercapacitors 2.2 Fabrication of Stretchable Supercapacitors 2.2.1 Structures of Stretchable Fiber-shaped SCs 2.2.2 Planar Stretchable SCs 2.2.3 3D Stretchable SCs 2.3 Multifunctional Supercapacitor 2.3.1 Compressible SCs 2.3.2 Self-healable SCs 2.3.3 Stretchable Integrated System 2.3.4 Perspective 3 Fiber-shaped SupercapacitorsMengmeng Hu, Qingjiang Liu, Yao Liu, Jiaqi Wang, Jie Liu, Panpan Wang, Hua Wang, and Yan Huang Introduction 3.1 Structure of FSSCs 3.2 Electrolyte 3.3 Electrode 3.3.1 Carbon-based Materials 3.3.2 Conducting Polymers 3.3.3 Metal-based Materials 3.3.4 Mxenes 3.3.5 Metal Organic Frameworks (MOFs) 3.3.6 Polyoxometalates (POMs) 3.3.7. Black Phosphorus (BP) 3.4 Electrode Design of FSSCs 3.4.1 Metal-fiber Supported Electrode 3.4.2 Carbon Materials Based Fiber Supported Electrode 3.5 Functionalized FSSCs 3.5.1 Self-healable FSSCs 3.5.2 Stretchable FSSCs 3.5.3 Electrochromic FSSCs 3.5.4 Shape-memory FSSCs 3.5.5 Photodetectable FSSCs 3.6 Conclusion 4 Flexible Fiber-shaped Supercapacitors: Fabrication, Design, and ApplicationsMuhammad S. Javed, Peng Sun, Muhammad Imran, and Wenjie Mai 4.1 Introduction to Fiber-shaped Supercapacitors 4.2 Emerging Techniques for the Fabrication of Fiber-shaped Electrodes 4.2.1 Wet spinning Method 4.2.2 Spray/Cast-coating Method 4.2.3 Hydrothermal Method 4.3 Structures and Design/Configuration of Fiver-shaped Electrodes 4.3.1 Parallel-fiber Electrodes 4.3.2 Twisted-fiber Electrodes 4.3.3 Coaxial-fiber Electrodes 4.3.4 Rolled-fiber Electrodes 4.4 Materials for Fiber-shaped Supercapacitors 4.4.1 Carbon-based Materials for FFSC 4.4.2 Metal Oxides and their Composite-based Materials for FFSC 4.5 Electrolytes for Fiber-shaped Supercapacitors 4.6 Performance evaluation Metrics for Fiber-shaped Supercapacitors 4.7 Applications 4.8 Conclusion and Future Prospectus 5 Flexible Supercapacitors Based on Ternary Metal Oxide (Sulfide, Selenide) NanostructuresQiufan Wang, Daohong Zhang, and Guozhen Shen 5.1 Introduction 5.1.1 Background of Electrochemical Capacitors 5.1.2 Performance Evaluation of SCs 5.2 Ternary Metal Oxide 5.2.1 1D Ternary Metal Oxide Nanostructural Electrodes 5.2.2 2D Ternary Metal Oxide Nanostructural Electrodes 5.2.3 3D Ternary Oxide Electrodes 5.2.4 Cire-shell Ternary Metal Oxide Composite Electrodes 5.3 Metal Sulfide Electrodes 5.3.1 1D Metal Sulfide Electrodes 5.3.2 2D Metal Sulfide Electrodes 5.3.3 3D Metal Sulfide Electrodes 5.3.4 Metal Sulfide Composite Electrodes 5.4 Metal Selenide Electrodes 5.4.1 1D Metal Selenide Electrodes 5.4.2 2D Metal Selenide Electrodes 5.4.3 3D Metal Selenide Electrodes 5.5 Fiber-shaped SCs 5.6 Summary and Perspectives 6 Transition Metal oxide-based Electrode Materials for SupercapacitorsXiang Wu 6.1 Introduction 6.2 Co3O4 Electrode Materials 6.3 NiO Electrode Materials 6.4 Fe2O3 Electrode Materials 6.5 MnO2 Electrode Materials 6.6 V2O5 Electrode Materials 7 Three-Dimensional Nanoarrays for Flexible SupercapacitorsJing Xu 7.1 Introduction 7.2 Fabrication of 3D Nanoarrays 7.2.1 Selection of substrates 7.2.2 Synthesis Methods of Flexible 3D Nanoarrays 7.3 Typical Structural Engineering of 3D Nanoarrays 7.3.1 Basic 3D Nanoarrays for Flexible Supercapacitors 7.3.2 Hybrid 3D Nanoarrays for Flexible Supercapacitors 7.4 Evaluation of Flexible Supercapacitors 7.4.1 Bending Deformation 7.4.2 Stretching Deformation 7.4.3 Twisting Deformation 7.5 Conclusion 8 Metal Oxides Nanoarray Electrodes for Flexible SupercapacitorsTing Meng and Cao Guan 8.1 Introduction 8.2 Synthesis Techniques of Metal Oxide Nanoarrays 8.2.1 Solution-based Route 8.2.2 Electrodeposition Growth 8.2.3 Chemical Vapor Deposition 8.3 The Flexible Support Substrate for Loading Nanoarrays 8.3.1 3D Porous Graphene Foam 8.3.2 Carbon Cloth Current Collectors 8.3.3 Metal Conductive Substrates 8.4 The Geometry of Nanostructured Arrays 8.4.1 The 1D Nanostructured Arrays 8.4.2 The 2D Nanostructured Arrays 8.4.3 The Integration of 1D@2D Nanoarrays 8.5 Conclusions and Prospects 9 Printed Flexible SupercapacitorsYizhou Zhang and Wen-Yong Lai 9.1 Overview of Printed Flexible Supercapacitor 9.2 Devices Structure of Printed SCs 9.3 Printable Materials for SCs 9.3.1 Carbon-based Materials 9.3.2 Electrolytes 9.3.3 Flexible substrates 9.4 Fabrication of Flexible SCs Using Various Printing Methods 9.4.1 Inkjet Printing 9.4.2 Screen Printing 9.4.3 Transfer Printing 9.4.4 3D Printing 9.5 Printed Integrated System 9.6 Perspective 10 Printing Flexible On-chip Micro-SupercapacitorsGuozhen Shen 10.1 Introduction 10.2 Printable Materials for On-chip MSCs 10.2.1 Printable Electrode Materials 10.2.2 Printable Current Collector 10.2.3 Printable Electrolyte 10.3 Printing Techniques 10.3.1 Inkjet Printing 10.3.2 Spray Printing 10.3.3 Screen Printing 10.4 Summary 11 Recent advances of flexible micro-supercapacitorsZhiqiang Niu 11.1 Introduction 11.2 General Features of Flexible MSCs 11.3 Active Materials of Flexible MSCs 11.3.1 Graphene-based Materials 11.3.2 CNT-based Materials 11.3.3 Other Carbon-based Materials 11.3.4 Transition Metal Oxides and Hydroxides 11.3.5 MXenes 11.3.6 Conductive Polymer 11.4 Integration of Flexible MSCs 11.4.1 Flexible Self-charging MSCs 11.4.2 Flexible Self-powering MSCs 11.5 Flexible Smart MSCs 11.5.1 Flexible Self-healing MSCs 11.5.2 Flexible Electrochromic MSCs 11.5.3 Flexible Photodetectable MSCs 11.5.4 Flexible Thermoreversible Self-protecting MSCs 11.6 Summary and Prospects

Read more less

Book SynopsisSolitons in Optical Fiber Systems Discover a robust exploration of the main properties and behaviors of solitons in fiber systems In Solitons in Optical Fiber Systems, distinguished researcher Dr. Mário F. S. Ferreira delivers a thorough treatment of the main characteristics of solitons in optical fiber communication systems and fiber devices, paying special attention to stationary and pulsating dissipative soliton pulses. The book discusses the technical aspects associated with the physical background and the theoretical description of soliton characteristics under different conditions. The author employs numerical analyses and variational approaches to describe soliton evolution and describes the phenomenon of supercontinuum generation and various solitonic effects observed in highly nonlinear fibers, like photonic crystal fibers. Readers will learn about different applications of fiber solitons in transmission systems, fiber lasers, couplers, and pulse compression schemes, as well Table of ContentsPreface xiii List of Abbreviations xv 1 Introduction 1 References 5 2 Waves Called Solitons 9 2.1 Linear and Nonlinear Effects of a Wave 9 2.2 Solitary Waves and Solitons 11 2.3 Solitons in Optical Fibers 13 2.4 Dissipative Optical Solitons 15 References 16 3 Fiber Dispersion and Nonlinearity 19 3.1 Fiber Chromatic Dispersion 19 3.1.1 Gaussian Input Pulses 21 3.2 Fiber Nonlinearity 25 3.2.1 The Nonlinear Refractive Index 25 3.2.2 Relevance of Nonlinear Effects in Fibers 26 3.3 The Pulse Propagation Equation 28 3.3.1 The Normalized NLSE 29 3.3.2 Propagation in the Absence of Dispersion and Nonlinearity 30 3.3.3 Effect of Dispersion Only 30 3.3.4 Effect of Nonlinearity Only 32 References 33 4 Nonlinear Effects in Optical Fibers 35 4.1 Self-Phase Modulation 35 4.1.1 Modulation Instability 39 4.2 Cross-Phase Modulation 40 4.3 Four-Wave Mixing 42 4.4 Stimulated Raman Scattering 45 4.5 Stimulated Brillouin Scattering 49 References 52 5 Optical Amplification 57 5.1 General Concepts on Optical Amplifiers 57 5.2 Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifiers 59 5.2.1 Two-Level Model 60 5.3 Fiber Raman Amplifiers 63 5.4 Fiber Parametric Amplifiers 68 5.5 Lumped versus Distributed Amplification 72 5.6 Parabolic Pulses 74 References 76 6 Solitons in Optical Fibers 81 6.1 The Fundamental Soliton Solution 81 6.2 Higher-Order Solitons 83 6.3 Soliton Units 86 6.4 Dark Solitons 87 6.5 Bistable Solitons 88 6.6 XPM-Paired Solitons 89 6.7 Optical Similaritons 90 6.8 Numerical Solution of the NLSE 92 6.9 The Variational Approach 94 6.10 The Method of Moments 97 References 98 7 Soliton Transmission Systems 101 7.1 Soliton Perturbation Theory 101 7.2 Effect of Fiber Losses 102 7.3 Soliton Amplification 103 7.3.1 Lumped Amplification 104 7.3.2 Distributed Amplification 105 7.4 Soliton Interaction 107 7.5 Timing Jitter 110 7.5.1 Gordon-Haus Jitter 110 7.5.2 Polarization-Mode Dispersion Jitter 113 7.5.3 Acoustic Jitter 113 7.5.4 Soliton Interaction Jitter 114 7.6 WDM Soliton Systems 114 7.6.1 Lossless Soliton Collisions 114 7.6.2 Soliton Collisions in Perturbed Fiber Spans 116 7.6.3 Timing Jitter 117 References 117 8 Soliton Transmission Control 121 8.1 Fixed-Frequency Filters 121 8.1.1 Control of Timing Jitter 122 8.1.2 Control of Soliton Interaction 123 8.1.3 Background Instability 125 8.2 Sliding-Frequency Filters 125 8.2.1 Evolution of Soliton Parameters 126 8.2.2 Control of Timing Jitter 129 8.2.3 Control of Soliton Interaction 131 8.3 Synchronous Modulators 132 8.4 Amplifiers with Nonlinear Gain 133 8.4.1 Stationary Solutions 134 8.4.2 Control of Soliton Interaction 137 References 139 9 Propagation of Ultrashort Solitons 141 9.1 Generalized NLSE 141 9.1.1 Third-Order Dispersion 142 9.1.2 Self-Steepening 143 9.1.3 Intrapulse Raman Scattering 144 9.2 Timing Jitter of Ultrashort Solitons 145 9.3 Bandwidth-Limited Amplification of Ultrashort Solitons 147 9.4 Transmission Control Using Nonlinear Gain 151 9.4.1 Stationary Solutions 151 9.4.2 Linear Stability Analysis 153 References 157 10 Dispersion-Managed Solitons 161 10.1 Dispersion Management 161 10.2 Characteristics of the Dispersion-Managed Soliton 163 10.3 The Variational Approach to DM Solitons 167 10.3.1 Generic Ansatz 167 10.3.2 Gaussian Pulses 168 10.3.3 Stationary Solutions 169 10.4 Interaction Between DM Solitons 170 10.5 The Gordon–Haus Effect for DM Solitons 172 10.6 Effects of a Spectral Filter 173 10.6.1 Timing Jitter Control 174 10.7 Effects of an Amplitude Modulator 175 10.8 WDM with DM Solitons 177 References 179 11 Polarization Effects 183 11.1 Fiber Birefringence and Polarization Mode Dispersion 183 11.1.1 PMD in Long Fiber Spans 185 11.1.2 PMD-Induced Pulse Broadening in Linear Systems 187 11.1.3 PMD Compensation 188 11.2 Coupled Nonlinear Schrödinger Equations 190 11.3 Solitons in Fibers with Constant Birefringence 191 11.4 Vector Solitons 195 11.5 Solitons in Fibers with Randomly Varying Birefringence 196 11.6 PMD-Induced Soliton Pulse Broadening 197 11.7 Dispersion-Managed Solitons and PMD 200 References 202 12 Stationary Dissipative Solitons 207 12.1 Balance Equations for the CGL Equation 207 12.2 Exact Analytical Solutions 210 12.2.1 Solutions of the Cubic CGLE 210 12.2.2 Solutions of the Quintic CGLE 212 12.3 Numerical Stationary Soliton Solutions 213 12.4 High-Energy Dissipative Solitons 216 12.5 Soliton Bound States 221 12.6 Impact of Higher-Order Effects 225 References 229 13 Pulsating Dissipative Solitons 233 13.1 Dynamic Models for CGLE Solitons 233 13.1.1 The Variational Approach 234 13.1.1.1 Sech Ansatz 235 13.1.1.2 Gaussian Ansatz 235 13.1.2 The Method of Moments 236 13.2 Plain Pulsating Solitons 238 13.2.1 Impact of Higher-Order Effects 239 13.3 Creeping Solitons 241 13.3.1 Impact of Higher-Order Effects 242 13.4 Chaotic Solitons 244 13.5 Erupting Solitons 247 13.5.1 Impact of Higher-Order Effects 251 13.5.2 Experimental Observation of Soliton Explosions 253 References 256 14 Soliton Fiber Lasers 259 14.1 The First Soliton Laser 259 14.2 Fundamentals of Fiber Soliton Lasers 260 14.3 Mode-Locking Techniques 262 14.3.1 Active Mode-Locking 262 14.3.2 Passive Mode-Locking 262 14.3.3 Nonlinear Optical Loop Mirrors 263 14.3.4 Figure-Eight Laser 264 14.3.5 Nonlinear Polarization Rotation 265 14.3.6 Hybrid Mode-Locking 265 14.4 High-Energy Soliton Fiber Lasers 266 14.5 Modeling of Soliton Fiber Lasers 268 14.6 Polarization Effects 272 14.7 Dissipative Soliton Molecules 273 14.8 Experimental Observation of Pulsating Solitons 274 References 279 15 Other Applications of Optical Solitons 285 15.1 All-Optical Switching 285 15.1.1 The Fiber Coupler 285 15.1.2 The Sagnac Interferometer 286 15.2 2R Optical Regeneration 288 15.3 Pulse Compression 290 15.3.1 Grating-Fiber Compression 290 15.3.2 Higher-Order Soliton-Effect Compression 291 15.3.3 Compression of Fundamental Solitons 293 15.3.4 Dissipative Soliton Compression 295 15.4 Solitons in Fiber Gratings 298 15.4.1 Pulse Compression Using Fiber Gratings 300 15.4.2 Fiber Bragg Solitons 302 References 305 16 Highly Nonlinear Optical Fibers 309 16.1 Highly Nonlinear Silica Fibers 309 16.1.1 Tapered Fibers 310 16.2 Microstructured Optical Fibers 311 16.3 Non-Silica Fibers 318 16.4 Soliton Fission and Dispersive Waves 320 16.5 Four-Wave Mixing 324 16.6 Hollow-Core Microstructured Fibers 325 References 332 17 Supercontinuum Generation 337 17.1 Pumping with Femtosecond Pulses 337 17.2 Modeling the Supercontinuum 341 17.3 Pumping with Picosecond Pulses 344 17.4 Continuous Wave Supercontinuum Generation 347 17.5 Mid-IR Supercontinuum Generation 350 17.6 Supercontinuum Coherence 352 17.6.1 Spectral Incoherent Solitons 354 17.7 Supercontinuum Generation in Hollow-Core Kagomé Fibers 356 References 365 Index 369

Read more less

Book SynopsisSUSTAINABLE FISHERY SYSTEMS An up-to-date and interdisciplinary guide to sustainable fisheries Fisheries, whether small-scale or large-scale, are filled with complexity and uncertainty. Making the right decisions to successfully manage fisheries for sustainability and resilience requires a systems approach including both natural and human elements, and their many interactions. To understand fisheries, and how they change over time, a diverse range of fishery knowledge must be brought together. Sustainable Fishery Systems, 2nd edition meets these needs. The new edition provides essential information that can be readily applied within government, community, industrial, academic and research settings. Sustainable Fishery Systems, 2nd edition retains the first edition's emphasis on themes such as sustainability, resilience, uncertainty, complexity, and conflict, and expands its treatment of topics that have, since the first edition's publication, become crucial to consider in the field Table of ContentsPreface and Guide to the Book xv Acknowledgements xviii Part I Fishery Systems 1 1 Introducing Fishery Systems 3 1.1 Sustainability and Resilience 3 1.2 Rationale for a Systems Approach 6 1.3 Fishery Systems as Social-Ecological Systems 7 1.4 Depicting Fishery Systems 10 1.4.1 Fishing Effort 10 1.4.2 Adding Dynamics 11 1.4.3 Adding Complexity 12 1.4.4 The Fishery System 13 1.4.5 Alternatives 14 1.5 Characterising Fishery Systems 18 1.5.1 Small-Scale Versus Large-Scale Fishery Systems 18 1.5.2 Spatial Scale and Time Scale 21 1.5.2.1 Spatial Scales 21 1.5.2.2 Time Scales 22 1.5.3 Other Approaches to Characterising Fishery Systems 23 1.6 Complexity 24 1.7 Next Steps 25 2 The Natural System: The Fish 27 2.1 What Is Caught in Fishery Systems? 28 2.1.1 Fishes 30 2.1.1.1 Inland (Freshwater) Fish 31 2.1.1.2 Pelagic Marine Fish 31 2.1.1.3 Demersal Marine Fish 32 2.1.2 Shellfish 33 2.1.3 Characteristics 37 2.2 Spatial Distribution of Fished Resources 38 2.3 Fish Dynamics 41 2.3.1 Single-Species Dynamics 41 2.3.2 Multi-Species Dynamics 45 3 The Natural System: Fishery Ecosystems 48 3.1 Ecosystems 48 3.1.1 Aquatic/Fishery Ecosystems 50 3.1.2 A Typology of Fishery Ecosystems 52 3.2 Biodiversity 55 3.3 The Physical–Chemical Environment 58 3.3.1 The Winds 58 3.3.2 Ocean Currents 59 3.3.3 Upwellings 61 3.3.4 Other Relatively Localised Phenomena 61 3.3.5 Physical Features 62 3.4 Dynamics of Fishery Ecosystems and the Biophysical Environment 62 4 The Human System: Fishers and Fishworkers 65 4.1 Fishers and Fishworkers 65 4.1.1 A Typology of Fishers 66 4.1.2 Women in Fishing 70 4.1.3 Fishworkers in the Post-Harvest Sector 73 4.1.4 Fisher Organisations 73 4.2 Fishing Methods 75 4.2.1 A Typology of Fishing Methods 75 4.2.1.1 Seines/Encircling Gear 77 4.2.1.2 Trawls and Other Towed/Dragged Gear 77 4.2.1.3 Gill Nets and Entangling Nets: Drift and Static Gear 77 4.2.1.4 Traps and Pots 78 4.2.1.5 Lines 78 4.2.1.6 Other Methods 78 4.2.2 The Choice of Fishing Method 79 4.2.2.1 Biological 80 4.2.2.2 Economic 80 4.2.2.3 Social and Governance 80 4.3 Fisher and Fleet Dynamics 80 4.3.1 Dynamics of Fishing Effort 81 4.3.2 Capital Dynamics and Fishing Capacity 83 4.3.3 Technological Dynamics 85 4.3.4 Fleet Dynamics 86 5 The Human System: Post-Harvest Aspects and Fishing Communities 89 5.1 The Post-Harvest Sector of the Fishery 89 5.1.1 Processing 92 5.1.2 Marketing and Markets 95 5.1.2.1 Marketing 95 5.1.2.2 Markets 96 5.1.3 Distribution and Trade 98 5.1.3.1 Distribution 98 5.1.3.2 Trade 98 5.1.4 Consumers 99 5.1.4.1 Consumer Preferences 99 5.1.4.2 Consumer Demand 100 5.1.5 Food Security 101 5.2 Fishing Households and Communities 102 5.2.1 Households 102 5.2.2 Communities 105 5.3 The Socioeconomic Environment 108 5.3.1 Links of Fishery Systems and Their Socioeconomic Environment 108 5.3.2 Labour 108 5.3.2.1 Labour Mobility 109 5.3.2.2 Effects on the Fishery 110 5.4 Post-Harvest and Fishing Community Dynamics 111 5.4.1 Dynamics of Markets and Consumer Demand 111 5.4.2 Dynamics of Communities and the Socioeconomic Environment 112 Part II The Fishery Governance and Management System 115 6 Fishery Governance 117 6.1 Rationale for Governance and Management 117 6.1.1 Open Access 118 6.1.2 The Need for Management 118 6.1.3 The Need for Participatory Management 119 6.2 Governance and Management 123 6.3 Fishery Values and Objectives 125 6.3.1 A Portfolio of Fishery Objectives 127 6.3.2 Objectives, Priorities, and Conflict 129 6.4 Fishery Management Institutions 131 6.4.1 Types and Roles of Institutions 131 6.4.2 The Choice of Institutions 132 6.4.3 Examples of Institutions 132 6.5 Governance of International Fisheries 137 6.6 Legal Framework 138 6.6.1 Legal Pluralism 139 6.7 Dynamics of Fishery Governance 140 7 Fishery Management 142 7.1 Time Scales of Management 143 7.2 Spatial Scales of Management 143 7.2.1 International Coordination 145 7.2.2 Decentralisation/Devolution 145 7.3 Appropriate Fishing Effort and Catch Levels 147 7.3.1 The Yield-Effort Curve 147 7.3.2 The Gordon–Schaefer Graph 149 7.3.3 Fishery Objectives Influence the Choice of Effort Levels 150 7.4 Developing a Portfolio of Fishery Management Measures 153 7.5 Implementation at the Operational Level 154 7.6 Fishery Enforcement 156 7.7 A Survey of Fishery Management Measures 157 7.7.1 Input (Effort) Controls 158 7.7.1.1 Limited Entry 158 7.7.1.2 Limiting the Capacity per Fisher or per Vessel 158 7.7.1.3 Limiting the Intensity of Operation 158 7.7.1.4 Limiting Time Fishing 158 7.7.1.5 Limiting the Location of Fishing 159 7.7.1.6 Challenges with Input Controls 160 7.7.2 Output (Catch) Controls 160 7.7.2.1 Total Allowable Catch 161 7.7.2.2 Individual Quotas 162 7.7.2.3 Community Quotas 162 7.7.2.4 Escapement Controls 163 7.7.2.5 Challenges with Output Controls 163 7.7.3 Technical Measures 164 7.7.3.1 Gear Restrictions 165 7.7.3.2 Size Limits 166 7.7.3.3 Closed Areas 166 7.7.3.4 Closed Seasons 167 7.7.4 Ecologically Based Management 168 7.7.4.1 Taxes and Royalties 169 7.7.5 Subsidies 170 7.8 Dynamics of Fishery Management 172 8 Fishery Development 174 8.1 Rationale for Fishery Development 174 8.2 Objectives of Fishery Development 175 8.3 Strategic Choices in Fishery Development 178 8.3.1 New Fisheries 178 8.3.2 Existing Fisheries 179 8.3.3 Integrated Development 180 8.4 Targeting Fishery Development 181 8.4.1 Needs Assessment 181 8.4.2 Positive Signs 181 8.4.3 Other Considerations 182 8.5 Options for Fishery Development 183 8.5.1 Direct Support to Fishing Activities 183 8.5.2 Institutional Enhancement 183 8.5.3 Training and Human Resource Development 183 8.5.4 Economics and Planning 184 8.5.5 Scientific, Assessment, Statistical, and Information Support 184 8.5.6 Fisheries Management and Monitoring/Control/Surveillance 184 8.5.7 Post-Harvest Support 185 8.6 Participatory Fishery Development 185 9 Fishery Knowledge 187 9.1 The Nature of Fishery Knowledge 188 9.2 The Knowledge of Indigenous Peoples, Fishers, and Communities 189 9.2.1 Traditional Ecological Knowledge (TEK) 190 9.2.2 Indigenous Knowledge 190 9.2.3 Fisher Knowledge and Local Knowledge 192 9.3 Connecting Fisher/Local/Indigenous Knowledge with Fishery Science/ Research 195 9.4 Knowledge Within Institutions 198 9.4.1 Governments 198 9.4.2 International Agencies 199 9.4.3 Universities 199 9.4.4 Private Sector and Nongovernmental Organisations (NGOs) 200 9.5 Fishery Knowledge: The Natural System 200 9.5.1 Stock Assessment 201 9.5.1.1 Stock Assessment Process 201 9.5.1.2 Evolution of Stock Assessment: Single Species and Multi-Species 202 9.6 Fishery Knowledge: The Human System 205 9.7 The Nature of Knowledge Production 208 9.7.1 Disciplinary Knowledge 208 9.7.2 Multidisciplinary, Interdisciplinary, Transdisciplinary Approaches 209 9.7.2.1 Multidisciplinary 209 9.7.2.2 Interdisciplinary 209 9.7.2.3 Transdisciplinary 209 9.7.3 Pure (Basic) and Applied (Targeted) Knowledge 211 9.8 The Structure of Knowledge Production 211 9.8.1 Organized by Species 211 9.8.2 Organized by Function 212 9.8.3 Organized on a Geographical/Ecosystem Basis 213 9.9 Dynamics of Fishery Knowledge 213 Part III Three Major Challenges in Fishery Systems 215 10 Uncertainty in Fishery Systems 217 10.1 Sources of Uncertainty in Fishery Systems 218 10.1.1 Sources in the Natural System 218 10.1.2 Sources in the Human System 218 10.2 A Typology of Uncertainty 219 10.2.1 Introduction: The Stock–Recruitment Relationship 219 10.2.2 Randomness 220 10.2.3 Uncertainties in Data and Parameters 221 10.2.4 Structural Uncertainty 222 10.3 Linking Uncertainty and Dynamics 224 11 Conflict in Fishery Systems 227 11.1 Conflict over Priorities: Fishery Paradigms 229 11.1.1 The Conservation Paradigm 230 11.1.2 The Rationalisation Paradigm 230 11.1.3 The Social/Community Paradigm 231 11.1.4 Fishery Paradigms in Practice: Efficiency and Allocation 232 11.2 A Typology of Fishery Conflicts 234 11.2.1 Fishery Jurisdiction 235 11.2.2 Management Mechanisms 236 11.2.3 Internal Allocation 236 11.2.4 External Allocation Conflicts 237 11.2.4.1 Domestic Versus Foreign Fisheries 237 11.2.4.2 Fishers Versus Fish Farming (Aquaculture) 238 11.2.4.3 The Fishery Versus Competing Industries 239 12 Attitudes (The Story of a Fishery Collapse) 242 12.1 The Cod Collapse Experience 242 12.1.1 The Collapse 242 12.1.2 The Aftermath 243 12.1.3 Understanding the Collapse 244 12.1.4 Recovery? 245 12.1.5 The Future 246 12.2 Attitudes Underlying the Cod Collapse 246 12.2.1 The Role of the Regulator 247 12.2.2 Blame for the Collapse 248 12.2.3 The Burden of Proof 250 12.2.3.1 Stock Assessment 250 12.2.3.2 Fishing Gear 251 12.2.4 Conservation Can Wait 252 12.2.5 The Illusion of Certainty and the Fallacy of Controllability 254 12.2.6 Synthesis on Fishery Attitudes 256 Part IV Modern Strategies for Fishery Systems 259 13 Sustainability and Resilience 261 13.1 Sustainability 262 13.2 Resilience 265 13.3 The Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs) 268 13.4 Components of Sustainability and Resilience 268 13.5 Sustainability and Resilience of Institutions 273 13.5.1 Institutional Sustainability 273 13.5.2 Institutional Resilience 274 13.5.3 Institutional Effectiveness 275 13.6 Sustainability and Resilience within the Fishery System 277 13.6.1 Biodiversity 278 13.6.2 Fishing Fleets, Capacity, and Subsidies 279 13.6.3 Efficiency 282 13.6.4 Livelihood Diversity 283 13.6.4.1 Encourage Multi-Species Fisheries 284 13.6.4.2 Encourage Multiple Sources of Livelihood for Fishers 284 13.6.4.3 Diversify (Broaden the Base of) the Fishery-Dependent Economy 284 13.6.5 Post-Harvest and Fishing Communities 285 13.6.6 Fishery Objectives and Principles 285 13.6.7 Managing Conflict 286 13.7 Assessing Sustainability and Resilience in Fishery Systems 287 13.7.1 Sustainability Indicators 288 13.7.2 Resilience Assessment and Indicators 294 13.7.3 Developing a Framework of Indicators 296 14 Adaptive, Robust, and Precautionary Management 298 14.1 Uncertainty and Risk 298 14.2 Risk Assessment 299 14.3 Risk Management: Analytical Approaches 300 14.4 Adaptive Management and Robust Management 303 14.4.1 Adaptive Management 303 14.4.1.1 Flexibility 304 14.4.1.2 Adaptive Management Concepts and Methods 305 14.4.2 Structural Uncertainty and Robust Management 306 14.5 Moving to Robust, Adaptive Management 307 14.5.1 Avoiding the Illusion of Certainty 307 14.5.2 Avoiding the Fallacy of Controllability 308 14.5.3 Avoiding Lack of Robustness (Using a Management Portfolio) 309 14.6 The Precautionary Approach and the Burden of Proof 313 14.6.1 Approach Versus Principle 314 14.6.2 Implementing the Precautionary Approach 315 14.6.3 The Burden of Proof 316 14.6.4 Possible Applications of the Precautionary Approach and the Burden of Proof 316 14.6.4.1 The Stock–Recruitment Relationship 317 14.6.4.2 Over-Fishing Versus the Environment 317 14.6.4.3 Habitat Protection 318 15 The Ecosystem Approach to Fisheries 321 15.1 Rationale for an Ecosystem Approach 321 15.2 History of an Ecosystem Approach 322 15.3 Scope of an Ecosystem Approach 325 15.4 The Ecosystem Approach to Fisheries (EAF) 328 15.5 Implementing EAF 330 15.5.1 Principles 331 15.5.2 Entry Points 332 15.5.3 Resources for Implementation 333 15.6 Implementing EAF: Human Dimensions 334 15.6.1 Components of Human Dimensions 335 15.6.1.1 Social 335 15.6.1.2 Cultural 336 15.6.1.3 Economic 336 15.6.1.4 Political 336 15.6.1.5 Legal and Institutional 336 15.6.2 Human Dimensions Across Scales 337 16 Rights-Based Approaches to Fisheries Management 341 16.1 The Rationale for Fishery Rights 341 16.2 Use Rights 342 16.3 Management Rights 345 16.4 Use Rights and Management Rights in Context 346 16.5 Rights Versus Ownership 350 16.6 The Commons 351 16.7 Human Rights 353 16.8 Practicalities of Use Rights 358 16.9 Forms of Use Rights 359 16.9.1 Customary Tenure/Territorial Use Rights in Fishing (TURFs) 359 16.9.2 Limited Entry 363 16.9.3 Effort (Input) Rights 364 16.9.4 Catch (Output) Quotas 366 16.9.4.1 Individual Quotas and ITQs 367 16.9.4.2 Concerns with ITQs 369 16.9.4.3 Community Quotas 370 16.9.5 Community-Based Use Rights 371 16.10 Use Rights Issues: Initial Allocation 374 16.11 Use Rights Issues: Transferability 375 16.11.1 Efficiency 376 16.11.2 Social Cohesion 377 16.11.3 Concentration of Rights 377 16.12 Choosing a Use Rights System 379 17 Co-management and Community-Based Management 382 17.1 Fishery Co-management 382 17.1.1 Who Is Involved in Co-management? 383 17.1.2 Goals of Co-management 386 17.1.3 Forms of Co-management 386 17.1.3.1 Fisher–Government Co-management 387 17.1.3.2 Community-Based Co-management 388 17.1.3.3 Multi-Stakeholder Co-management 391 17.1.4 Levels of Co-management 393 17.1.5 Co-management and Components of Fishery Management 395 17.1.6 Discussion 397 17.2 Community-Based Fishery Management 397 17.2.1 What Is Community-Based Fishery Management? 398 17.2.2 Rationale for Community-Based Fishery Management 399 17.2.3 What Is Involved in Community-Based Fishery Management? 400 17.2.4 Experiences with Community-Based Fishery Management 401 17.2.5 Community-Based Conservation 403 17.2.6 Community Science 406 17.2.7 Factors of Success in Community-Based Fishery Management 407 Part V Fisheries and the Bigger Picture 411 18 Fisheries and Marine Protected Areas 413 18.1 Fishery Closed Areas 413 18.2 Nongovernmental (Informal) Protected Areas 414 18.3 Marine Protected Areas and OECMs 415 18.4 International Agreements 417 18.5 Types of MPAs and OECMs 418 18.5.1 No-Take MPAs 419 18.5.2 Zoned MPAs 419 18.5.3 Local/Community MPAs 421 18.5.4 Large-Scale MPAs 422 18.5.5 MPA Networks 422 18.6 Design of MPAs 423 18.7 Fishery Benefits and Costs of MPAs and OECMs 424 18.7.1 Examples of Possible Benefits of MPAs 425 18.7.2 Examples of Possible Costs of MPAs 425 18.8 Interactions of MPAs and OECMs with Fisheries 426 18.8.1 Objectives 427 18.8.2 Policy Linkages 428 18.8.3 Governance 428 18.8.4 Rights 429 18.8.5 Participation and Co-management 429 18.8.6 Community-Based Approaches 431 18.8.7 Knowledge 432 18.8.8 Livelihoods 432 18.9 MPAs as a Fisheries Management Tool 433 19 Fisheries and Biodiversity Conservation 437 19.1 Introduction 437 19.2 A Brief History of Biodiversity Conservation in a Fishery Context 437 19.3 Fisheries and Endangered Species 439 19.3.1 Bycatch 440 19.3.2 Turtles 441 19.3.3 Marine Mammals 442 19.3.3.1 Baleen Whales 442 19.3.3.2 Dolphins 443 19.3.3.3 Seals 444 19.3.4 Seahorses 444 19.4 Fisheries and Biodiversity Conservation 445 19.4.1 The Fisheries ‘Stream’ and the Biodiversity Conservation ‘Stream’ 446 19.4.2 Tensions Between the Fisheries and Biodiversity Streams 447 19.4.3 Common Ground of Fisheries and Biodiversity Conservation 448 19.5 Opportunities Across Scales for Linking Fisheries and Biodiversity Conservation 449 19.5.1 Global 449 19.5.2 Regional 451 19.5.3 National 451 19.5.4 Local 452 19.6 Incentives and Opportunities 453 19.7 CBD and IPBES 454 20 Fisheries and Multi-Sectoral Management 456 20.1 Fisheries, Competing Uses and the Need for Management of Multiple Sectors 456 20.2 Integrated Management 459 20.3 Marine Spatial Planning 462 20.4 Ocean Zoning 464 20.5 Blue Economy 466 20.6 Some Common Features of Multi-Sectoral Approaches 467 20.6.1 Rationale 467 20.6.2 Institutional Framework 467 20.6.3 Spatial Delimitation 468 20.6.4 Scale 468 20.7 Fisheries and Multi-Sectoral Management 468 20.7.1 Benefits of Linking Fisheries and Multi-Sectoral Management 468 20.7.1.1 Dealing with Externalities 469 20.7.1.2 Highlighting the Fishery Voice 469 20.7.1.3 Spatial Management 469 20.7.2 Concerns in Fisheries about Multi-Sectoral Management 470 20.7.2.1 Access and Power 470 20.7.2.2 Funding 470 20.7.2.3 Time Constraints 470 20.7.2.4 Dilution 471 20.7.2.5 Environmental Concerns 471 20.7.3 Linking Fisheries and Multi-Sectoral Management 473 20.7.3.1 Objectives 473 20.7.3.2 Values 473 20.7.3.3 Boundaries 474 20.7.3.4 Spatial and Organisational Scale 475 20.7.3.5 Institutions 477 20.7.3.6 Human Angles and Participatory Approaches 477 20.7.3.7 Benefits and Costs 478 20.7.3.8 Knowledge 479 21 Fisheries and Climate Change 481 21.1 Impacts of Climate Change 481 21.1.1 Physical, Chemical, and Biological Impacts of Climate Change 482 21.1.2 Effects of Climate Change on Human Dimensions of the Fishery System 482 21.1.3 Differential Impacts of Climate Change 485 21.2 Vulnerability and Adaptive Capacity 486 21.3 Responses to Climate Change: Mitigation and Adaptation 487 21.4 Responses to Climate Change: Mitigation 489 21.5 Responses to Climate Change: Adaptation 490 21.5.1 Types of Adaptation 492 21.5.2 Community-Based Adaptation 494 21.5.3 Differential Impacts and Benefits of Climate Adaptation 496 21.5.4 Adaptation of Fishery Management and Governance to Climate Change 498 21.5.5 Making Management and Governance more Adaptive, Flexible, and Robust 500 Part VI Conclusions 503 22 Sustaining Fisheries into the Future 505 22.1 A Review of Fishery Systems 505 22.2 A Review of Fishery Sustainability and Resilience 506 22.3 Making Fishery Governance and Management Effective 507 22.3.1 Institutions 507 22.3.2 Robust, Adaptive, and Precautionary Management 508 22.3.3 Ecosystem Approach to Fisheries 509 22.3.4 Rights 509 22.3.5 Co-management 510 22.3.6 Community-Based Management 510 22.4 The Bigger Picture Around the Fishery System 511 22.4.1 Fisheries and Biodiversity Conservation 511 22.4.2 Fisheries, MPAs, and OECMs 512 22.4.3 Fisheries and Multi-Sectoral Management 512 22.4.4 Fisheries and Climate Change 513 22.5 A Closing Note 514 Appendix A Atlantic Canada’s Groundfish Fishery System 516 Appendix B Models of Fishery Systems 524 Appendix C Developing a Framework of Fishery Indicators 538 References 547 Index 630

Read more less

Book SynopsisBioanalytical Aspects in Biological Therapeutics Deepen your understanding of how critical data are generated from bioanalysis In Bioanalytical Aspects in Biological Therapeutics, a team of renowned chemists, immunologists, and biologists delivers a timely and practical exploration of the diverse scientific and technical literature on the bioanalytical investigation of current biotherapeutics under development. The book discusses the challenges and considerations for bioanalytical support, covering a wide range of central topics in the field, including overview and basic immunology for testing of biological therapeutics, pharmacokinetic aspects, clinical immunogenicity prediction and testing, biomarker testing, biotransformation assessment for biologics, statistical aspects of bioanalytical testing, regulatory expectations, and more. Drug development and analysis professionals will learn how critical data are generated from bioanalysis and how proven tools and methods are applied to thTable of ContentsPreface viiXiaohui Xu and Weifeng Xu Foreword ixBinodh DeSilva Acknowledgments xiii About the Editors xv List of Contributors xvii 1 Overview of the Development of Biotherapeutics and the Role of Bioanalytical Sciences 1Robert Dodge 2 Basic Immunology for Bioanalytical Testing of Biotherapeutics 23Kang Chen and Weifeng Xu 3 Platform and Instrument Considerations in Bioanalytical Testing 51Dominic Warrino and Franklin Spriggs 4 Pharmacokinetic Assays 67Tong-Yuan Yang and Eric Wakshull 5 Recent Progress in Biomarker Bioanalysis and Target Engagement Assessment 87Yan G. Ni, Lindsay E. King and Carmen Fernández-Metzler 6 Immunogenicity Risk Assessment for Biotherapeutics 141Jochem Gokemeijer 7 Bioanalytical Strategy to Support Clinical Immunogenicity Assessment: Anti-drug Antibodies 159Ying Wang and Michael Luong 8 Bioanalytical Scheme for Antidrug Neutralizing Antibody Assays 185Weifeng Xu, Bonnie Wu and Jim McNally 9 Critical Reagents in Bioanalysis 209Yang Xu, Agostinho Gomes Rocha, Shannon Chilewski, Krisna C. Duong-Ly, Kun Yang and Jonathan Haulenbeek 10 Statistical Aspects of Bioanalytical Testing 239Arkady M. Gershteyn and Mark Ma 11 Bioanalytical Aspects in Biological Therapeutics: Biotransformation 277Wenying Jian, Cong Wei and Jinping Gan 12 New Modalities: Multidomain Therapeutics and Gene Therapy Programs 309Kelly Colletti and Mark Ma 13 Regulatory Aspects for Assay Development, Validation, and Sample Analysis 327Amy Lavelle and Megan Wiberg Index 355

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsIntroduction 1 Part 1: Understanding Cloud Concepts 5 Chapter 1: Understanding the Cloud 7 Chapter 2: Embracing the Business Imperative 21 Part 2: Examining Architectural Considerations 31 Chapter 3: Architectural Considerations for the Cloud Environment 33 Chapter 4: Managing a Hybrid and Multicloud Environment 43 Chapter 5: Standards in a Multicloud World 59 Chapter 6: A Closer Look at Cloud Services 73 Part 3: Understanding Cloud Models 87 Chapter 7: Introducing All Types of Clouds 89 Chapter 8: Using Infrastructure as a Service 107 Chapter 9: Using Software as a Service 121 Chapter 10: Standing on Platform as a Service 135 Part 4: Managing in a Multicloud World 147 Chapter 11: Planning for DevOps in the Cloud 149 Chapter 12: Managing Multicloud Workloads 165 Chapter 13: Managing Data Storage in the Cloud 177 Part 5: Developing Your Cloud Strategy 189 Chapter 14: Managing and Integrating Data in the Cloud 191 Chapter 15: Promoting Cloud Security and Governance 207 Chapter 16: Breaking Down Cloud Economics 225 Chapter 17: Planning Your Cloud Strategy 241 Part 6: The Part of Tens 253 Chapter 18: Ten Cloud Resources 255 Chapter 19: Ten Cloud Do’s and Don’ts 261 Glossary 267 Index 281

Read more less

Book SynopsisHighly regarded for its clarity and depth of coverage, the bestsellingPrinciples of Highway Engineering and Traffic Analysisprovides a comprehensive introduction to the highway-related problems civil engineers encounter every day. Emphasizing practical applications and up-to-date methods, this book prepares students for real-world practice while building the essential knowledge base required of a transportation professional. In-depth coverage of highway engineering and traffic analysis, road vehicle performance, traffic flow and highway capacity, pavement design, travel demand, traffic forecasting, and other essential topics equips students with the understanding they need to analyze and solve the problems facing highway system.Table of ContentsPreface v Chapter 1 Introduction to Highway Engineering and Traffic Analysis 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Highways and the Economy 2 1.2.1 The Highway Economy 2 1.2.2 Supply Chains 2 1.2.3 Economic Development 3 1.3 Highways, Energy, the Environment, and Climate Change 3 1.4 Highways as Part of the Transportation System 3 1.5 Highway Transportation and the Human Element 4 1.5.1 Passenger Transportation Modes and Traffic Congestion 4 1.5.2 Highway Safety 5 1.5.3 Demographic Trends 6 1.6 Highways and Evolving Technologies 6 1.6.1 Infrastructure Technologies 6 1.6.2 Traffic Control Technologies 7 1.6.3 Vehicle and Autonomous Vehicle Technologies 8 1.7 Scope of Study 9 Chapter 2 Road Vehicle Performance 11 2.1 Introduction 11 2.2 Tractive Effort and Resistance 11 2.3 Aerodynamic Resistance 12 2.4 Rolling Resistance 15 2.5 Grade Resistance 17 2.6 Available Tractive Effort 18 2.6.1 Maximum Tractive Effort 18 2.6.2 Engine-Generated Tractive Effort 21 2.7 Vehicle Acceleration 25 2.8 Fuel Efficiency 29 2.9 Principles of Braking 30 2.9.1 Braking Forces 30 2.9.2 Braking Force Ratio and Efficiency 32 2.9.3 Antilock Braking Systems 35 2.9.4 Theoretical Stopping Distance 35 2.9.5 Practical Stopping Distance 39 2.9.6 Distance Traveled During Driver Perception/Reaction 42 2.10 Practice Problems 45 Chapter 3 Geometric Design of Highways 53 3.1 Introduction 53 3.2 Principles of Highway Alignment 54 3.3 Vertical Alignment 55 3.3.1 Vertical Curve Fundamentals 57 3.3.2 Stopping Sight Distance 65 3.3.3 Stopping Sight Distance and Crest Vertical Curve Design 66 3.3.4 Stopping Sight Distance and Sag Vertical Curve Design 70 3.3.5 Passing Sight Distance and Crest Vertical Curve Design 78 3.3.6 Underpass Sight Distance and Sag Vertical Curve Design 81 3.4 Horizontal Alignment 84 3.4.1 Vehicle Cornering 84 3.4.2 Horizontal Curve Fundamentals 86 3.4.3 Stopping Sight Distance and Horizontal Curve Design 90 3.5 Combined Vertical and Horizontal Alignment 92 3.6 Practice Problems 98 Chapter 4 Pavement Design 107 4.1 Introduction 107 4.2 Pavement Types 107 4.2.1 Flexible Pavements 108 4.2.2 Rigid Pavements 109 4.3 Pavement System Design: Principles for Flexible Pavements 109 4.4 Traditional AASHTO Flexible-Pavement Design Procedure 110 4.4.1 Serviceability Concept 111 4.4.2 Flexible-Pavement Design Equation 111 4.4.3 Structural Number 118 4.5 Pavement System Design: Principles for Rigid Pavements 122 4.6 Traditional AASHTO Rigid-Pavement Design Procedure 123 4.7 Design-Lane Loads 132 4.8 Measuring Pavement Quality and Performance 137 4.8.1 International Roughness Index 137 4.8.2 Friction Measurements 138 4.8.3 Rut Depth 139 4.8.4 Cracking 139 4.8.5 Faulting 140 4.8.6 Punchouts 140 4.9 Mechanistic-Empirical Pavement Design 140 4.10 Practice Problems 142 Chapter 5 Fundamentals of Traffic Flow and Queuing Theory 151 5.1 Introduction 151 5.2 Traffic Stream Parameters 151 5.2.1 Traffic Flow, Speed, and Density 152 5.3 Basic Traffic Stream Models 157 5.3.1 Speed-Density Model 157 5.3.2 Flow-Density Model 159 5.3.3 Speed-Flow Model 160 5.4 Models of Traffic Flow 162 5.4.1 Poisson Model 162 5.4.2 Limitations of the Poisson Model 166 5.5 Queuing Theory and Traffic Flow Analysis 167 5.5.1 Dimensions of Queuing Models 167 5.5.2 D/D/1 Queuing 168 5.5.3 M/D/1 Queuing 175 5.5.4 M/M/1 Queuing 177 5.5.5 M/M/N Queuing 178 5.6 Traffic Analysis at Highway Bottlenecks 181 5.7 Impact of Autonomous Vehicles 184 5.8 Practice Problems 186 Chapter 6 Highway Capacity and Level-of-Service Analysis 191 6.1 Introduction 191 6.2 Level-of-Service Concept 192 6.3 Level-of-Service Determination 195 6.3.1 Base Conditions and Capacity 195 6.3.2 Determine Free-Flow Speed 195 6.3.3 Determine Analysis Flow Rate 196 6.3.4 Calculate Service Measure(s) and Determine LOS 196 6.4 Basic Freeway Segments 196 6.4.1 Speed versus Flow Rate Relationship 196 6.4.2 Base Conditions and Capacity 198 6.4.3 Service Measure 198 6.4.4 Determine Free-Flow Speed 201 6.4.5 Determine Analysis Flow Rate 202 6.4.6 Calculate Density and Determine LOS 208 6.5 Multilane Highway Segments 211 6.5.1 Speed versus Flow Rate Relationship 212 6.5.2 Base Conditions and Capacity 215 6.5.3 Service Measure 215 6.5.4 Determining Free-Flow Speed 215 6.5.5 Determining Analysis Flow Rate 217 6.5.6 Calculate Density and Determine LOS 217 6.6 Two-Lane Highways 221 6.6.1 Analysis Concepts 222 6.7 Design Traffic Volumes 233 6.8 Practice Problems 237 Chapter 7 Traffic Control and Analysis at Signalized Intersections 243 7.1 Introduction 243 7.2 Intersection and Signal Control Characteristics 244 7.2.1 Actuated Control 247 7.2.2 Signal Controller Operation 250 7.3 Traffic Flow Fundamentals for Signalized Intersections 253 7.4 Development of a Traffic Signal Phasing and Timing Plan 256 7.4.1 Select Signal Phasing 257 7.4.2 Establish Analysis Lane Groups 261 7.4.3 Calculate Analysis Flow Rates and Adjusted Saturation Flow Rates 263 7.4.4 Determine Critical Lane Groups and Total Cycle Lost Time 263 7.4.5 Calculate Cycle Length 266 7.4.6 Allocate Green Time 268 7.4.7 Calculate Change and Clearance Intervals 270 7.4.8 Check Pedestrian Crossing Time 272 7.5 Analysis of Traffic at Signalized Intersections 273 7.5.1 Signalized Intersection Analysis with D/D/1 Queuing 274 7.5.2 Signal Coordination 281 7.5.3 Control Delay Calculation for Level of Service Analysis 289 7.5.4 Level-of-Service Determination 294 7.6 Practice Problems 299 Chapter 8 Travel Demand and Traffic Forecasting 311 8.1 Introduction 311 8.2 Traveler Decisions 313 8.3 Scope of the Travel Demand and Traffic Forecasting Problem 313 8.4 Trip Generation 316 8.4.1 Typical Trip Generation Models 317 8.4.2 Trip Generation with Count Data Models 320 8.5 Mode and Destination Choice 322 8.5.1 Methodological Approach 322 8.5.2 Logit Model Applications 324 8.6 Highway Route Choice 329 8.6.1 Highway Performance Functions 330 8.6.2 User Equilibrium 331 8.6.3 Mathematical Programming Approach to User Equilibrium 336 8.6.4 System Optimization 337 8.7 Autonomous Vehicles, Highway Performance Functions, and System Optimization 341 8.8 Traffic Forecasting in Practice 342 8.9 The Traditional Four-Step Process 346 8.10 The Current State of Travel Demand and Traffic Forecasting 347 8.11 Practice Problems 348 Appendix 8A Least Squares Estimation 352 Appendix 8B Maximum-Likelihood Estimation 354 Problems (Available in e-text for students) P-1 Index I-1

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsAcknowledgment xiv Biographies xvi Preface to Second Edition xviii Preface to First Edition xx About the Companion Website xxii 1 Introduction to High-Performance Drives 1 1.1 Preliminary Remarks 1 1.2 General Overview of High-Performance Drives 6 1.3 Challenges and Requirements for Electric Drives for Industrial Applications 10 1.3.1 Power Quality and LC Resonance Suppression 11 1.3.2 Inverter Switching Frequency 12 1.3.3 Motor-Side Challenges 12 1.3.4 High dv/dt and Wave Reflection 12 1.3.5 Use of Inverter Output Filters 13 1.4 Wide Bandgap (WBG) Devices Applications in Electric Motor Drives 14 1.4.1 Industrial Prototype Using WBG 15 1.4.2 Major Challenges for WBG Devices for Electric Motor Drive Applications 15 1.5 Organization of the Book 16 References 19 2 Mathematical and Simulation Models of AC Machines 23 2.1 Preliminary Remarks 23 2.2 DC Motors 23 2.2.1 Separately Excited DC Motor Control 24 2.2.2 Series DC Motor Control 27 2.3 Squirrel Cage Induction Motor 28 2.3.1 Space Vector Representation 28 2.3.2 Clarke Transformation (ABC to αβ) 29 2.3.3 Park Transformation (αβ to dq) 32 2.3.4 Per Unit Model of Induction Motor 33 2.3.5 Double Fed Induction Generator (DFIG) 36 2.4 Mathematical Model of Permanent Magnet Synchronous Motor 39 2.4.1 Motor Model in dq Rotating Frame 40 2.4.2 Example of Motor Parameters for Simulation 42 2.4.3 PMSM Model in Per Unit System 42 2.4.4 PMSM Model in α − β (x − y)-Axis 44 2.5 Problems 45 References 45 3 Pulse-Width Modulation of Power Electronic DC–AC Converter 47Atif Iqbal, Arkadiusz Lewicki, and Marcin Morawiec 3.1 Preliminary Remarks 47 3.2 Classification of PWM Schemes for Voltage Source Inverters 48 3.3 Pulse-Width Modulated Inverters 49 3.3.1 Single-Phase Half-Bridge Inverters 49 3.3.2 Single-Phase Full-Bridge or H-Bridge Inverters 55 3.4 Three-Phase PWM Voltage Source Inverter 60 3.4.1 Carrier-Based Sinusoidal PWM 67 3.4.2 Third-Harmonic Injection Carrier-Based PWM 67 3.4.3 MATLAB/Simulink Model for Third-Harmonic Injection PWM 72 3.4.4 Carrier-Based PWM with Offset Addition 72 3.4.5 Space Vector PWM (SVPWM) 74 3.4.6 Discontinuous Space Vector PWM 79 3.4.7 MATLAB/Simulink Model for Space Vector PWM 84 3.4.8 Space Vector PWM in Overmodulation Region 93 3.4.9 MATLAB/Simulink Model to Implement Space Vector PWM in Overmodulation Regions 99 3.4.10 Harmonic Analysis 100 3.4.11 Artificial Neural Network-Based PWM 100 3.4.12 MATLAB/Simulink Model of Implementing ANN-Based SVPWM 103 3.5 Relationship Between Carrier-Based PWM and SVPWM 104 3.5.1 Modulating Signals and Space Vectors 105 3.5.2 Relationship Between Line-to-Line Voltages and Space Vectors 106 3.5.3 Modulating Signals and Space Vector Sectors 107 3.6 Low-Switching Frequency PWM 107 3.6.1 Types of Symmetries and Fourier Analysis 109 3.6.2 Selective Harmonics Elimination in a two-Level VSI 109 3.6.3 MATLAB Code 114 3.7 Multilevel Inverters 116 3.7.1 Neutral-Point-Clamped (Diode-Clamped) Multilevel Inverters 116 3.7.2 Flying Capacitor-Type Multilevel Inverter 120 3.7.3 Cascaded H-Bridge Multilevel Inverter 126 3.8 Space Vector Modulation and DC-Link Voltage Balancing in Three-Level Neutral-Point-Clamped Inverters 128 3.8.1 The Output Voltage of Three-Level NPC Inverter in the Case of the DC-Link Voltage Unbalance 128 3.8.2 The Space Vector PWM for NPC Inverters 134 3.8.3 MATLAB/Simulink of SVPWM 137 3.9 Space Vector PWM for Multilevel-Cascaded H-Bridge Converter with DC-Link Voltage Balancing 138 3.9.1 Control of a Multilevel CHB Converter 141 3.9.2 The Output Voltage of a Single H-Bridge 142 3.9.3 Three-Level CHB Inverter 143 3.9.4 The Space Vector Modulation for Three-Level CHB Inverter 145 3.9.5 The Space Vector Modulation for Multilevel CHB Inverter 149 3.9.6 MATLAB/Simulink Simulation of SVPWM 150 3.10 Impedance Source or Z-source Inverter 150 3.10.1 Circuit Analysis 154 3.10.2 Carrier-Based Simple Boost PWM Control of a Z-source Inverter 156 3.10.3 Carrier-Based Maximum Boost PWM Control of a Z-source Inverter 157 3.10.4 MATLAB/Simulink Model of Z-source Inverter 159 3.11 Quasi Impedance Source or qZSI Inverter 159 3.11.1 MATLAB/Simulink Model of qZ-source Inverter 164 3.12 Dead Time Effect in a Multiphase Inverter 164 3.13 Summary 169 Problems 169 References 170 4 Field-Oriented Control of AC Machines 177 4.1 Introduction 177 4.2 Induction Machines Control 178 4.2.1 Control of Induction Motor Using V/f Methods 178 4.2.2 Vector Control of Induction Motor 182 4.2.3 Direct and Indirect Field-Oriented Control 188 4.2.4 Rotor and Stator Flux Computation 188 4.2.5 Adaptive Flux Observers 189 4.2.6 Stator Flux Orientation 190 4.2.7 Field Weakening Control 191 4.3 Vector Control of Double Fed Induction Generator (DFIG) 192 4.3.1 Introduction 192 4.3.2 Vector Control of DFIG Connected with the Grid (αβ Model) 194 4.3.3 Variables Transformation 194 4.3.4 Simulation Results 198 4.4 Control of Permanent Magnet Synchronous Machine 198 4.4.1 Introduction 198 4.4.2 Vector Control of PMSM in dq Axis 200 4.4.3 Vector Control of PMSM in α−β Axis Using PI Controller 203 4.4.4 Scalar Control of PMSM 207 Exercises 208 Additional Tasks 208 Possible Tasks for DFIG 208 Questions 208 References 209 5 Direct Torque Control of AC Machines 211Truc Phamdinh 5.1 Preliminary Remarks 211 5.2 Basic Concept and Principles of DTC 212 5.2.1 Basic Concept 212 5.2.2 Principle of DTC 214 5.3 DTC of Induction Motor with Ideal Constant Machine Model 220 5.3.1 Ideal Constant Parameter Model of Induction Motors 220 5.3.2 Direct Torque Control Scheme 222 5.3.3 Speed Control with DTC 225 5.3.4 MATLAB/Simulink Simulation of Torque Control and Speed Control with DTC 225 5.4 DTC of Induction Motor with Consideration of Iron Loss 240 5.4.1 Induction Machine Model with Iron Loss Consideration 240 5.4.2 MATLAB/SIMULINK Simulation of the Effects of Iron Losses in Torque Control and Speed Control 243 5.4.3 Modified Direct Torque Control Scheme for Iron Loss Compensation 254 5.5 DTC of Induction Motor with Consideration of Both Iron Losses and Magnetic Saturation 259 5.5.1 Induction Machine Model with Consideration of Iron Losses and Magnetic Saturation 259 5.5.2 MATLAB/Simulink Simulation of Effects of Both Iron Losses and Magnetic Saturation in Torque Control and Speed Control 260 5.6 Modified Direct Torque Control of Induction Machine with Constant Switching Frequency 275 5.7 Direct Torque Control of Sinusoidal Permanent Magnet Synchronous Motors (SPMSM) 276 5.7.1 Introduction 276 5.7.2 Mathematical Model of Sinusoidal PMSM 276 5.7.3 Direct Torque Control Scheme of PMSM 278 5.7.4 MATLAB/Simulink Simulation of SPMSM with DTC 278 References 296 6 Nonlinear Control of Electrical Machines Using Nonlinear Feedback 299Zbigniew Krzeminski and Haitham Abu-Rub 6.1 Introduction 299 6.2 Dynamic System Linearization Using Nonlinear Feedback 300 6.3 Nonlinear Control of Separately Excited DC Motors 301 6.3.1 MATLAB/Simulink Nonlinear Control Model 303 6.3.2 Nonlinear Control Systems 303 6.3.3 Speed Controller 304 6.3.4 Controller for Variable m 304 6.3.5 Field Current Controller 306 6.3.6 Simulation Results 306 6.4 Multiscalar Model (MM) of Induction Motor 306 6.4.1 Multiscalar Variables 307 6.4.2 Nonlinear Linearization of Induction Motor Fed by Voltage Controlled VSI 308 6.4.3 Design of System Control 310 6.4.4 Nonlinear Linearization of Induction Motor Fed by Current Controlled VSI 311 6.4.5 Stator-Oriented Nonlinear Control System (based on Ψs, is) 314 6.4.6 Rotor–Stator Fluxes-Based Model 315 6.4.7 Stator-Oriented Multiscalar Model 316 6.4.8 Multiscalar Control of Induction Motor 318 6.4.9 Induction Motor Model 319 6.4.10 State Transformations 320 6.4.11 Decoupled IM Model 321 6.5 MM of Double-Fed Induction Machine (DFIM) 322 6.6 Nonlinear Control of Permanent Magnet Synchronous Machine 325 6.6.1 Nonlinear Control of PMSM for a dq Motor Model 327 6.6.2 Nonlinear Vector Control of PMSM in α−β Axis 329 6.6.3 PMSM Model in α−β (x−y) Axis 329 6.6.4 Transformations 329 6.6.5 Control System 333 6.6.6 Simulation Results 334 6.7 Problems 334 References 334 7 Five-Phase Induction Motor Drive System 337 7.1 Preliminary Remarks 337 7.2 Advantages and Applications of Multiphase Drives 338 7.3 Modeling and Simulation of a Five-Phase Induction Motor Drive 339 7.3.1 Five-Phase Induction Motor Model 339 7.3.2 Five-Phase Two-Level Voltage Source Inverter Model 345 7.3.3 PWM Schemes of a Five-Phase VSI 380 7.4 Direct Rotor Field-Oriented Control of Five-Phase Induction Motor 396 7.4.1 MATLAB/Simulink Model of Field-Oriented Control of Five-Phase Induction Machine 398 7.5 Field-Oriented Control of Five-Phase Induction Motor with Current Control in the Synchronous Reference Frame 402 7.6 Direct Torque Control of a Five-Phase Induction Motor 404 7.6.1 Control of Inverter Switches Using DTC Technique 404 7.6.2 Virtual Vector for Five-Phase Two-Level Inverter 405 7.7 Model Predictive Control (MPC) 420 7.7.1 MPC Applied to a Five-Phase Two-Level VSI 421 7.7.2 MATLAB/Simulink of MPC for Five-Phase VSI 422 7.7.3 Using Eleven Vectors with γ = 0 423 7.7.4 Using Eleven Vectors with γ = 1 425 7.8 Summary 426 7.9 Problems 426 References 427 8 Sensorless Speed Control of AC Machines 433 8.1 Preliminary Remarks 433 8.2 Sensorless Control of Induction Motor 433 8.2.1 Speed Estimation Using Open-Loop Model and Slip Computation 434 8.2.2 Closed-Loop Observers 434 8.2.3 MRAS (Closed-Loop) Speed Estimator 443 8.2.4 The Use of Power Measurements 446 8.3 Sensorless Control of PMSM 448 8.3.1 Control System of PMSM 450 8.3.2 Adaptive Backstepping Observer 450 8.3.3 Model Reference Adaptive System for PMSM 452 8.3.4 Simulation Results 454 8.4 MRAS-Based Sensorless Control of Five-Phase Induction Motor Drive 454 8.4.1 MRAS-Based Speed Estimator 458 8.4.2 Simulation Results 460 References 464 9 Selected Problems of Induction Motor Drives with Voltage Inverter and Inverter Output Filters 469 9.1 Drives and Filters – Overview 469 9.2 Three-Phase to Two-Phase Transformations 471 9.3 Voltage and Current Common Mode Component 473 9.3.1 MATLAB/Simulink Model of Induction Motor Drive with PWM Inverter and Common Mode Voltage 474 9.4 Induction Motor Common Mode Circuit 477 9.5 Bearing Current Types and Reduction Methods 478 9.5.1 Common Mode Choke 480 9.5.2 Common Mode Transformers 482 9.5.3 Common Mode Voltage Reduction by PWM Modifications 483 9.6 Inverter Output Filters 489 9.6.1 Selected Structures of Inverter Output Filters 489 9.6.2 Inverter Output Filters Design 494 9.6.3 Motor Choke 503 9.6.4 MATLAB/Simulink Model of Induction Motor Drive with PWM Inverter and Differential Mode LC Filter 506 9.7 Estimation Problems in the Drive with Filters 509 9.7.1 Introduction 509 9.7.2 Speed Observer with Disturbances Model 511 9.7.3 Simple Observer Based on Motor Stator Models 514 9.8 Motor Control Problems in the Drive with Filters 516 9.8.1 Introduction 516 9.8.2 Field-Oriented Control 518 9.8.3 Nonlinear Field-Oriented Control 522 9.8.4 Nonlinear Multiscalar Control 526 9.9 Predictive Current Control in the Drive System with Output Filter 530 9.9.1 Control System 530 9.9.2 Predictive Current Controller 534 9.9.3 EMF Estimation Technique 536 9.10 Problems 541 Questions 544 References 545 10 Medium Voltage Drives – Challenges and Trends 549Haitham Abu-Rub, Sertac Bayhan, Shaikh Moinoddin, Mariusz Malinowski, and Jaroslaw Guzinski 10.1 Introduction 549 10.2 Medium Voltage Drive Topologies 551 10.3 Challenges and Requirements of MV Drives 561 10.3.1 Power Quality and LC Resonance Suppression 561 10.3.2 Inverter Switching Frequency 561 10.3.3 Motor Side Challenges 562 10.4 Summary 569 References 569 11 Current Source Inverter Fed Drive 575Marcin Morawiec and Arkadiusz Lewicki 11.1 Introduction 575 11.2 Current Source Inverter Structure 576 11.3 Pulse Width Modulation of Current Source Inverter 578 11.4 Mathematical Model of the Current Source Inverter Fed Drive 582 11.5 Control System of an Induction Machine Supplied by a Current Source Inverter 583 11.5.1 Open-Loop Control 583 11.5.2 Direct Field Control of Induction Machine 584 11.6 Control System Model in Matlab/Simulink 587 References 591 Index 593

Read more less

Book SynopsisSMART HYBRID AC/DC MICROGRIDS Addresses the technical aspects and implementation challenges of smart hybrid AC/DC microgrids Hybrid AC/DC Microgrids: Power Management, Energy Management, and Power Quality Control provides comprehensive coverage of interconnected smart hybrid microgrids, their different structures, and the technical issues associated with their control and implementation in the next generation of smart grids. This authoritative single-volume resource addresses smart hybrid microgrids power management, energy management, communications, power converter control, power quality, renewable generation integration, energy storage, and more. The book contains both basic and advanced technical information about smart hybrid AC/DC microgrids, featuring a detailed discussion of microgrid structures, communication technologies, and various configurations of interfacing power converters and control strategies. Numerous case studies highlight effTable of ContentsAuthor Biographies xiii Preface xv Part I Smart Hybrid AC/DC Microgrids 1 1 Smart Hybrid AC/DC Microgrids 3 1.1 Introduction to Microgrids 3 1.1.1 Concept of Microgrids 3 1.1.2 Development of Microgrids 4 1.1.3 Features of Modern Microgrids 6 1.2 Smart Hybrid Microgrid Configurations 8 1.2.1 AC-coupled Hybrid Microgrid 8 1.2.2 DC-coupled Hybrid Microgrid 9 1.2.3 AC/DC-Coupled Hybrid Microgrid 10 1.2.4 Examples of Hybrid Microgrids 11 1.3 Smart Hybrid Microgrid Operations 14 1.3.1 Distributed Generation and Energy Storage Systems 14 1.3.2 Smart Interfacing Converters 16 1.3.3 Cyber Systems 16 1.3.4 Power Management and Energy Management Systems 17 1.3.5 Power Quality 17 1.4 Outline of the Book 18 References 20 2 Renewable Energy, Energy Storage, and Smart Interfacing Power Converters 21 2.1 Renewable-based Generation 21 2.1.1 Photovoltaic (PV) Power Systems 21 2.1.2 Wind Power Systems 29 2.2 Energy Storage Systems 37 2.2.1 Battery Energy Storage System 38 2.2.2 Flywheel Energy Storage System 43 2.2.3 Superconducting Magnet Energy Storage System 44 2.2.4 Hydrogen and Fuel Cell Energy Storage 45 2.3 Integration of Renewable Energy and Energy Storage 49 2.3.1 Structure of Smart Interfacing Converters (IFCs) 49 2.3.2 Operation and Coordination 52 2.4 Summary 54 References 54 3 Smart Microgrid Communications 55 3.1 Introduction 55 3.2 Communication Technique for Smart Microgrids 57 3.2.1 Basic Concepts of Communication Systems 57 3.2.2 Structures of Communication Networks in Smart Microgrids 59 3.2.3 Requirements of Communication in Smart Microgrids 61 3.2.4 Wired Communication Technologies in a Microgrid 62 3.2.5 Wireless Communication Technologies 65 3.3 Standards and Protocols in Smart Microgrids 67 3.3.1 Standards and Protocols for General Communication 67 3.3.2 Standards and Protocols for Substation Automation 70 3.3.3 Standards and Protocols for Control Center and Wide Area Monitoring 71 3.3.4 Standards and Protocols for Distributed Generation and Demand Response 72 3.3.5 Standards and Protocols for Metering 73 3.3.6 Standards and Protocols for Electric Vehicle Charging 74 3.4 Network Cyber-security 75 3.5 Summary 78 References 78 Part II Power Management Systems (PMSs) and Energy Management Systems (EMSs) 81 4 Smart Interfacing Power Electronics Converter Control 83 4.1 Primary Control of Power Electronics Converters 83 4.1.1 Basic Control Techniques in Power Converters 84 4.1.2 Current Control Method 90 4.1.3 Voltage Control Method 92 4.2 Virtual Impedance Control of Power Electronic Converters 93 4.2.1 Internal Virtual Impedance 94 4.2.2 External Virtual Impedance 96 4.2.3 Integration of both Internal and External Virtual Impedance 97 4.3 Droop Control of Power Electronics Converters 99 4.3.1 Frequency and Voltage Droop Control in an AC Subgrid 99 4.3.2 Voltage Droop Control in DC Subgrids 102 4.3.3 Unified Droop for Interlinking AC and DC Subgrids 102 4.3.4 Challenges of Droop Control and Solutions 105 4.4 Virtual Synchronous Generator (VSG) Control of Interfacing Power Electronics Converters 110 4.4.1 Principles of VSG Control 111 4.4.2 Implementation of VSG Control 112 4.4.3 Relationship Between Droop Control and VSG Control 115 4.5 Unified Control of Power Electronics Converters 116 4.6 Summary 118 References 118 5 Power Management System (PMS) in Smart Hybrid AC/DC Microgrids 121 5.1 Introduction 121 5.2 Hierarchical Control of Hybrid Microgrids 122 5.3 Power Management Systems (PMSs) in Different Structures of Hybrid Microgrids 125 5.3.1 PMS of an AC-coupled Hybrid Microgrid 125 5.3.2 PMS of a DC-coupled Hybrid Microgrid 128 5.3.3 PMS of an AC-DC-coupled Hybrid Microgrid 130 5.4 Power Management Strategies During Transitions and Different Loading Conditions 133 5.4.1 PMS During Transition Between Grid-Connected and Islanding Operation Modes 133 5.4.2 Power Management Strategies Under Different Loading Conditions 137 5.5 Implemented Examples of Power Management Systems in Hybrid Microgrids 137 5.5.1 PMS Example of an AC-coupled Hybrid Microgrid 137 5.5.2 PMS Example of a DC-coupled Hybrid Microgrid 140 5.5.3 PMS Example of an AC-DC-coupled Hybrid Microgrid 143 5.6 Black Start in Hybrid Microgrids 146 5.6.1 General Requirements of Black Start in Microgrids 147 5.6.2 Microgrid Black Start Scheme 147 5.6.3 Main Issues and Related Measures of Black Starts in Microgrids 152 5.7 Summary 153 References 153 6 Energy Management System (EMS) in Smart Hybrid Microgrids 155 6.1 Energy Management in Hierarchical Control of Microgrids 155 6.1.1 Hierarchical Control 155 6.1.2 Energy Management System 157 6.1.3 Communications in an Energy Management System 162 6.2 Multi-agent Control Strategy of Microgrids 162 6.3 Advance Distribution Management Systems (ADMSs) in Smart Hybrid Microgrids 165 6.3.1 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) 165 6.3.2 Geographic Information Systems (GISs) 167 6.3.3 Distribution Management System (DMS) 167 6.3.4 Automated Meter Reading/Automatic Metering Infrastructure (amr/ami) 168 6.3.5 Outage Management Systems (OMSs) 168 6.3.6 Distributed Energy Resource Management System (DERMS) 169 6.4 Cyber-security in Smart Hybrid Microgrids 170 6.4.1 Different Types of Cyber-security Violations 170 6.4.2 Impacts of Cyber-security Violations on Smart Microgrids 172 6.4.3 Construction of Cyber-security Violations in Smart Microgrids 173 6.4.4 Defensive Strategies Against Cyber-attacks 174 6.4.5 Case Study Example: Cyber-security Violations in Power Electronics-intensive DC Microgrids 176 6.4.6 Future Trends of Microgrid Cyber-security 181 6.5 Summary 182 References 182 Part III Power Quality Issues and Control in Smart Hybrid Microgrids 185 7 Overview of Power Quality in Microgrids 187 7.1 Introduction 187 7.2 Classification of Power Quality Disturbances 188 7.2.1 Transients 188 7.2.2 Short Duration Variations 189 7.2.3 Long Duration Variations 191 7.2.4 Voltage Fluctuations 191 7.2.5 Voltage Imbalance 191 7.2.6 Power Frequency Variations 192 7.2.7 Waveform Distortion 192 7.3 Overview of Power Quality Standards 193 7.4 Mitigation Techniques of Power Quality Problems 198 7.4.1 Passive Mitigation Solutions 198 7.4.2 Active Mitigation Solutions 202 7.5 Power Quality Issues and Compensation in Microgrids 210 7.5.1 Power Quality Issues in an AC Microgrid 210 7.5.2 Power Quality in a Hybrid AC/DC Microgrid 213 7.6 Summary 216 References 216 8 Smart Microgrid Control During Grid Disturbances 219 8.1 Introduction 219 8.2 Islanding Detection 220 8.2.1 Local Islanding Detection Methods 221 8.2.2 Remote Islanding Detection Methods 225 8.2.3 Signal Processing Techniques Used in Islanding Detection 226 8.2.4 Intelligent Techniques Used in Islanding Detection 227 8.3 Fault Ride-through Capability 228 8.3.1 Fault Ride-through Requirement 229 8.3.2 Ride-through Enhancement 232 8.4 Fault Current Contribution and Protection Coordination 240 8.4.1 Impact of DG on Fuse-recloser Coordination 241 8.4.2 Impact of Reactive Power Injection on Fuse-recloser Coordination 244 8.4.3 Example of Inverter Current Control Strategy under RT 245 8.5 Summary 250 References 250 9 Unbalanced Voltage Compensation in Smart Hybrid Microgrids 253 9.1 Introduction 253 9.2 Control of Individual Three-phase IFCs for Unbalanced Voltage Compensation 254 9.2.1 Three-phase IFC Model under Unbalanced Voltage 255 9.2.2 Control of Unbalanced Voltage Adverse Effects on IFC Operation 259 9.2.3 Adjustable Unbalanced Voltage Compensation with IFC Active Power Oscillation Minimization 260 9.3 Control of Parallel Three-phase IFCs for Unbalance Voltage Compensation 262 9.3.1 Parallel Three-phase IFCs Model under Unbalanced Voltage 263 9.3.2 Parallel Three-phase IFCs Control under Unbalanced Voltage: Redundant IFC for ΔP Cancelation 267 9.3.3 Parallel Three-phase IFCs Control under Unbalanced Voltage: All Parallel IFCs Participate in ΔP Cancelation 271 9.4 Control of Single-phase IFCs for Three-phase System Unbalanced Voltage Compensation 276 9.4.1 System Model with Embedded Single-phase IFCs under Three-phase Unbalanced Voltage 276 9.4.2 Reactive Power Control of Single-phase IFCs for Three-phase AC Subgrid Unbalanced Voltage Compensation 280 9.5 Summary 288 References 289 10 Harmonic Compensation Control in Smart Hybrid Microgrids 291 10.1 Introduction 291 10.2 Control of Interfacing Power Converters for Harmonic Compensation in AC Subgrids 292 10.2.1 Harmonics Compensation with the Current Control Method (CCM) 296 10.2.2 Harmonics Compensation with the Voltage Control Method (VCM) 298 10.2.3 Harmonics Compensation with the Hybrid Control Method (HCM) 301 10.2.4 Comparison of Harmonics Compensation with the CCM, the VCM, and the HCM 305 10.3 Control of Low-switching Interfacing Power Converters for Harmonics Compensation in an AC Subgrid 308 10.3.1 Low-switching Interfacing Converters Sampling Methods 309 10.3.2 Control of Low-switching IFCs for Harmonics Compensation with Feed-forward Strategy 311 10.4 Control of Interfacing Power Converters for Harmonics Compensation in a DC Subgrid 317 10.4.1 Harmonics Compensation in a DC Subgrid Using DC/AC Interlinking Power Converters 319 10.4.2 Harmonics Compensation in a DC Subgrid Using DC/DC Interfacing Power Converters 320 10.5 Coordinated Control of Multiple Interfacing Power Converters for Harmonics Compensation 321 10.5.1 Autonomous Harmonic Control 322 10.5.2 Supervisory Harmonic Control 322 10.6 Summary 329 References 329 A Instantaneous Power Theory from Three-phase and Single-phase System Perspectives 331 A. 1 Introduction 331 A. 2 Principles of Instantaneous Power Theory 331 A. 3 Power Control Using Instantaneous Power Theory from a Three-phase System Perspective 333 A.3. 1 Reference Current Focusing on Unbalanced Condition Compensation 333 A.3. 2 Reference Current Focusing on Active and Reactive Power Oscillation Cancelation 335 A. 4 Power Control Using Instantaneous Power Theory from a Single-phase System Perspective 336 A. 5 Discussion 338 A.5. 1 Example 1: Only Positive Sequence Active Current Injection 338 A.5. 2 Example 2: Only Negative Sequence Active Current Injection 340 A. 6 Summary 340 References 341 B Peak Current of Interfacing Power Converters Under Unbalanced Voltage 343 B.1 Introduction 343 B.2 Peak Currents of Interfacing Converters 343 B.2.1 Individual Interfacing Converters 343 B.2.2 Parallel Interfacing Converters 346 B.3 Maximizing Power/Current Transfer Capability of Interfacing Converters 348 B.3.1 Individual IFCs Peak Currents in the Same Phase as the Collective Peak Current of Parallel IFCs 350 B.3.2 Individual IFCs Peak Currents In-phase with the Collective Peak Current of Parallel IFCs 357 B. 4 Summary 358 References 358 C case Study System Parameters 359 Index 367

Read more less

Book SynopsisIntroductory Mathematics for Engineering Applications, 2nd Edition, provides first-year engineering students with a practical, applications-based approach to the subject. This comprehensive textbook covers pre-calculus, trigonometry, calculus, and differential equations in the context of various discipline-specific engineering applications. The text offers numerous worked examples and problems representing a wide range of real-world uses, from determining hydrostatic pressure on a retaining wall to measuring current, voltage, and energy stored in an electrical capacitor. Rather than focusing on derivations and theory, clear and accessible chapters deliver the hands-on mathematical knowledge necessary to solve the engineering problems students will encounter in their careers. The textbook is designed for courses that complement traditional math prerequisites for introductory engineering courses enabling students to advance in their engineering curriculum witTable of ContentsPreface vi Acknowledgement viii 1 Straight Lines In Engineering 1 1.1 Vehicle during Braking 1 1.2 Voltage–Current Relationship in a Resistive Circuit 3 1.3 Force–Displacement in a Preloaded Tension Spring 6 1.4 Further Examples of Lines in Engineering 7 Problems 18 2 Quadratic Equations In Engineering 31 2.1 A Projectile in a Vertical Plane 31 2.2 Current in a Lamp 35 2.3 Equivalent Resistance 36 2.4 Further Examples of Quadratic Equations in Engineering 38 Problems 50 3 Trigonometry In Engineering 61 3.1 Introduction 61 3.2 One-Link Planar Robot 61 3.2.1 Kinematics of One-Link Robot 61 3.2.2 Inverse Kinematics of One-Link Robot 69 3.3 Two-Link Planar Robot 73 3.3.1 Direct Kinematics of Two-Link Robot 74 3.3.2 Inverse Kinematics of Two-Link Robot 76 3.3.3 Further Examples of Two-Link Planar Robot 81 3.4 Further Examples of Trigonometry in Engineering 91 Problems 99 4 Two-Dimensional Vectors In Engineering 107 4.1 Introduction 107 4.2 Position Vector in Rectangular Form 108 4.3 Position Vector in Polar Form 108 4.4 Vector Addition 111 4.4.1 Examples of Vector Addition in Engineering 112 Problems 124 5 Complex Numbers In Engineering 134 5.1 Introduction 134 5.2 Position of One-Link Robot as a Complex Number 135 5.3 Impedance of R, L, and C as a Complex Number 136 5.3.1 Impedance of a Resistor R 136 5.3.2 Impedance of an Inductor L 136 5.3.3 Impedance of a Capacitor C 137 5.4 Impedance of a Series RLC Circuit 137 5.5 Impedance of R and L Connected in Parallel 139 5.6 Armature Current in a DC Motor 141 5.7 Further Examples of Complex Numbers in Electric Circuits 143 5.8 Complex Conjugate 148 Problems 149 6 Sinusoids In Engineering 160 6.1 One-Link Planar Robot as a Sinusoid 160 6.2 Angular Motion of the One-Link Planar Robot 163 6.2.1 Relations between Frequency and Period 164 6.3 Phase Angle, Phase Shift, and Time Shift 165 6.4 General Form of a Sinusoid 167 6.5 Addition of Sinusoids of the Same Frequency 169 Problems 176 7 Systems of Equations In Engineering 188 7.1 Introduction 188 7.2 Solution of a Two-Loop Circuit 188 7.3 Tension in Cables 193 7.4 Further Examples of Systems of Equations in Engineering 196 Problems 210 8 Derivatives In Engineering 223 8.1 Introduction 223 8.1.1 What Is a Derivative? 223 8.2 Maxima and Minima 226 8.3 Applications of Derivatives in Dynamics 230 8.3.1 Position, Velocity, and Acceleration 230 8.4 Applications of Derivatives in Electric Circuits 245 8.4.1 Current and Voltage in an Inductor 248 8.4.2 Current and Voltage in a Capacitor 252 8.5 Applications of Derivatives in Strength of Materials 255 8.5.1 Maximum Stress under Axial Loading 261 8.6 Further Examples of Derivatives in Engineering 265 Problems 270 9 Integrals In Engineering 282 9.1 Introduction: The Asphalt Problem 282 9.2 Concept of Work 287 9.3 Application of Integrals in Statics 290 9.3.1 Center of Gravity (Centroid) 290 9.3.2 Alternate Definition of the Centroid 298 9.4 Distributed Loads 300 9.4.1 Hydrostatic Pressure on a Retaining Wall 301 9.4.2 Distributed Loads on Beams: Statically Equivalent Loading 302 9.5 Applications of Integrals in Dynamics 307 9.5.1 Graphical Interpretation 313 9.6 Applications of Integrals in Electric Circuits 319 9.6.1 Current, Voltage, and Energy Stored in a Capacitor 319 9.7 Current and Voltage in an Inductor 328 9.8 Further Examples of Integrals in Engineering 333 Problems 342 10 Differential Equations In Engineering 354 10.1 Introduction: The Leaking Bucket 354 10.2 Differential Equations 355 10.3 Solution of Linear DEQ with Constant Coefficients 356 10.4 First-Order Differential Equations 357 10.5 Second-Order Differential Equations 383 10.5.1 Free Vibration of a Spring–Mass System 383 10.5.2 Forced Vibration of a Spring–Mass System 387 10.5.3 Second-Order LC Circuit 394 Problems 397 11 Probability and Statistics In Engineering 409 11.1 Introduction 409 11.2 Quality Control Probability in Manufacturing 409 11.3 Manufacturing Tolerance of Resistors 412 11.4 Probability of Accepting/Rejecting Manufactured Resistors 414 Problems 420 Answers To Selected Problems P-1 Index I-1

Read more less

Book SynopsisFundamentals of Aquatic Veterinary Medicine Covers the competencies necessary to assure the highest quality of aquatic veterinary services Fundamentals of Aquatic Veterinary Medicine provides systematic, highly practical guidance on the treatment of aquatic mammals, amphibians, fish, and invertebrates in veterinary practice. Mapping to each of the nine core areas of the WAVMA Certified Aquatic Veterinarian (CertAqV) Program, this comprehensive clinical reference covers taxonomy, anatomy and physiology of aquatic species, water quality and life support systems, diagnostics, treatment, and prevention of aquatic diseases, and more. Designed to help readers acquire and demonstrate the necessary knowledge, skills, and experience to be competent in aquatic veterinary medicine, this authoritative guide: Focuses on Day One competencies outlined by the World Organization for Animal Health (OIE)Covers pathobiology and epidemiology of aquatic diseases, public health, zoonotic diseases, and seaTable of ContentsPreface xv List of Contributors xvii Acknowledgement xix About the Companion Website xxi 1 Aquatic Environment and Life Support Systems 1 Sherry Kasper, Olanike K. Adeyemo, Trista Becker, David Scarfe, and Julius Tepper 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 The Life‐Support System in Aquaculture and Ornamental Fish Care 2 1.2.1 Extensive Culture System 3 1.2.1.1 Ponds 3 1.2.1.2 Tanks 3 1.2.2 Semi‐Intensive Culture System 3 1.2.3 Intensive Culture System 4 1.3 Physical Features of Life‐Support Systems 4 1.3.1 Mechanical, Chemical and Other Types of Filtration 4 1.3.1.1 Ultrasonic Cavitation 5 1.3.1.2 Ultraviolet Filtration 5 1.3.1.3 Ozone Filtration 6 1.3.1.4 Biological Filtration 6 1.3.2 Aquasystem Water 7 1.3.2.1 Abiotic (Chemical and Physical) Properties 7 1.3.2.2 Temperature 7 1.3.2.3 pH 7 1.3.2.4 Dissolved Oxygen 8 1.3.2.5 Carbon Dioxide 8 1.3.2.6 Nitrogen 9 1.3.2.7 Hydrogen Sulfide 9 1.3.2.8 Chlorine 9 1.3.2.9 Alkalinity 9 1.3.2.10 Hardness 10 1.3.2.11 Conductivity, Salinity, Total Dissolved Solids 10 1.3.2.12 Light, Color, Vibration and Noise 11 1.3.2.13 Greenhouse Gasses and Climate Change 11 1.3.2.14 Ammonia, Nitrite and Nitrate 13 1.3.2.15 The Nitrogen Cycle 13 1.3.2.16 Interaction of Chemical and Physical Properties of Water that Affect Aquatic Animal Health 14 1.3.3 Biotic Factors of Water 15 1.3.3.1 Biological Oxygen Demand 15 1.3.3.2 Plants and Algae 15 1.3.3.3 Algal Bloom 16 1.3.3.4 Larger Aquatic Plants 16 1.3.3.5 Pests and Predators 16 1.4 Monitoring and Regulation of Life‐Support Systems 17 1.5 Maintaining Optimal Conditions 19 1.5.1 Biofilms 21 1.5.2 Chemical Flocculation and Bioflocculation 21 1.5.2.1 Effect of Therapeutants and Disinfectants on Biofilters 22 1.5.3 Environmental Toxins and Pollutants 22 1.5.3.1 Heavy Metals 22 1.5.3.2 Insecticides 23 1.5.3.3 Herbicides 24 1.5.3.4 Harmful Algal Blooms 25 1.6 Diseases Associated with Suboptimal Water Quality 26 References 27 2 Taxonomy, Anatomy, and Physiology 30 Matt Longshaw, Acacia Alcivar-Warren, Wes Baumgartner, Trista Becker, James E. Bogan, Jr., Erdem Danyer, Sherry Kasper, Nicole Marie Nemeth, and Adolf Maas 2.1 Introduction 30 2.2 Invertebrates 31 2.2.1 Crustacea 31 2.2.1.1 Superfamily Penaeidae 31 2.3 Vertebrates 32 2.3.1 Fish and Elasmobranchs 32 2.3.1.1 Agnatha 32 2.3.1.2 Chondrichthyes 33 2.3.1.3 Osteichthyes (Teleost) 33 2.3.2 Amphibians 46 2.3.2.1 Classification of Amphibians 46 2.3.3 Reptiles 46 2.3.3.1 Classification of Reptiles 46 2.3.4 Aquatic Avian Species (Class Aves) 47 2.3.5 Aquatic Mammals (Class Mammalia) 47 2.3.5.1 Cetacea 48 2.3.5.2 Order Sirenia 48 2.3.5.3 Order Carnivora – Pinnipedia Group 48 References 49 3 Husbandry and Industries 50 Trista Becker, Olanike K. Adeyemo, Erdem Danyer, and Nicholas Saint-Erne 3.1 Introduction to chapter 50 3.2 Husbandry and Industry 50 3.2.1 Culture Environment 50 3.2.2 Types of Aquaculture Systems 51 3.2.2.1 Extensive Culture System 51 3.2.2.2 Semi‐Intensive Culture System 51 3.2.2.3 Intensive Culture System 52 3.2.3 Management of Culture Environment 55 3.2.3.1 Selection of Stocking Materials and Population Regulation 55 3.2.3.2 Proper Feeding 55 3.2.3.3 Reduction of Handling Stress 55 3.2.4 Natural History and Aquaculture 56 3.2.5 Environmental and Social Acclimation 56 3.2.6 Animal Transport 56 3.2.7 Ornamental Fish Culture 58 3.3 Nutrition 64 3.3.1 Feeds and Feeding 64 3.3.2 Feed Storage 65 3.3.3 Nutrient Analysis 66 3.3.4 Nutrient Requirements 66 3.3.5 Nutritional Deficiencies and Toxicities 66 3.3.6 Water 70 3.3.7 Therapeutic Diets 70 3.3.7.1 Principles and Techniques of Therapeutic Diet Administration During Treatment and Recovery 70 3.3.7.2 Prebiotics, Probiotics, and Other Feed Additives 71 References 71 4 Pathology of Aquatic Animal Diseases 73 Wes Baumgartner, Acacia Alcivar-Warren, Farah Gonul Aydin, Kelly Bateman, Morag Clinton, Padraig Duignan, Mansour El-Matbouli, María J. Forzán, Leo Foyle, Soliman Hatem, Gregory Lewbart, Richmond Loh, and Nicole Marie Nemeth 4.1 Introduction 73 4.2 Infectious Diseases 73 4.2.1 Mycobacteriosis 73 4.2.2 Columnaris Disease (Flavobacterium columnare) 75 4.2.3 Motile Aeromonad Septicemia 76 4.2.4 Furunculosis 77 4.2.5 Bacterial Kidney Disease 77 4.2.6 Vibrionaceae Diseases 78 4.2.7 Edwardsiellosis 79 4.2.8 Streptococcosis 80 4.2.9 Nocardiosis 81 4.2.10 Pseudomoniasis (P. fluorescens) 81 4.2.11 Viral Hemorrhagic Septicemia 81 4.2.12 Infectious Hematopoietic Necrosis 84 4.2.13 Infectious Pancreatic Necrosis 87 4.2.14 Salmonid Alphavirus 89 4.2.15 Infectious Salmon Anemia 90 4.2.16 Viral Erythrocytic Necrosis Virus 92 4.2.17 Channel Catfish Virus Disease 94 4.2.18 Spinning Tilapia Syndrome 95 4.2.19 Tilapia Lake Virus 95 4.2.20 Spring Viremia of Carp 95 4.2.21 Cyprinid Herpesvirus 1 96 4.2.22 Cyprinid Herpesvirus 2 97 4.2.23 Cyprinid Herpesvirus 3 97 4.3 Parasitic Diseases 98 4.3.1 Amoebic Gill Disease 98 4.3.2 Dinoflagellate Infestation (Amyloodinium spp., Piscinoodinium spp.) 99 4.3.3 Diplomonad Infection (Hexamita/Spironucleus) 100 4.3.4 Diplomonad Infection (Ichthyobodo) 101 4.3.5 Diplomonad Infection (Cryptobia spp., Trypanosoma spp.) 102 4.3.6 Ciliate Infestation 1: Ich and Marine Ich (Ichthyophthirius multifiliis, Cryptocaryon irritans) 103 4.3.7 Other Ciliate Infestations (Genus: Trichodina, Chilodonella, Brooklynella, Epistylis, Apiosoma, Ambiphrya, Tetrahymena, and Others) 106 4.3.8 Oomycetes/Water Molds 108 4.3.9 Myxozoan Infection (Myxobolus) 109 4.4 Diseases with Multiple Causes 112 4.4.1 Gas bubble disease 112 4.4.2 Nephrocalcinosis 112 4.4.3 Neoplasia 112 4.4.4 Cataracts 113 4.5 Differential Diagnostics of Diseases in Fish 114 4.5.1 Salmonids/Coldwater Food Fish 114 4.5.2 Warmwater Food Fish 118 4.5.3 Tropical/Koi/Goldfish 122 References 127 5 Epidemiology of Aquatic Animal Diseases 135 Leo Foyle 5.1 Introduction 135 5.2 Basic Principles of Aquatic Epidemiology 136 5.3 Disease Reporting 138 5.4 Control and Eradication of Disease 139 5.5 Vaccination 140 5.5.1 Vaccine Delivery 141 5.6 The Immune Response to Infectious Diseases in Fish 145 References 149 6 Diagnostics and Treatment of Aquatic Animal Diseases 151 Richmond Loh, James E. Bogan, Jr, Mansour El-Matbouli, Soliman Hatem, Jack Kottwitz, Nicholas Saint-Erne, Mona Saleh, and Vasile Vulpe 6.1 Introduction 151 6.2 Diagnostics 151 6.2.1 Basic Sampling 151 6.3 Diagnostic Techniques 152 6.3.1 Phlebotomy 152 6.3.2 Biopsy 152 6.4 Diagnostic Imaging 152 6.4.1 Imaging Methods Used in the Examination of Fish 153 6.4.1.1 Radiography 153 6.4.2 Ultrasound 155 6.4.3 Necropsy 158 6.5 Exploratory Surgery 158 6.5.1 Endoscopy 159 6.6 Treatment 160 6.6.1 Management Strategies 160 6.6.2 Drug Therapy: Selection and Use of Drugs 164 6.7 Anesthetics and Analgesics 164 6.7.1 Terminology 164 6.7.2 Methods of Delivering Anesthesia in Fish 165 6.7.3 Anesthetic Agents Used in Fish 165 6.7.4 Induction of Anesthesia 165 6.7.5 Recovery from Anesthesia 169 6.7.6 Decontamination 170 6.8 Vector Controls 170 6.8.1 Rehabilitation Plan 171 6.8.2 End of Life Care (Euthanasia protocols and Agents) 171 6.8.2.1 Commonly Used Euthanasia Drug Dosages 172 References 173 7 Clinical Veterinary Experience and Client Communication 175 Richmond Loh, Laura Urdes, and Vasile Vulpe 7.1 Introduction 175 7.2 Clinical Veterinary Experience 175 7.2.1 Veterinary Professionalism 176 7.2.2 How to Identify Diagnostic Laboratories 176 7.2.3 How to Develop and Maintain Appropriate Medical Records 176 7.2.4 How to Manage an Aquatic Veterinary Practice: Budgeting, Finance and Legal Aspects 176 7.2.5 Assessing Sources in the Context of Clinical Decision Making 176 7.2.6 What is Evidence? 177 7.2.7 Questions to Ask when Reading a Paper 178 7.2.8 Framework for Critical Appraisal 178 7.3 Client Communication 179 7.3.1 Work Ethics and Principles of Ethical Practice 179 7.3.2 Effective Communication 179 References 180 8 Public Health, Zoonoses, and Seafood Safety 181 Olanike K. Adeyemo and Leo Foyle 8.1 Introduction 181 8.2 Seafood Quality 181 8.2.1 Sensory Quality of Fish 181 8.2.1.1 The EU Grading Scheme for Whole Fish 182 8.2.1.2 Torry Sensory Assessment Scheme 182 8.2.1.3 Quality Index Method 183 8.2.2 Biochemical and Chemical Quality of Fish 183 8.2.2.1 Total Volatile Basic Amines 183 8.2.2.2 Ammonia 183 8.2.2.3 Trimethylamine 183 8.2.2.4 Dimethylamine 183 8.2.2.5 Biogenic Amines 184 8.2.2.6 Nucleotide Catabolites 184 8.2.2.7 Ethanol 184 8.2.2.8 Measurements of Oxidative Rancidity 184 8.2.3 Microbiological Quality of Fish 184 8.2.3.1 Parasitic Infection 185 8.2.3.2 Viral Infection 185 8.2.3.3 Natural Toxins 185 8.2.4 Fish Spoilage 185 8.3 Nature and Extent of Public Health Risks from Aquatic Animals and Seafood 185 8.3.1 Biological Hazards 186 8.3.2 Physical Hazards 186 8.3.2.1 Chemical Hazards 186 8.4 Zoonoses of Aquatic Animal Origin 187 8.4.1 Bacterial Zoonoses 187 8.4.1.1 Mycobacteria 187 8.4.1.2 Streptococcus iniae 188 8.4.1.3 Vibrio Species 189 8.4.1.4 Septicemia 189 8.4.1.5 Aeromonads 190 8.4.1.6 Enterobacteriaceae 190 8.4.2 Parasitic Zoonoses 191 8.4.3 Viral Zoonoses 192 8.4.3.1 Norwalk Virus 193 8.4.3.2 Hepatitis A 193 8.5 Intoxication 193 8.5.1 Botulism 193 8.5.2 Histamine Poisoning 194 8.5.3 Ciguatera Fish Poisoning 195 8.6 Seafood Allergies 196 8.7 The Veterinarian’s Role in Protecting Public Health and Seafood Safety 197 8.7.1 Monitoring and Control of Seafood Safety 197 8.7.1.1 Hazard Analysis Critical Control Point 198 8.7.1.2 Operational Prerequisite Programs 200 8.7.1.3 Weaknesses of HACCP 200 8.7.2 The Role of Aquatic Animals and Seafood in the Emergence, Maintenance and Transmission of Antimicrobial Resistance to Humans 201 8.7.2.1 Antimicrobial Use and Antimicrobial Resistance in Aquaculture 201 8.8 The Veterinarian’s Role in Preventing Environmental Contamination 202 8.8.1 Legal Disposal of Aquatic Animal Remains and Other Biohazards 202 8.9 Effluent Treatment Protocols 203 8.9.1 Effluent Water Treatment 203 8.9.1.1 Sedimentation 203 8.9.1.2 Mechanical filtration 204 8.9.2 Algal Ponds 204 8.9.3 Constructed Wetlands 204 References 205 9 Legislation, Regulations, and Policies 211 Myron Kebus and Chris Walster 9.1 Introduction 211 9.2 Regulations Affecting the Practice of Veterinary Medicine 212 9.3 Animal Health Regulations 212 9.4 International Animal Disease Regulations and Standards 213 9.5 Economic Impact of Disease Regulations 213 9.6 Regulated and Non-Regulated Diseases 213 9.7 Role Of Diagnostic Laboratories and Use of Assays 214 9.8 Import/Export Regulations, Health Certificates and Movement Permits 214 9.8.1 General Considerations 215 9.8.2 Role of Producer Best Management Practices 216 9.9 Veterinary Drug, Biologics, and Pesticide Regulations 217 9.10 Other Regulations 217 References 217 10 Principles of Aquatic Animal Welfare 218 Laura Urdes and Chris Walster 10.1 Introduction 218 10.2 A Brief Discussion on the Whys and Wherefores of Animal Welfare 219 10.3 Ethical Theories of Welfare 220 10.3.1 What drives welfare? 220 10.3.2 Assessment Welfare Frameworks 220 10.3.2.1 The Five Freedoms (Brambell, 1965) 220 10.3.2.2 The Five Needs (UK Animal Welfare Act 2006) 221 10.3.2.3 The Five Domains (David Mellor, New Zealand) 221 10.3.2.4 The Five Opportunities (United States) 221 10.3.3 Life Quality of Aquatic Animals Related to the Five Freedoms 221 10.3.3.1 Fear and Distress Connected to Predators 222 10.3.4 Freedom from Thirst, Hunger and Malnutrition 223 10.4 Production 224 10.4.1 Breeding 224 10.4.1.1 Eggs 224 10.4.1.2 Fry 224 10.4.1.3 Fingerlings 225 10.4.1.4 Growing On 225 10.4.2 Health Effects of Poor Nutrition 225 10.4.3 Health Effects of Good Nutrition 226 10.4.4 Immunostimulants 226 10.4.5 Freedom from Discomfort 226 10.4.6 Environment 227 10.4.7 Freedom from pain, injury and disease 227 10.4.8 Prevention of Disease, Prompt Diagnosis and Treatment of the Injured and Diseased 229 10.4.9 Pain Management in Fish 230 10.4.10 Freedom to Express Normal Behavior 232 10.4.11 Freedom from Fear and Distress 233 10.5 Conclusion 234 References 234 Index 236

Read more less

Book SynopsisSustainable Nanotechnology A robust examination of the use of nanotechnology in the manufacture of sustainable products In Sustainable Nanotechnology: Strategies, Products, and Applications, a team of distinguished researchers delivers a comprehensive and up-to-date exploration of nanotechnology applications in environmental, pharmaceutical, and engineering products in the context of global sustainability. The book offers balanced coverage of the benefits and risks of nanotechnology. Divided into three parts, the editors have included contributions from leading scholars discussing sustainability, toxicological impacts, and nanomaterial-based adsorbents. This edited volume helps readers understand how nanotechnology and nanomaterials apply in different global sustainability challenges. It also discusses models for understanding the lifecycle and risk assessments of manufactured nanomaterials. Case studies are included to explore such topics as design, rTable of ContentsList of Contributors ix Preface xv Foreword xvii 1 Nanotechnology-Based Research Priorities for Global Sustainability 1Twishi Puri, Yashwant Pathak, and Govindan Parayil 2 The Road to Sustainable Nanotechnology: Challenges, Progress, and Opportunities 17Sunita Chaudhary, Nishith Patel, and Jayvadan Patel 3 Opportunities and Challenges for Green and Eco-Friendly Nanotechnology in Twenty-First Century 31P. Sreeramana Aithal and Shubhrajyotsna Aithal 4 Improving the Sustainability of Biobased Products Using Nanotechnology 51Shirleen Miriam Marques and Lalit Kumar 5 Improving Sustainable Environment of Biopolymers Using Nanotechnology 71Manish Patel and Jayvadan Patel 6 Toward Eco-friendly Nanotechnology-based Polymers for Drug Delivery Applications 89Prachi Pandey, Jayvadan Patel, and Samarth Kumar 7 Green-Nanotechnology-Driven Drug Delivery Systems 117Manish Patel, Jayvadan Patel, and Richa Dayaramani 8 Green Synthesis of Titanium Dioxide Nanoparticles and Their Applications 135Tabassum Siddiqui, Nida J. Khan, and Tasneem Fatma 9 Sustainable and Eco-safe Nanocellulose-based Materials for Water Nano-treatment 143Carlo Punta, Andrea Fiorati, Laura Riva, Giacomo Grassi, Giulia Liberatori, and Ilaria Corsi 10 Nanotechnology Applications in Natural Nanoclays Production and Application for Better Sustainability 159Manjir Sarma Kataki, Bibhuti Bhusan Kakoti, Kangkan Deka, and Ananya Rajkumari 11 Eco-friendly, Biodegradable, and Biocompatible Electrospun Nanofiber Membranes and Applications 173Sylvia Thomas, Bianca Seufert, William Serrano-Garcia, Manopriya Devisetty, Ridita Khan, Kavyashree Puttananjegowda, and Norma Alcantar 12 Plants for Nanomaterial: Improving the Environmental Sustainability 201Debjani Nath, Baishakhi Bairagi, Pratyusha Banerjee, Anugrah Ray, and Puspendu Roy 13 Sustainable Nanobiocomposites 217Jigar Shah, Vimal Patel, Vishal Chavda, and Jayvadan Patel 14 Role of Eco-friendly Nanotechnology for Green and Clean Technology 237Bibhuti Bhusan Kakoti, Kangkan Deka, and Manjir Sarma Kataki 15 Risk Assessment and Management of Occupational Exposure to Nanopesticides in Agriculture 249Anand Patel, Bhavin Patel, Pranav Shah, and Jayvadan Patel 16 Eco-friendly Natural Polymers-based Nanotechnology 265Twishi Puri and Yashwant Pathak 17 Cobalt Oxide-engineered Nanomaterials for Environmental Remediation 277Komal Parmar and Jayvadan Patel 18 Eco-friendly Nanotechnology in Agriculture: Opportunities, Toxicological Implications, and Occupational Risks 287Layla Muraisi, Dewi M. Hariyadi, Umi Athiyah, and Yashwant Pathak 19 Novel Approaches to Design Eco-Friendly Materials Based on Natural Nanomaterials 297Twishi Puri and Yashwant Pathak 20 Biomedical Applications of Nanofibers 309Mehtap Sahiner, Saliha B. Kurt, and Nurettin Sahiner 21 Environmentally Sustainable and Safe Production of Nanomedicines 329Samson A. Adeyemi, Pradeep Kumar, Viness Pillay, and Yahya E. Choonara Index 355

Read more less

Book SynopsisMANAGING PLANT STRESS USING SALICYLIC ACID Enables readers to understand the ability of salicylic acid in reducing the effects of abiotic stresses in different crop species Salicylic acid is an important plant hormone which acts as a multifunctional molecule and regulates key physiological and biochemical processes in plants. This book highlights the tremendous potential of treating plants with salicylic acid, either prior to or during stress. It focuses on the specific challenges and opportunities related to exogenous application or priming technology, such as the mode of application, new methodologies, and the potential impacts of salicylic acid on the environment. Sample topics covered in the book include: The latest research on the ability of salicylic acid in reducing the effects of abiotic stresses in different crop speciesThe mechanism of action of salicylic acid at the biochemical and molecular levelSalicylic acid and its crosstalk with other plant hormones under stressful enviTable of Contents1. Salicylic acid: A regulator of plant growth and development. 2. Salicylic acid mediated regulation of plant biology: An omics approach. 3. Regulation of plant primary metabolism by salicylic acid under abiotic stress. 4. Regulation of plant secondary metabolism by salicylic acid under abiotic stress. 5. How does salicylic acid regulate mineral nutrition in plants under stress? An update. 6. Seed germination to fruit maturation under stressful environment: Roles of salicylic acid. 7. Role of salicylic acid on post-harvest physiology of plants. 8. Salicylic acid mediated physiological and molecular mechanisms in plants under heavy metal stress. 9. Salicylic acid mediated physiological and molecular mechanisms in plants under heat stress. 10. Salicylic acid mediated physiological and molecular mechanisms in plants under chilling stress. 11. Salicylic acid mediated physiological and molecular mechanisms in plants under salt stress. 12. Salicylic acid mediated physiological and molecular mechanisms in plants under pesticide stress. 13. Salicylic acid mediated physiological and molecular mechanisms in plants under drought stress. 14. Salicylic acid mediated physiological and molecular mechanisms in plants under high light and UV exposure. 15. ROS regulation by salicylic acid. 16. Regulation of photosynthesis by salicylic acid under optimal and suboptimal conditions. 17. Regulation of abiotic stress by salicylic acid at gene level: an update. 18. Salicylic acid and its crosstalk with other plant hormones under stressful environments. 19. Regulation of non-enzymatic antioxidants by salicylic acid under abiotic stress: biochemical and molecular aspects. 20. Response of plant proteins under abiotic stress and their regulation by salicylic acid.

Read more less

Book SynopsisAssessing the Microbiological A timely exploration of the coordinated functions of microbiological communities and the impacts of global climate change on microbial life Ecosystems function like interlocking puzzles and ultimately the health of an ecosystem depends upon the niche activities of its microbial communities. Assessing the Microbiological Health of Ecosystems summarizes our understanding of how microbial community processes are organized and the mechanisms by which activities of their constituent species are coordinated. The authors collectively present a basis for understanding what produces healthy microbial components of an ecosystem, thereby supplying a foundation for achieving one of the eventual future goals of environmental microbiology: to diagnose and correct the integrative nature of microbial activities when ecosystems fail. Assessing the Microbiological Health of Ecosystems will prove to be a valuable resource to environmental microbiologists, ecologists and intTable of ContentsList of Contributors ix Preface xi 1 Ecosystems Function Like Interlocking Puzzles: Visually Interpreting the Concept of Niche Space Plus a Brief Tour Through Genetic Hyperspace 1 Christon J. Hurst 2 Human and Climatic Drivers of Harmful Cyanobacterial Blooms (CyanoHABs) 31 Hans W. Paerl 3 Biodegradation of Environmental Pollutants by Autochthonous Microorganisms – A Precious Service for the Restoration of Impacted Ecosystems 49 Joana P. Fernandes, Diogo A. M. Alexandrino, Ana P. Mucha, C. Marisa R. Almeida, and Maria F. Carvalho 4 Early Biofilm Accumulation in Freshwater Environments on Different Types of Plastic 83 Rene Hoover, Carlos De León, and Mark A. Gallo 5 Identification of Sentinel Microbial Communities in Cold Environments 107 Eva García- López, Paula Alcázar, Marina Alcázar, and Cristina Cid 6 Analyzing Microbial Core Communities, Rare Species, and Interspecies Interactions Can Help Identify Core Microbial Functions in Anaerobic Degradation 127 Tong Liu, Xavier Goux, Magdalena Calusinska, and Maria Westerholm Copyrighted Material 7 Role of Microbial Communities in Methane and Nitrous Oxide Fluxes and the Impact of Soil Management 159 Alessandra Lagomarsino and Roberta Pastorelli 8 Impact of Microbial Symbionts on Fungus- Farming Termites and Their Derived Ecosystem Functions 185 Robert Murphy, Veronica M. Sinotte, Suzanne Schmidt, Guangshuo Li, Justinn Renelies- Hamilton, N’Golo A. Koné, and Michael Poulsen 9 The Ecosystem Role of Viruses Affecting Eukaryotes 211 Christon J. Hurst Index 269

Read more less

Book SynopsisDemystify complicated construction claims with this indispensable guide Given how common complex claims have become in the modern built environment, Fundamentals of Construction Claims: A 9-Step Guide for General Contractors, Subcontractors, Architects and Engineers is an absolutely critical addition to the library of any construction professional. Written by William J. McConnell, PE, JD, MSCE, CDT, a celebrated lawyer, author, engineer, and expert witness, Fundamentals of Construction Claims sets out clear and concrete strategies for developing a construction claim from beginning to end. The author''s straightforward 9-Step method helps readers avoid costly dispute resolution fees by: Explaining entitlement requirements for various types of claims, including differing site conditions, added scope, and weather delays Offering procedures for calculating delay impacts through forensic scheduling analysis Defining, in deTable of ContentsAcknowledgments 1 Introduction 2 Step 1: Review the Dispute Resolution Procedures 3 Step 2: Define the Type of Dispute 4 Step 3: Fulfill Pre-Claim Requirements and Notice Requirements 5 Step 4: Establish Entitlement 6 Step 5: Calculate Delay 7 Step 6: Calculate Damages 8 Step 7: Formatting and Packaging the Claim 9 Step 8: Non-Binding Dispute Resolution 10 Step 9: Binding Dispute Resolution 11 Termination Claims 12 Non-Contract Claims and Defenses 13 Allocation of Damages 14 Conclusion Index

Read more less

Book SynopsisThermal Design Discover a new window to thermal engineering and thermodynamics through the study of thermal design Thermal engineering is a specialized sub-discipline of mechanical engineering that focuses on the movement and transfer of heat energy between two mediums or altered into other forms of energy. Thermal engineers must have a strong knowledge of thermodynamics and the processes that convert generated energy from thermal sources into chemical, mechanical, or electrical energy as such, thermal engineers can be employed in many industries, particularly in automotive manufacturing, commercial construction, and the HVAC industry. As part of their job, thermal engineers often have to improve a current system to make it more efficient, and so must be aware of a wide array of variables and familiar with a broad sweep of systems to ensure the work they do is economically viable. In this significantly updated new edition, Thermal Design details the physiTable of ContentsPreface to the Second Edition xix Preface to the First Edition xxi About the Companion Website xxv 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Humans and Energy 1 1.3 Thermodynamics 2 1.3.1 Energy, Heat, and Work 2 1.3.2 The First Law of Thermodynamics 2 1.3.3 Heat Engines, Refrigerators, and Heat Pumps 5 1.3.4 The Second Law of Thermodynamics 7 1.3.5 Carnot Cycle 7 1.4 Heat Transfer 11 1.4.1 Introduction 11 1.4.2 Conduction 12 1.4.3 Convection 15 1.4.3.1 Parallel Flow on an Isothermal Plate 16 1.4.3.2 A Cylinder in Cross Flow 18 1.4.3.3 Flow in Ducts 20 1.4.3.4 Free Convection 25 1.4.4 Radiation 29 1.4.4.1 Thermal Radiation 29 1.4.4.2 View Factor 34 1.4.4.3 Radiation Exchange Between Diffuse-Gray Surfaces 34 Problems 38 References 42 2 Heat Sinks 45 2.1 Longitudinal Fin of Rectangular Profile 45 2.2 Heat Transfer from Fin 47 2.3 Fin Effectiveness 48 2.4 Fin Efficiency 48 2.5 Corrected Profile Length 49 2.6 Optimizations 49 2.6.1 Constant Profile Area A p 49 2.6.2 Constant Heat Transfer from a Fin 52 2.6.3 Constant Fin Volume or Mass 53 2.6.4 Optimum Dimensions of Rectangular Fin 55 2.6.5 Radial Fins 60 2.6.6 Optimization of Radial Fins 63 2.7 Plate Fin Heat Sinks 68 2.7.1 Free (Natural) Convection Cooling 68 2.7.1.1 Small Spacing Channel 68 2.7.1.2 Large Spacing Channel 71 2.7.1.3 Optimum Fin Spacing 71 2.7.2 Forced Convection Cooling 72 2.7.2.1 Small Spacing Channel 73 2.7.2.2 Large Spacing Channel 74 2.8 Multiple Fin Array Ii 75 2.8.1 Natural (Free) Convection Cooling 77 2.9 Thermal Resistance and Overall Surface Efficiency 78 2.10 Fin Design with Thermal Radiation 97 2.10.1 Single Longitudinal Fin with Radiation 97 Problems 109 Computer Assignments 116 Project 116 References 117 3 Heat Pipes 119 3.1 Operation of Heat Pipe 119 3.2 Surface Tension 120 3.3 Heat Transfer Limitations 122 3.3.1 Capillary Limitation 123 3.3.1.1 Maximum Capillary Pressure Difference 123 3.3.1.2 Vapor Pressure Drop 125 3.3.1.3 Liquid Pressure Drop 127 3.3.1.4 Normal Hydrostatic Pressure Drop 127 3.3.1.5 Axial Hydrostatic Pressure Drop 128 3.3.2 Approximation for Capillary Pressure Difference 128 3.3.3 Sonic Limitation 128 3.3.4 Entrainment Limitation 129 3.3.5 Boiling Limitation 129 3.3.6 Viscous Limitation 130 3.3.6.1 Summary of Heat Transport Limits 134 3.3.6.2 Effective Thermal Conductivity 135 3.4 Heat Pipe Thermal Resistance 136 3.4.1 Contact Resistance 138 3.5 Variable Conductance Heat Pipes (VCHP) 141 3.5.1 Gas-Loaded Heat Pipes 141 3.5.2 Clayepyron–Clausius Equation 143 3.5.3 Applications 144 3.6 Loop Heat Pipes 146 3.7 Micro Heat Pipes 148 3.7.1 Steady-State Models 148 3.7.1.1 Conventional Model 148 3.7.1.2 Cotter’s Model 150 3.8 Working Fluid 154 3.8.1 Figure of Merit 154 3.8.2 Compatibility 156 3.9 Wick Structures 157 3.10 Design Example 158 3.10.1 Selection of Material and Working Fluid 158 3.10.2 Working Fluid Properties 159 3.10.2.1 Estimation of Vapor Space Radius 159 3.10.3 Estimation of Operating Limits 159 3.10.3.1 Capillary Limits 159 3.10.3.2 Sonic Limits 160 3.10.3.3 Entrainment Limits 160 3.10.3.4 Boiling Limits 161 3.10.4 Wall Thickness 162 3.10.5 Wick Selection 163 3.10.6 Maximum Arterial Depth 164 3.10.7 Design of Arterial Wick 165 3.10.8 Capillary Limitation 166 3.10.8.1 Liquid Pressure Drop in the Arteries 167 3.10.8.2 Liquid Pressure Drop in the Circumferential Wick 167 3.10.8.3 Vapor Pressure Drop in the Vapor Space 168 3.10.9 Performance Map 169 3.10.10 Check the Temperature Drop 170 Problems 170 Design Problem 173 References 174 4 Compact Heat Exchangers 177 4.1 Introduction 177 4.2 Fundamentals of Heat Exchangers 180 4.2.1 Counterflow and Parallel Flows 180 4.2.2 Overall Heat Transfer Coefficient 182 4.2.3 Log Mean Temperature Difference (LMTD) 184 4.2.4 Flow Properties 186 4.2.5 Nusselt Numbers 186 4.2.6 Effectiveness–NTU (ε–NTU) Method 189 4.2.6.1 Parallel Flow 191 4.2.6.2 Counterflow 192 4.2.6.3 Crossflow 192 4.2.7 Heat Exchanger Pressure Drop 199 4.2.8 Fouling Resistances (Fouling Factors) 201 4.2.9 Overall Surface (Fin) Efficiency 202 4.2.10 Reasonable Velocities of Various Fluids in Pipe Flow 203 4.3 Double-Pipe Heat Exchangers 204 4.4 Shell-and-Tube Heat Exchangers 213 4.4.1 Baffles 214 4.4.2 Multiple Passes 214 4.4.3 Dimensions of Shell-and-Tube Heat Exchanger 215 4.4.4 Shell-Side Tube Layout 215 4.5 Plate Heat Exchangers (PHEs) 224 4.5.1 Flow Pass Arrangements 224 4.5.2 Geometric Properties 226 4.5.3 Friction Factor 231 4.5.4 Nusselt Number 231 4.5.5 Pressure Drops 231 4.6 Pressure Drops in Compact Heat Exchangers 245 4.6.1 Fundamentals of Core Pressure Drop 246 4.6.2 Core Entrance and Exit Pressure Drops 248 4.6.3 Contraction and Expansion Loss Coefficients 249 4.6.3.1 Circular-Tube Core 250 4.6.3.2 Square-Tube Core 251 4.6.3.3 Flat-Tube Core 252 4.6.3.4 Triangular-Tube Core 252 4.7 Finned-Tube Heat Exchangers 257 4.7.1 Geometrical Characteristics 258 4.7.2 Flow Properties 259 4.7.3 Thermal Properties 260 4.7.4 Correlations for Circular Finned-Tube Geometry 260 4.7.5 Pressure Drop 261 4.7.6 Correlations for Louvered Plate-Fin Flat-Tube Geometry 263 4.8 Plate-Fin Heat Exchangers 275 4.8.1 Geometric Characteristics 275 4.8.2 Correlations for Offset Strip Fin (OSF) Geometry 277 4.9 Louver-Fin-Type Flat-Tube Plate-Fin Heat Exchangers 297 4.9.1 Geometric Characteristics 298 4.9.2 Correlations for Louver Fin Geometry 300 4.10 Plate-Finned Heat Pipe Heat Exchanger 314 4.10.1 Geometric Characteristics 314 4.10.2 Correlations for Plate-Finned Circular Tube Heat Exchanger 315 4.10.3 Fin Efficiency 317 4.10.4 Heat Pipes 318 4.10.5 Analytical Model for Plate-Finned Heat Pipe Heat Exchanger 319 Problems 320 References 332 5 Thermoelectric Design 335 5.1 Introduction 335 5.1.1 Thermoelectric Effect 337 5.1.2 Seebeck Effect 337 5.1.3 Peltier Effect 338 5.1.4 Thomson Effect 338 5.1.5 Thomson (or Kelvin) Relationships 339 5.1.6 The Figure of Merit 339 5.1.7 New Generation Thermoelectrics 339 5.2 Thermoelectric Generators 341 5.2.1 Ideal Equations 341 5.2.2 Performance Parameters of a Thermoelectric Module 344 5.2.3 Maximum Parameters for a Thermoelectric Module 345 5.2.4 Normalized Parameters 345 5.2.5 Effective Material Properties 351 5.2.6 Comparison of Calculations with a Commercial Product 352 5.2.7 Figure of Merit and Optimum Geometry 353 5.3 Thermoelectric Coolers and Heat Pumps 354 5.3.1 Ideal Equations 355 5.3.2 Maximum Parameters 358 5.3.3 Normalized Parameters for Thermoelectric Coolers 359 5.3.4 Normalized Parameters for Thermoelectric Heat Pumps 363 5.3.5 Effective Material Properties 371 5.3.5.1 Comparison of Calculations with a Commercial Product 373 5.4 Optimal Design 373 5.4.1 Introduction 373 5.4.2 Optimal Design for Thermoelectric Generators 374 5.4.3 Optimal Design of Thermoelectric Coolers and Heat Pumps 383 5.4.3.1 Thermoelectric Heat Pumps 387 5.4.3.2 Heat Sinks Without Thermoelectric Cooler Module 388 5.5 Thomson Effect, Exact Solution, and Compatibility Factor 398 5.5.1 Thermodynamics of Thomson Effect 398 5.5.1.1 Seebeck Effect 398 5.5.1.2 Peltier Effect 399 5.5.1.3 Thomson Effect 399 5.5.1.4 Thomson (or Kelvin) Relationships 400 5.5.2 Exact Solutions 402 5.5.2.1 Equations for the Exact Solutions and the Ideal Equation 402 5.5.2.2 Thermoelectric Generator 404 5.5.2.3 Thermoelectric Coolers 405 5.5.3 Compatibility Factor 407 5.5.3.1 Reduced Current Density 407 5.5.3.2 Heat Balance Equation 408 5.5.3.3 Numerical Solution 408 5.5.3.4 Infinitesimal Efficiency 409 5.5.3.5 Reduced Efficiency 409 5.5.3.6 Reduced Efficiency 409 5.5.3.7 Compatibility Factor 409 5.5.3.8 Segmented Thermoelements 410 5.5.3.9 Thermoelectric Potential 410 5.5.4 Thomson Effects 413 5.5.4.1 Formulation of Basic Equations 413 5.5.4.2 Numeric Solutions of Thomson Effect 416 5.5.4.3 Comparison Between Thomson Effect and Ideal Equation 418 5.6 Thermal and Electrical Contact Resistances for Micro and Macro Devices 421 5.6.1 Modeling and Validation 421 5.6.1.1 Cancelation of Spreading Resistance with Thermal Contact Resistance 422 5.6.1.2 Thermoelectric Coolers 423 5.6.1.3 Thermoelectric Generators 423 5.6.1.4 Validation of Model 423 5.6.2 Micro and Macro Thermoelectric Coolers 425 5.6.2.1 Effect of Leg Length 426 5.6.2.2 Effect of Material on Ceramic Plate 426 5.6.3 Micro and Macro Thermoelectric Generators 427 5.6.3.1 Model and Verification for Macro TE Generators 427 5.6.3.2 Effect of Load Resistance 428 5.6.3.3 Effect of Leg Length and Ceramic Material 429 5.7 Modeling of Thermoelectric Generators and Coolers with Heat Sinks 430 5.7.1 Modeling of Thermoelectric Generators with Heat Sinks 430 5.7.1.1 Modeling 430 5.7.1.2 Heat Sink Area and Cross Flow Area for Heat Sinks 433 5.7.1.3 Mass Flow Rates 433 5.7.1.4 Convection Heat Transfer Coefficients 434 5.7.1.5 Single-Fin Efficiencies 434 5.7.1.6 Overall Fin Efficiencies 435 5.7.1.7 Thermal Resistances of Heat Sink and Aluminum Block 435 5.7.1.8 Effective Material Properties 436 5.7.1.9 Comparison of Model and Measurements 437 5.7.1.10 Optimal Design of Heat Sink 437 5.7.1.11 Optimal Design of Thermoelectric Module 438 5.7.2 Plate-Fin Heat Sinks 438 5.7.2.1 Nusselt Number for Air 439 5.7.2.2 Turbulent Flow for Gases and Liquids 440 5.7.2.3 Optimal Design of Heat Sink 441 5.7.2.4 Single-Fin Efficiency 441 5.7.2.5 Overall Fin Efficiency 442 5.7.3 Modeling of Thermoelectric Coolers with Heat Sinks 442 5.7.3.1 Modeling 442 5.7.3.2 Heat Sink Area and Cross Flow Area for Heat Sinks 445 5.7.3.3 Mass Flow Rates 445 5.7.3.4 Convection Heat Transfer Coefficients 446 5.7.3.5 Single-Fin Efficiencies 446 5.7.3.6 Overall Fin Efficiencies 446 5.7.3.7 Thermal Resistances of Heat Sink and Aluminum Block 447 5.7.3.8 Effective Material Properties 447 5.7.3.9 Comparison of Model and Measurements 448 5.7.3.10 Conclusions 449 5.8 Applications 449 5.8.1 Exhaust Waste Heat Recovery 449 5.8.1.1 Recent Studies 449 5.8.1.2 Modeling of Module Tests 452 5.8.1.3 Modeling of TEG 455 5.8.1.4 New Design of TEG 462 5.8.2 Solar Thermoelectric Generators (STEGs) 466 5.8.2.1 Recent Studies 466 5.8.2.2 Modeling of a STEG 467 5.8.2.3 Optimal Design of STEG (Dimensional Analysis) 473 5.8.2.4 New Design of STEG 475 5.8.3 Automotive Thermoelectric Air Conditioner (TEAC) 479 5.8.3.1 Recent Studies 479 5.8.3.2 Modeling of Air-to-Air TEAC 480 5.8.3.3 Optimal Design of TEAC 487 5.8.3.4 New Design of TEAC 490 Problems 493 Computer Assignment 496 Projects 504 Computer Assignments 504 Computer Projects 504 References 505 6 Thermoelectric Materials 509 6.1 Crystal Structure 509 6.1.1 Atomic Mass 509 6.1.1.1 Avogadro’s Number 509 6.1.2 Unit Cells of a Crystal 510 6.1.2.1 Bravais Lattices 511 6.1.3 Crystal Planes 515 6.2 Physics of Electrons 517 6.2.1 Quantum Mechanics 517 6.2.1.1 Electromagnetic Wave 517 6.2.1.2 Atomic Structure 519 6.2.1.3 Bohr’s Model 520 6.2.1.4 Line Spectra 521 6.2.1.5 De Broglie Wave 522 6.2.1.6 Heisenberg Uncertainty Principle 523 6.2.1.7 Schrödinger Equation 524 6.2.1.8 A Particle in a One-Dimensional Box 524 6.2.1.9 Quantum Numbers 527 6.2.1.10 Electron Configurations 528 6.2.2 Band Theory and Doping 530 6.2.2.1 Covalent Bonding 530 6.2.2.2 Energy Band 531 6.2.2.3 Pseudo-Potential Well 532 6.2.2.4 Doping, Donors, and Acceptors 532 6.3 Density of States, Fermi Energy, and Energy Bands 534 6.3.1 Current and Energy Transport 534 6.3.2 Electron Density of States 535 6.3.2.1 Dispersion Relation 535 6.3.2.2 Effective Mass 535 6.3.2.3 Density of States 536 6.3.3 Fermi–Dirac Distribution 538 6.3.4 Electron Concentration 538 6.3.5 Fermi Energy in Metals 539 6.3.6 Fermi Energy in Semiconductors 541 6.3.7 Energy Bands 543 6.3.7.1 Multiple Bands 544 6.3.7.2 Direct and Indirect Semiconductors 545 6.3.7.3 Periodic Potential (Kronig–Penney Model) 545 6.4 Thermoelectric Transport Properties for Electrons 549 6.4.1 Boltzmann Transport Equation 549 6.4.2 Simple Model of Metals 552 6.4.2.1 Electric Current Density 552 6.4.2.2 Electrical Conductivity 552 6.4.2.3 Seebeck Coefficient 553 6.4.2.4 Electronic Thermal Conductivity 555 6.4.3 Power-Law Model for Metals and Semiconductors 556 6.4.3.1 Equipartition Principle 556 6.4.3.2 Parabolic Single-Band Model 557 6.4.4 Electron Relaxation Time 563 6.4.4.1 Acoustic–Phonon Scattering 563 6.4.4.2 Polar Optical Phonon Scattering 564 6.4.4.3 Ionized Impurity Scattering 564 6.4.4.4 Total Electron Relaxation Time 565 6.4.5 Multiband Effects 566 6.4.6 Nonparabolicity 567 6.4.6.1 Nonparabolic Density of States 567 6.5 Phonons 569 6.5.1 Crystal Vibration 569 6.5.1.1 One Atom in a Primitive Cell 569 6.5.1.2 Two Atoms in a Unit Cell 571 6.5.2 Specific Heat 573 6.5.2.1 Internal Energy 573 6.5.2.2 Debye Model 575 6.5.3 Lattice Thermal Conductivity 580 6.5.3.1 Klemens–Callaway Model 580 6.5.3.2 Umklapp Processes 582 6.5.3.3 Callaway Model 583 6.5.3.4 Phonon Relaxation Times 584 6.6 Low-Dimensional Nanostructures 587 6.6.1 Low-Dimensional Systems 588 6.6.1.1 Quantum Well (2D) 588 6.6.1.2 Quantum Wires (1D) 592 6.6.1.3 Quantum Dots (0D) 595 6.6.1.4 Thermoelectric Transport Properties of Quantum Wells 595 6.6.1.5 Thermoelectric Transport Properties of Quantum Wires 597 6.6.1.6 Proof-of-Principle Studies 598 6.6.1.7 Size Effects of Quantum Well on Lattice Thermal Conductivity 600 6.7 Generic Model of Bulk Silicon and Nanowires 602 6.7.1 Electron Density of States for Bulk and Nanowires 603 6.7.1.1 Density of States 603 6.7.2 Carrier Concentrations for Two-Band Model 603 6.7.2.1 Bulk 603 6.7.2.2 Nanowires 604 6.7.2.3 Bipolar Effect and Fermi Energy 604 6.7.3 Electron Transport Properties for Bulk and Nanowires 604 6.7.3.1 Electrical Conductivity 604 6.7.3.2 Seebeck Coefficient 605 6.7.3.3 Electronic Thermal Conductivity 605 6.7.4 Electron Scattering Mechanisms 605 6.7.4.1 Acoustic-Phonon Scattering 605 6.7.4.2 Ionized Impurity Scattering 606 6.7.4.3 Screening Effect 606 6.7.4.4 Polar Optical Phonon Scattering 606 6.7.4.5 Total Electron Relaxation Time 607 6.7.5 Lattice Thermal Conductivity 607 6.7.6 Phonon Relaxation Time 607 6.7.7 Input Data for Bulk Si and Nanowires 608 6.7.8 Bulk Si 608 6.7.8.1 Fermi Energy 609 6.7.8.2 Electron Mobility 610 6.7.8.3 Thermoelectric Transport Properties 610 6.7.8.4 Dimensionless Figure of Merit 610 6.7.9 Si Nanowires 611 6.7.9.1 Fermi Energy and Carrier Concentration 611 6.7.9.2 Electron Mobility 612 6.7.9.3 Thermoelectric Transport Properties for Si Nanowires 612 6.7.9.4 Dimensionless Figure of Merit 614 6.7.9.5 Effect of Size for Nanowires 614 6.7.9.6 Critical Nanowire Diameter 615 6.7.9.7 Phonon Properties for Si Nanowires 616 6.8 Theoretical Model of Thermoelectric Transport Properties 617 6.8.1 Introduction 618 6.8.2 Theoretical Equations 619 6.8.2.1 Carrier Transport Properties 619 6.8.2.2 Scattering Mechanisms for Electron Relaxation Times 621 6.8.2.3 Lattice Thermal Conductivity 624 6.8.2.4 Phonon Relaxation Times 625 6.8.2.5 Phonon Density of States and Specific Heat 626 6.8.2.6 Dimensionless Figure of Merit 627 6.8.3 Results and Discussion 627 6.8.3.1 Electron or Hole Scattering Mechanisms 627 6.8.4 Summary 647 Problems 649 References 657 7 Solar Cells 667 7.1 Introduction 667 7.1.1 Operation of Solar Cells 669 7.1.2 Solar Cells and Technology 671 7.1.3 Solar Irradiance 672 7.1.4 Air Mass 672 7.1.5 Nature of Light 674 7.2 Quantum Mechanics 675 7.2.1 Atomic Structure 677 7.2.2 Bohr’s Model 677 7.2.3 Line Spectra 679 7.2.4 De Broglie Wave 680 7.2.5 Heisenberg Uncertainty Principle 681 7.2.6 Schrödinger Equation 682 7.2.7 A Free Particle in a 1D Box 682 7.2.8 Quantum Numbers 685 7.2.9 Electron Configurations 686 7.2.10 Van der Waals Forces 688 7.2.11 Covalent Bonding 689 7.2.12 Energy Band 690 7.2.13 Pseudo-Potential Well 691 7.3 Density of States 691 7.3.1 Number of States 691 7.3.2 Effective Mass 692 7.4 Equilibrium Intrinsic Carrier Concentration 693 7.4.1 Fermi Function 693 7.4.2 Nondegenerate Semiconductor 693 7.4.3 Equilibrium Electron and Hole Concentrations 694 7.4.4 Intrinsic Semiconductors 696 7.4.5 Intrinsic Carrier Concentration, N I 696 7.4.6 Intrinsic Fermi Energy 698 7.4.7 Alternative Expression for n 0 and p 0 698 7.5 Extrinsic Semiconductors in Thermal Equilibrium 699 7.5.1 Doping, Donors, and Acceptors 699 7.5.2 Extrinsic Carrier Concentration in Equilibrium 700 7.5.3 Built-in Voltage 702 7.5.4 Principle of Detailed Balance 703 7.5.5 Majority and Minority Carriers in Equilibrium 703 7.6 Generation and Recombination 704 7.6.1 Direct and Indirect Band Gap Semiconductors 704 7.6.2 Absorption Coefficient 705 7.6.3 Photogeneration 707 7.7 Recombination 707 7.7.1 Recombination Mechanisms 707 7.7.2 Band Energy Diagram Under Nonequilibrium Conditions 709 7.7.2.1 Back Surface Field (BSF) 710 7.7.3 Low-Level Injection 710 7.7.3.1 Low-Level Injection 711 7.7.4 Band-to-Band Recombination 712 7.7.5 Trap-Assisted (SRH) Recombination 713 7.7.6 Simplified Expression of the SRH Recombination Rate 714 7.7.7 Auger Recombination 715 7.7.8 Total Recombination Rate 716 7.8 Carrier Transport 716 7.8.1 Drift 717 7.8.2 Carrier Mobility 717 7.8.3 Diffusion 718 7.8.4 Total Current Densities 719 7.8.5 Einstein Relationship 719 7.8.6 Semiconductor Equations 720 7.8.7 Minority-Carrier Diffusion Equations 720 7.8.8 p–n Junction 721 7.8.9 Calculation of Depletion Width 723 7.8.10 Energy Band Diagram with a Reference Point 725 7.8.11 Quasi-Fermi Energy Levels 725 7.9 Minority Carrier Transport 726 7.9.1 Boundary Conditions 726 7.9.2 Minority Carrier Lifetimes 728 7.9.3 Minority Carrier Diffusion Lengths 728 7.9.4 Minority Carrier Diffusion Equation for Holes 729 7.9.5 Minority Carrier Diffusion Equation for Electrons 732 7.10 Characteristics of Solar Cells 735 7.10.1 Current Density 735 7.10.2 Current–Voltage Characteristics 740 7.10.3 Figures of Merit 742 7.10.4 Effect of Minority Electron Lifetime on Efficiency 744 7.10.5 Effect of Minority Hole Lifetime on Efficiency 746 7.10.6 Effect of Back Surface Recombination Velocity on Efficiency 746 7.10.7 Effect of Base Width on Efficiency 747 7.10.8 Effect of Emitter Width W N on Efficiency 748 7.10.9 Effect of Acceptor Concentration on Efficiency 750 7.10.10 Effect of Donor Concentration on Efficiency 752 7.10.11 Band Gap Energy with Temperature 752 7.10.12 Effect of Temperature on Efficiency 753 7.11 Additional Topics 754 7.11.1 Parasitic Resistance Effects (Ohmic Losses) 754 7.11.2 Quantum Efficiency 757 7.11.3 Ideal Solar Cell Efficiency 758 7.12 Modeling 763 7.12.1 Modeling for a Silicon Solar Cell 763 7.12.2 Comparison of the Solar Cell Model with a Commercial Product 776 7.13 Design of a Solar Cell 779 7.13.1 Solar Cell Geometry with Surface Recombination Velocities 779 7.13.2 Donor and Acceptor Concentrations 780 7.13.3 Minority Carrier Diffusion Lifetimes 780 7.13.4 Grid Spacing 781 7.13.5 Antireflection, Light Trapping, and Passivation 784 Problems 785 References 789 Appendix A Thermophysical Properties 791 References 834 Appendix B 837 B.1 Optimal Dimensionless Parameters for TEGs with ZT ∞2 = 1 (See Figure B.1 at the end of tables) 837 B.2 Optimal Dimensionless Parameters for TECS With ZT ∞2 = 1 (See Figure B.2 at the end of tables) 837 Appendix C Pipe Dimensions 847 Appendix D Periodic Table 849 Appendix E Thermoelectric Properties 857 E.1 Bismuth Telluride P-Type 858 E.2 Bismuth Telluride N-Type 859 E.3 Lead Telluride P-Type 859 E.4 Silicon Germanium N-Type 860 E.5 Skutterudites N-Type 861 E.6 Zintl Compound N-Type 861 References 862 Appendix F Fermi Integral 863 Appendix G Hall Factor 867 References 869 Appendix H Curve Fitting of Working Fluids 871 H.1 Curve Fit for Working Fluids Chosen 871 H.2 Curve Fitting for Working Fluid Properties Chosen 872 H.2.1 MathCad Format 872 Appendix L Tutorial for MathCAD 875 L.1 Tutorial Problem for MathCAD 875 Appendix M Conversion Factors 879 Index 881

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of Contents1 Introduction To Microelectronics 1 1.1 Electronics Versus Microelectronics 1 1.2 Examples of Electronic Systems 2 1.2.1 Cellular Telephone 2 1.2.2 Digital Camera 5 1.2.3 Analog Versus Digital 7 1.3 Basic Concepts 8 1.3.1 Analog and Digital Signals 8 1.3.2 Analog Circuits 10 1.3.3 Digital Circuits 11 1.3.4 Basic Circuit Theorems 12 1.4 Chapter Summary 20 2 Basic Physics Of Semiconductors 21 2.1 Semiconductor Materials and Their Properties 22 2.1.1 Charge Carriers in Solids 22 2.1.2 Modification of Carrier Densities 25 2.1.3 Transport of Carriers 28 2.2 pn Junction 35 2.2.1 pn Junction in Equilibrium 36 2.2.2 pn Junction Under Reverse Bias 41 2.2.3 pn Junction Under Forward Bias 46 2.2.4 I/V Characteristics 49 2.3 Reverse Breakdown 54 2.3.1 Zener Breakdown 55 2.3.2 Avalanche Breakdown 55 2.4 Chapter Summary 56 Problems 57 SPICE Problems 60 3 Diode Models and Circuits 61 3.1 Ideal Diode 62 3.1.1 Initial Thoughts 62 3.1.2 Ideal Diode 63 3.1.3 Application Examples 67 3.2 pn Junction as a Diode 72 3.3 Additional Examples 74 3.4 Large-Signal and Small-Signal Operation 80 3.5 Applications of Diodes 89 3.5.1 Half-Wave and Full-Wave Rectifiers 89 3.5.2 Voltage Regulation 100 3.5.3 Limiting Circuits 103 3.5.4 Voltage Doublers 106 3.5.5 Diodes as Level Shifters and Switches 112 3.6 Chapter Summary 114 Problems 115 SPICE Problems 122 4 Physics of Bipolar Transistors 124 4.1 General Considerations 125 4.2 Structure of Bipolar Transistor 126 4.3 Operation of Bipolar Transistor in Active Mode 127 4.3.1 Collector Current 129 4.3.2 Base and Emitter Currents 133 4.4 Bipolar Transistor Models and Characteristics 135 4.4.1 Large-Signal Model 135 4.4.2 I/V Characteristics 137 4.4.3 Concept of Transconductance 139 4.4.4 Small-Signal Model 141 4.4.5 Early Effect 145 4.5 Operation of Bipolar Transistor in Saturation Mode 152 4.6 The PNP Transistor 155 4.6.1 Structure and Operation 155 4.6.2 Large-Signal Model 156 4.6.3 Small-Signal Model 159 4.7 Chapter Summary 162 Problems 163 SPICE Problems 170 5 Bipolar Amplifiers 172 5.1 General Considerations 173 5.1.1 Input and Output Impedances 173 5.1.2 Biasing 178 5.1.3 DC and Small-Signal Analysis 178 5.2 Operating Point Analysis and Design 180 5.2.1 Simple Biasing 181 5.2.2 Resistive Divider Biasing 183 5.2.3 Biasing with Emitter Degeneration 186 5.2.4 Self-Biased Stage 190 5.2.5 Biasing of PNP Transistors 192 5.3 Bipolar Amplifier Topologies 196 5.3.1 Common-Emitter Topology 197 5.3.2 Common-Base Topology 224 5.3.3 Emitter Follower 238 5.4 Summary and Additional Examples 246 5.5 Chapter Summary 253 Problems 253 SPICE Problems 267 6 Physics of Mos Transistors 269 6.1 Structure of MOSFET 270 6.2 Operation of MOSFET 272 6.2.1 Qualitative Analysis 272 6.2.2 Derivation of I-V Characteristics 279 6.2.3 Channel-Length Modulation 288 6.2.4 MOS Transconductance 290 6.2.5 Velocity Saturation 292 6.2.6 Other Second-Order Effects 292 6.3 MOS Device Models 293 6.3.1 Large-Signal Model 293 6.3.2 Small-Signal Model 295 6.4 PMOS Transistor 296 6.5 CMOS Technology 299 6.6 Comparison of Bipolar and MOS Devices 300 6.7 Chapter Summary 300 Problems 301 SPICE Problems 308 7 Cmos Amplifiers 309 7.1 General Considerations 310 7.1.1 MOS Amplifier Topologies 310 7.1.2 Biasing 310 7.1.3 Realization of Current Sources 313 7.2 Common-Source Stage 315 7.2.1 CS Core 315 7.2.2 CS Stage with Current-Source Load 318 7.2.3 CS Stage with Diode- Connected Load 319 7.2.4 CS Stage with Degeneration 320 7.2.5 CS Core with Biasing 323 7.3 Common-Gate Stage 325 7.3.1 CG Stage with Biasing 329 7.4 Source Follower 331 7.4.1 Source Follower Core 331 7.4.2 Source Follower with Biasing 333 7.5 Summary and Additional Examples 336 7.6 Chapter Summary 340 Problems 341 SPICE Problems 353 8 Operational Amplifier As a Black Box 355 8.1 General Considerations 356 8.2 Op-Amp-Based Circuits 358 8.2.1 Noninverting Amplifier 358 8.2.2 Inverting Amplifier 360 8.2.3 Integrator and Differentiator 363 8.2.4 Voltage Adder 371 8.3 Nonlinear Functions 373 8.3.1 Precision Rectifier 373 8.3.2 Logarithmic Amplifier 374 8.3.3 Square-Root Amplifier 375 8.4 Op Amp Nonidealities 376 8.4.1 DC Offsets 376 8.4.2 Input Bias Current 379 8.4.3 Speed Limitations 382 8.4.4 Finite Input and Output Impedances 387 8.5 Design Examples 388 8.6 Chapter Summary 390 Problems 391 SPICE Problems 397 9 Cascode Stages and Current Mirrors 398 9.1 Cascode Stage 399 9.1.1 Cascode as a Current Source 399 9.1.2 Cascode as an Amplifier 405 9.2 Current Mirrors 414 9.2.1 Initial Thoughts 414 9.2.2 Bipolar Current Mirror 416 9.2.3 MOS Current Mirror 425 9.3 Chapter Summary 429 Problems 430 SPICE Problems 441 10 Differential Amplifiers 443 10.1 General Considerations 444 10.1.1 Initial Thoughts 444 10.1.2 Differential Signals 446 10.1.3 Differential Pair 449 10.2 Bipolar Differential Pair 452 10.2.1 Qualitative Analysis 452 10.2.2 Large-Signal Analysis 458 10.2.3 Small-Signal Analysis 463 10.3 MOS Differential Pair 469 10.3.1 Qualitative Analysis 469 10.3.2 Large-Signal Analysis 473 10.3.3 Small-Signal Analysis 478 10.4 Cascode Differential Amplifiers 481 10.5 Common-Mode Rejection 485 10.6 Differential Pair with Active Load 489 10.6.1 Qualitative Analysis 490 10.6.2 Quantitative Analysis 492 10.7 Chapter Summary 496 Problems 497 SPICE Problems 509 11 Frequency Response 511 11.1 Fundamental Concepts 512 11.1.1 General Considerations 512 11.1.2 Relationship Between Transfer Function and Frequency Response 515 11.1.3 Bode’s Rules 518 11.1.4 Association of Poles with Nodes 519 11.1.5 Miller’s Theorem 521 11.1.6 General Frequency Response 525 11.2 High-Frequency Models of Transistors 529 11.2.1 High-Frequency Model of Bipolar Transistor 529 11.2.2 High-Frequency Model of Mosfet 531 11.2.3 Transit Frequency 532 11.3 Analysis Procedure 534 11.4 Frequency Response of CE and CS Stages 535 11.4.1 Low-Frequency Response 535 11.4.2 High-Frequency Response 536 11.4.3 Use of Miller’s Theorem 537 11.4.4 Direct Analysis 539 11.4.5 Input Impedance 543 11.5 Frequency Response of CB and CG Stages 544 11.5.1 Low-Frequency Response 544 11.5.2 High-Frequency Response 544 11.6 Frequency Response of Followers 547 11.6.1 Input and Output Impedances 550 11.7 Frequency Response of Cascode Stage 553 11.7.1 Input and Output Impedances 557 11.8 Frequency Response of Differential Pairs 558 11.8.1 Common-Mode Frequency Response 559 11.9 Additional Examples 561 11.10 Chapter Summary 564 Problems 565 SPICE Problems 573 12 Feedback 575 12.1 General Considerations 577 12.1.1 Loop Gain 579 12.2 Properties of Negative Feedback 582 12.2.1 Gain Desensitization 582 12.2.2 Bandwidth Extension 584 12.2.3 Modification of I/O Impedances 586 12.2.4 Linearity Improvement 589 12.3 Types of Amplifiers 591 12.3.1 Simple Amplifier Models 591 12.3.2 Examples of Amplifier Types 593 12.4 Sense and Return Techniques 595 12.5 Polarity of Feedback 598 12.6 Feedback Topologies 600 12.6.1 Voltage–Voltage Feedback 600 12.6.2 Voltage–Current Feedback 605 12.6.3 Current–Voltage Feedback 608 12.6.4 Current–Current Feedback 613 12.7 Effect of Nonideal I/O Impedances 616 12.7.1 Inclusion of I/O Effects 617 12.8 Stability in Feedback Systems 628 12.8.1 Review of Bode’s Rules 629 12.8.2 Problem of Instability 630 12.8.3 Stability Condition 633 12.8.4 Phase Margin 636 12.8.5 Frequency Compensation 638 12.8.6 Miller Compensation 641 12.9 Chapter Summary 642 Problems 643 SPICE Problems 654 13 Oscillators 656 13.1 General Considerations 656 13.2 Ring Oscillators 659 13.3 LC Oscillators 664 13.3.1 Parallel LC Tanks 664 13.3.2 Cross-Coupled Oscillator 667 13.3.3 Colpitts Oscillator 670 13.4 Phase Shift Oscillator 672 13.5 Wien-Bridge Oscillator 675 13.6 Crystal Oscillators 677 13.6.1 Crystal Model 678 13.6.2 Negative-Resistance Circuit 679 13.6.3 Crystal Oscillator Implementation 681 13.7 Chapter Summary 683 Problems 684 SPICE Problems 688 14 Output Stages and Power Amplifiers 690 14.1 General Considerations 690 14.2 Emitter Follower as Power Amplifier 691 14.3 Push-Pull Stage 694 14.4 Improved Push-Pull Stage 697 14.4.1 Reduction of Crossover Distortion 697 14.4.2 Addition of CE Stage 701 14.5 Large-Signal Considerations 704 14.5.1 Biasing Issues 704 14.5.2 Omission of PNP Power Transistor 705 14.5.3 High-Fidelity Design 708 14.6 Short-Circuit Protection 708 14.7 Heat Dissipation 709 14.7.1 Emitter Follower Power Rating 710 14.7.2 Push-Pull Stage Power Rating 711 14.7.3 Thermal Runaway 713 14.8 Efficiency 714 14.8.1 Efficiency of Emitter Follower 714 14.8.2 Efficiency of Push-Pull Stage 715 14.9 Power Amplifier Classes 716 14.10 Chapter Summary 717 Problems 718 SPICE Problems 723 15 Analog Filters 725 15.1 General Considerations 725 15.1.1 Filter Characteristics 726 15.1.2 Classification of Filters 727 15.1.3 Filter Transfer Function 730 15.1.4 Problem of Sensitivity 734 15.2 First-Order Filters 735 15.3 Second-Order Filters 738 15.3.1 Special Cases 738 15.3.2 RLC Realizations 742 15.4 Active Filters 747 15.4.1 Sallen and Key Filter 747 15.4.2 Integrator-Based Biquads 753 15.4.3 Biquads Using Simulated Inductors 756 15.5 Approximation of Filter Response 761 15.5.1 Butterworth Response 762 15.5.2 Chebyshev Response 766 15.6 Chapter Summary 771 Problems 772 SPICE Problems 776 16 Digital Cmos Circuits 778 16.1 General Considerations 778 16.1.1 Static Characterization of Gates 779 16.1.2 Dynamic Characterization of Gates 786 16.1.3 Power-Speed Trade-Off 789 16.2 CMOS Inverter 791 16.2.1 Initial Thoughts 791 16.2.2 Voltage Transfer Characteristic 793 16.2.3 Dynamic Characteristics 799 16.2.4 Power Dissipation 804 16.3 CMOS NOR and NAND Gates 808 16.3.1 NOR Gate 808 16.3.2 NAND Gate 811 16.4 Chapter Summary 812 Problems 813 SPICE Problems 818 17 Cmos Amplifiers 819 17.1 General Considerations 819 17.1.1 Input and Output Impedances 820 17.1.2 Biasing 824 17.1.3 DC and Small-Signal Analysis 825 17.2 Operating Point Analysis and Design 826 17.2.1 Simple Biasing 828 17.2.2 Biasing with Source Degeneration 830 17.2.3 Self-Biased Stage 833 17.2.4 Biasing of PMOS Transistors 834 17.2.5 Realization of Current Sources 835 17.3 CMOS Amplifier Topologies 836 17.4 Common-Source Topology 837 17.4.1 CS Stage with Current-Source Load 842 17.4.2 CS Stage with Diode- Connected Load 843 17.4.3 CS Stage with Source Degeneration 844 17.4.4 Common-Gate Topology 856 17.4.5 Source Follower 867 17.5 Additional Examples 874 17.6 Chapter Summary 878 Problems 879 SPICE Problems 891 Appendix A Introduction To Spice A- 1 Index I- 1

Read more less

Book SynopsisExplore the development and state-of-the-art in deep space exploration using radio science techniques In Radio Science Techniques for Deep Space Exploration, accomplished NASA/JPL researcher and manager Sami Asmar delivers a multi-disciplinary exploration of the science, technology, engineering, mission operations, and signal processing relevant to deep space radio science. The book discusses basic principles before moving on to more advanced topics that include a wide variety of graphical illustrations and useful references to publications by experts in their respective fields. Complete explanations of changes in the characteristics of electromagnetic waves and the instrumentation and technology used in scientific experiments are examined. Radio Science Techniques for Deep Space Exploration offers answers to the question of how to explore the solar system with radio links and better understand the interior structures, atmospheres, rings, and surfaces of other planets. The authorTable of ContentsForeword xi Preface xiii Acknowledgments xv Author and Contributors xvii 1 Investigations and Techniques 1 1.0 Introduction 1 1.1 Historical Background 2 1.1.1 The Field of Radio Science 3 1.2 Fundamental Concepts 5 1.2.1 Categories of RS Investigations 10 1.2.2 Related Fields 12 1.3 Historical Development 14 1.4 Overview of the Radio Science Instrumentation System 18 1.4.1 Flight System 23 1.4.2 Ground System 24 1.4.3 Other Ground Stations 26 1.5 Noise, Error Sources, and Calibrations 26 1.6 Experiment Implementation, Data Archiving, and Critical Mission Support 29 1.7 Radio Science at Home 30 1.8 Future Directions 32 1.9 Summary and Remaining Chapters 32 Appendix 1A Selected Accomplishments and Planned Observations in Spacecraft Radio Science 35 1A.1 Selected Accomplishments in Radio Science 35 1A.2 Planned Observations in the Near-Term 36 1A.3 Planned Observations in the Long Term 37 2 Planetary Atmospheres, Rings, and Surfaces 39 2.1 Overview of Radio Occultations 39 2.2 Neutral Atmospheres 45 2.2.1 Abel Inversion 48 2.3 Ionospheres 52 2.4 Rings 53 2.4.1 Ring Occultation Observables 55 2.4.2 Ring Occultation Analysis 56 2.4.3 Ring Diffraction Correction 60 2.4.4 Data Decimation and Profile Resolution 61 2.4.5 Signal-to-noise Ratio-resolution Tradeoff 61 2.5 Surface Scattering 64 3 Gravity Science and Planetary Interiors 69 3.1 Overview 69 3.2 Gravity Observables and Formulations 74 3.2.1 Alternative Basis and Methods 75 3.2.2 Tidal Forces and Time Variable Gravity 76 3.2.3 Covariance Analysis 81 3.3 Earth and Moon Gravity Measurements and the Development of Crosslinks 83 3.4 Shape and Topography Data for Interpretation of Gravity Measurements 87 3.4.1 Imagery 92 3.4.2 Altimetry 93 3.4.3 Space-based Radar 94 3.4.4 Radio Occultations 94 3.4.5 Ground-based Radar 94 3.4.6 Examples of Results of Gravity–Topography Analysis 94 3.5 Application to Solar System Bodies 95 3.5.1 Moon 96 3.5.2 Mercury 96 3.5.3 Venus 97 3.5.4 Mars 97 3.5.5 Jupiter 99 3.5.6 Saturn 102 3.5.7 Uranus 103 3.5.8 Neptune 104 3.5.9 Pluto 104 3.5.10 Asteroids and Comets 104 3.5.11 Pioneer and Earth Flyby Anomalies 105 3.6 A User’s Guide 106 3.6.1 Calculation of Observables and Partials 108 3.6.2 Estimation Filter 109 3.6.3 Solution Analysis 109 Appendix 3A Planetary Geodesy 111 3A.1 Planetary Geodesy: Gravitational Potentials and Fields 111 3A.2 Gravity Determination Technique 114 3A.3 Dynamical Integration 114 3A.4 Processing of Observations 116 3A.5 Filtering of Observations 117 4 Solar and Fundamental Physics 123 4.1 Principles of Heliospheric Observations 123 4.2 Inner Heliospheric Electron Density 126 4.3 Density Power Spectrum 127 4.4 Intermittency, Nonstationarity, and Events 127 4.5 Faraday Rotation 128 4.6 Spaced-receiver Measurements 128 4.7 Space-time Localization of Plasma Irregularities 129 4.8 Utility for Telecommunications Engineering 130 4.9 Precision Tests of Relativistic Gravity 131 4.10 Scientific Goals and Objectives 133 4.10.1 Determine γ to an Accuracy of 2 × 10−6 134 4.10.2 Determine β to an Accuracy of ~3 × 10−5 135 4.10.3 Determine η to an Accuracy of at Least 4.4 × 10−4 135 4.10.4 Determine α1 to an Accuracy of 7.8 × 10−6 135 4.10.5 Determine the Solar Oblateness to an Accuracy of 4.8 × 10−9 135 4.10.6 Test Any Time Variation of the Gravitational Constant, G, to an Accuracy of 3 × 10−13 Per Year 135 4.10.7 Characterize the Solar Corona 136 4.11 Comparison with Other Experiments 136 4.11.1 Cassini 136 4.11.2 Gravity Probe B 137 4.11.3 Messenger 137 4.11.4 Lunar Laser Ranging 137 4.11.5 Gaia 137 4.12 MORE Summary 138 4.13 Anomalous Motion of Pioneers 10 and 11 138 Appendix 4A Solar Corona Observation Methodology Illustrated by Mars Express 139 4A.1 Formulation 139 4A.2 Total Electron Content from Ranging Data 141 4A.3 Change in Total Electron Content from Doppler Data 143 4A.4 Electron Density 144 4A.5 Coronal Mass Ejections 145 4A.6 Separation of Uplink and Downlink Effects from Plasma 150 4A.7 Earth Atmospheric Correction 152 4A.8 Example Data 153 Appendix 4B Faraday Rotation Methodology Illustrated by Magellan Observations 157 4B.1 Formulation 157 4B.2 Coronal Radio Sounding 158 4B.3 The Faraday Rotation Effect 160 4B.4 Measurement of the Total Electron Content 161 4B.5 Combining the Faraday Rotation and Total Electron Content 162 4B.6 Instrument Overview: The Magellan Spacecraft 164 4B.7 Instrument Overview: The Deep Space Network 165 4B.8 Data Processing and Results 166 4B.9 Conclusion 167 Appendix 4C Precision Doppler Tracking of Deep Space Probes and the Search for Low-frequency Gravitational Radiation 171 4C.1 Background 171 4C.2 Response of Spacecraft Doppler Tracking to Gravitational Waves 172 4C.3 Noise in Doppler GW Observations and Their Transfer Functions 174 4C.4 Detector Performance 176 4C.4.1 Periodic and Quasi-periodic Waves 176 4C.4.2 Burst Waves 177 4C.4.3 Stochastic Waves 178 4C.5 Sensitivity Improvements in Future Doppler GW Observations 179 5 Technologies, Instrumentation, and Operations 181 5.1 Overview 181 5.1.1 End-to-End Instrumentation Overview 182 5.1.2 Experiment Error Budgets 187 5.2 Key Concepts and Terminology 191 5.2.1 The Allan Deviation for Frequency and Timing Standards 191 5.2.2 Signal Operational Modes 197 5.2.3 Reception Modes 200 5.2.4 Signal Carrier Modulation Modes 202 5.3 Radio Science Technologies 203 5.3.1 Spacecraft Ultrastable Oscillator 204 5.3.2 Spacecraft Ka-band Translator 213 5.3.3 Spacecraft Open-loop Receiver 215 5.3.4 Spacecraft Radio Science Beacon 215 5.3.5 Ground Water Vapor Radiometer 215 5.3.6 Ground Advanced Ranging Instrument 215 5.3.7 Ground Bethe Hole Coupler 216 5.3.8 Ground Advanced Pointing Techniques 217 5.4 Operations and Experiment Planning 217 5.5 Data Products 218 5.5.1 Range Rate 219 5.5.2 Range 220 5.5.3 Delta Differential One-way Ranging (Delta-DOR) 222 5.5.4 Differenced Range Versus Integrated Doppler 222 5.5.5 Open-loop Receiver (Radio Science Receiver) 223 5.5.6 Media Calibration 224 5.5.7 Spacecraft Trajectory 225 5.5.8 Calibration Data Sets 225 Appendix 5A Spacecraft Telecommunications System and Radio Science Flight Instrument for Several Deep Space Missions 227 6 Future Directions in Radio Science Investigations and Technologies 231 6.1 Fundamental Questions toward a Future Exploration Roadmap 231 6.1.1 Fundamental Questions about the Utility of RS Techniques 232 6.1.2 Possible Triggers for Specific Innovations for Future Investigations 233 6.1.3 Possible Synergies with Other Fields 233 6.1.4 Examining Relevant Methodologies 234 6.2 Science-Enabling Technologies: Constellations of Small Spacecraft 235 6.2.1 Constellations for Investigations of Atmospheric Structure and Dynamics 236 6.2.2 Constellations for Investigations of Interior Structure and Dynamics 238 6.2.3 Constellations for Simultaneous and Differential Measurements 239 6.2.4 Constellations of Entry Probes and Atmospheric Vehicles 240 6.2.5 Constellations for Investigations of Planetary Surface 241 6.3 Science-enabling via Optical Links 243 6.4 Science-enabling Calibration Techniques 243 6.4.1 Earth’s Troposphere Water Vapor Radiometry 244 6.4.2 Antenna Mechanical Noise 244 6.4.3 Advanced Ranging 245 6.5 Summary 246 Appendix 6A The National Academies Planetary Science Decadal Survey, Radio Science Contribution, 2009: Planetary Radio Science: Investigations of Interiors, Surfaces, Atmospheres, Rings, and Environments 247 6A.1 Summary 248 6A.2 Background 248 6A.3 Historical Opportunities and Discoveries 249 6A.4 Recent Opportunities and Discoveries 249 6A.5 Future Opportunities 250 6A.6 Technological Advances in Flight Instrumentation 252 6A.7 The Future of Flight Instrumentation 253 6A.7.1 Crosslink Radio Science 253 6A.7.2 Ka-band Transponders and Other Instrumentation 254 6A.8 Ground Instrumentation 254 6A.8.1 NASA’s Deep Space Network 254 6A.8.2 Other Facilities 254 6A.9 New Communications Architectures: Arrays and Optical Links 255 6A.10 Conclusion and Goals 255 Appendix 6B The National Academies Planetary Science Decadal Survey, Radio Science Contribution: Solar System Interiors, Atmospheres, and Surfaces Investigations via Radio Links: Goals for the Next Decade 257 6B.1 Summary 258 6B.2 Current Status of RS Investigations 259 6B.3 Key Science Goals for the Next Decade 260 6B.4 Radio Science Techniques for Achieving the Science Goals of the Next Decade 262 6B.5 Technology Development Needed in the Next Decade 263 References 267 Acronyms and Abbreviations 311 Index 331

Read more less

Book SynopsisLearn how AI and data science are upending the worlds of biology and medicine In Silico Dreams: How Artificial Intelligence and Biotechnology Will Create the Medicines of the Future delivers an illuminating and fresh perspective on the convergence of two powerful technologies: AI and biotech. Accomplished genomics expert, executive, and author Brian Hilbush offers readers a brilliant exploration of the most current work of pioneering tech giants and biotechnology startups who have already started disrupting healthcare. The book provides an in-depth understanding of the sources of innovation that are driving the shift in the pharmaceutical industry away from serendipitous therapeutic discovery and toward engineered medicines and curative therapies. In this fascinating book, you'll discover: An overview of the rise of data science methods and the paradigm shift in biology that led to the in silico revolutionAn outline of the fundamental breakthroughs in AI and deep learning and their applications across medicineA compelling argument for the notion that AI and biotechnology tools will rapidly accelerate the development of therapeuticsA summary of innovative breakthroughs in biotechnology with a focus on gene editing and cell reprogramming technologies for therapeutic developmentA guide to the startup landscape in AI in medicine, revealing where investments are poised to shape the innovation base for the pharmaceutical industry Perfect for anyone with an interest in scientific topics and technology, In Silico Dreams also belongs on the bookshelves of decision-makers in a wide range of industries, including healthcare, technology, venture capital, and government.Table of ContentsIntroduction xvii Chapter 1 The Information Revolution’s Impact on Biology 1 A Biological Data Avalanche at Warp Speed 5 Tracking SARS-CoV-2 with Genomic Epidemiology 11 Biology’s Paradigm Shift Enables In Silico Biology 17 Transitions and Computation in Cancer Research 18 Structural Biology and Genomics 24 Sequencing the Human Genome 27 Computational Biology in the Twenty-First Century 33 Applications of Human Genome Sequencing 35 Analyzing Human Genome Sequence Information 37 Omics Technologies and Systems Biology 40 Chapter 2 A New Era of Artificial Intelligence 53 AI Steps Out of the Bronx 55 From Neurons and Cats Brains to Neural Networks 58 Machine Learning and the Deep Learning Breakthrough 66 Deep Learning Arrives for AI 73 Deep Neural Network Architectures 75 Deep Learning’s Beachhead on Medicine: Medical Imaging 78 Limitations on Artificial Intelligence 83 Chapter 3 The Long Road to New Medicines 91 Medicine’s Origins: The Role of Opium Since the Stone Age 96 Industrial Manufacturing of Medicines 102 Paul Ehrlich and the Birth of Chemotherapeutic Drug Discovery 108 The Pharmaceutical Industry: Drugs and War—New Medicines in the Twentieth Century 112 From Synthetic Antibiotics to the Search for New Drugs from the Microbial World 116 Developing Therapeutics for Cancer 119 Antifolates and the Emergence of DNA Synthesis Inhibitors 120 Antibiotics as Cancer Chemotherapeutic Drugs 123 Immunotherapy 125 The Pharmaceutical Business Model in the Twenty-First Century 126 R&D Productivity Challenges Within the Pharmaceutical Industry 131 Sources of Pharmaceutical Innovation: Biotechnology and New Therapeutic Modalities 135 Chapter 4 Gene Editing and the New Tools of Biotechnology 145 Molecular Biology and Biological Information Flow 150 Manipulating Gene Information with Recombinant DNA Technology 154 Genetics, Gene Discovery, and Drugs for Rare Human Diseases 160 Second-Generation Biotechnology Tools: CRISPR- Cas9 and Genome Editing Technologies 167 Human Genome Editing and Clinical Trials 171 Biotechnology to the Rescue: Vaccine Development Platforms Based on Messenger RNA 179 Chapter 5 Healthcare and the Entrance of the Technology Titans 189 Digital Health and the New Healthcare Investment Arena 191 Assessing the Tech Titans as Disruptors in Healthcare 195 Alphabet: Extending Its Tentacles Into Healthcare with Google and Other Bets 196 Apple Inc: Consumer Technology Meets Healthcare 200 Amazon: Taking Logistics to the Next Level for Delivering Healthcare 204 Echoes of the Final Frontier 207 Chapter 6 AI-Based Algorithms in Biology and Medicine 211 Recognizing the Faces of Cancer 217 Tumor Classification Using Deep Learning with Genomic Features 222 AI for Diseases of the Nervous System: Seeing and Changing the Brain 229 Regulatory Approval and Clinical Implementation: Twin Challenges for AI-Based Algorithms in Medicine 234 Chapter 7 AI in Drug Discovery and Development 245 A Brief Survey of In Silico Methods in Drug Discovery 247 Virtual Screening with Cheminformatics and HTS Technologies 250 AI Brings a New Toolset for Computational Drug Design 252 AI-Based Virtual Screening Tools 257 Generative Models for De Novo Drug Design 257 A New Base of Innovation for the Pharmaceutical Industry 259 Atomwise 261 Recursion Pharmaceuticals 262 Deep Genomics 262 Relay Therapeutics 263 Summary 265 Chapter 8 Biotechnology, AI, and Medicine’s Future 269 Building Tools to Decipher Molecular Structures and Biological Systems 272 AlphaFold: Going Deep in Protein Structure Prediction 274 Predicting Genome 3D Organization and Regulatory Elements 276 AI Approaches to Link Genetics-Based Targets to Disease 277 Quantum Computing for In Silico Chemistry and Biology 278 Neuroscience and AI: Modeling Brain and Behavior 280 Brain Information Processing and Modularity: Climbing a Granite Wall 283 Engineering Medicines with Biotechnology and AI 289 Glossary 295 Index 303

Read more less

Book SynopsisA practical and accessible approach to machinery troubleshooting Unique Methods for Analyzing Failures and Catastrophic Events is designed to assist practicing engineers address design and fabrication problems in manufacturing equipment to support safe process operation. Throughout the book, a wealth of real-world case studies and easy-to-understand illustrated examples demonstrate how to use simplified failure analysis methods to produce insights for a wide range of engineering problems. Dr. Anthony Sofronas draws from his five decades of industry experience to help engineers better understand the science behind a particular problem, evaluate the failure analysis of an outside consultant, and recommend the best path forward to management. The author distills sophisticated engineering analysis approaches into compact, user-friendly methodologies that can be easily applied to the readers' own situations to avoid costly failures. Each chapter includes a thorough suTable of ContentsAbout the Author xvii Preface xix Acknowledgments xxi 1 Engineering Suggestions Based on Experience 1 1.1 What Should We Learn from This Book? 1 1.1.1 Summary 3 Reference 3 1.2 We All Contribute to Each Other’s Success 3 1.2.1 Summary 5 Reference 5 1.3 Why Performing Calculations is Important to an Engineer’s Career 5 1.3.1 Summary 7 Reference 8 1.4 How an Engineering Consultant Can Help Your Company 8 1.4.1 Summary 10 1.5 The Benefit of Keeping Complex Problems Simple 10 1.5.1 Summary 14 1.6 Taking Risks and Making High-Level Presentations 15 1.6.1 Summary 16 1.7 Searching the Literature for Data 16 1.7.1 Equations 17 1.7.2 Facts 17 1.7.3 Credibility 17 1.7.4 Accuracy of the Data 17 1.7.5 Sources to Search 18 1.7.6 Summary 18 References 19 1.8 Cautions to New to Industry Technical Personnel 19 1.8.1 The Wrong Frequency 19 1.8.2 Using the Incorrect Measuring Technique 20 1.8.3 Never Under-Estimate the Value of Experienced People 20 1.8.4 Check and Double Check Your Design 20 1.8.5 Some Understand the Equipment Much Better Than You 21 1.8.6 Summary 22 1.9 A Method for Analyzing Catastrophic Type Failures 22 References 24 2 Evaluating Failures and Designs 25 2.1 Twenty Rules to Remember 25 2.1.1 Summary 28 2.2 How to Avoid Being Overwhelmed in a Failure Situation 29 2.2.1 Summary 31 2.3 Catastrophic Failures and the Human Factor 31 2.3.1 Summary 35 References 35 2.4 The Importance of Alliances and Networking 35 2.4.1 Summary 36 2.5 Personal Checklists are Important 37 2.6 Checklist for Vibration Analysis 37 2.6.1 Summary 39 Reference 40 2.7 Checklist for New Piping System Installations 40 2.8 Checklists for Pumps and Compressors 40 2.9 Understanding What the Failure Data Is Telling You 41 2.9.1 Gear Damage 41 2.9.2 Shaft Failures 42 2.9.3 Weld Failures 43 2.9.4 Bolt Failures 43 2.9.5 Brittle Fracture Failures 45 2.9.6 Anti-Friction Bearing Failures 46 2.9.7 Spring Failures 46 2.9.8 Drilled Holes 47 2.9.9 Summary 48 2.10 Phantom Failures and Their Dilemma 49 2.10.1 Summary 50 2.11 Various Types of Equipment and Their Failure Loads 50 2.11.1 Summary 52 3 Mechanical Failures 53 3.1 Preventing Crankshaft Failures in Large Reciprocating Engines 53 3.1.1 Summary 57 3.2 Structural Collapse of a Reinforced Concrete Bridge 57 3.2.1 Summary 61 Reference 61 3.3 Failure Analysis Computations Differ from Design 61 3.3.1 Summary 64 3.4 Crack Growth and the Bending Failures of a Hollow Shaft 64 3.4.1 An In-Service Failure Example 66 3.4.2 The Assumptions and Comparisons 67 3.4.3 Summary 68 Reference 68 3.5 Why Did a Small Piece of Foam Cause the Shuttle Columbia to Crash? 68 3.5.1 Summary 71 Reference 71 3.6 Can the Aircraft Cowling Contain a Broken Turbine Blade? 71 3.6.1 Summary 72 References 72 3.7 Why Did My Car Windshield Break from a Very Small Stone? 73 3.7.1 Summary 73 3.8 Momentum or Why a Car Is Harder to Push and Then Easier When Rolling 73 3.8.1 Summary 75 3.9 Bearing Failure Due To Design Error 75 3.9.1 Summary 76 3.10 What Is the Shortest Stopping Distance for My Car? 76 3.10.1 Summary 76 3.11 How Hot Do Brake Disks Get in a Panic Stop? 77 3.11.1 Summary 78 3.12 Will the Turbocharger Disk Go Through its Housing? 78 3.12.1 Summary 80 3.13 Failure of an Agitator Gearbox 80 3.13.1 Summary 82 3.14 Failure of an Extruder Screw 82 3.14.1 Summary 83 Reference 83 3.15 Failure of a Steam Turbine Blade 84 3.15.1 Summary 87 3.16 How Long Will It Last? 87 3.16.1 Summary 90 Reference 90 3.17 Gear Life With a Load 90 3.17.1 Summary 92 3.18 Analyzing the Life of a Gear 93 3.18.1 Summary 94 3.19 Predicting the Cause of a Gear Tooth Crack Growth Past and Future 94 References 96 3.20 Nonlinear and Linear Impact Problems 97 3.20.1 Summary 100 3.21 Phantom Failure of an Expander–Dryer 100 3.21.1 Summary 103 3.22 Cracking of a Rail Hopper Car Due to Couple-Up 103 Reference 106 3.23 Loss of Oil Supply and Gear Set Destruction 106 References 109 3.24 Analyzing the Total Collapse of a Multi-Story Building 110 References 115 4 Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer Examples 116 4.1 Addressing Heat Exchanger Tube Leaks 116 4.1.1 Summary 118 4.2 Explaining Flow Through Piping Using the Poiseuille Equation 119 4.2.1 Summary 120 4.3 A Local Flooding Event at a Plant Site 120 4.3.1 Summary 122 Reference 122 4.4 Examining Fan System Pulsations 122 4.4.1 Summary 125 References 126 4.5 The Dynamics of How an Aircraft Flies 126 4.5.1 Summary 129 4.6 How Much Wind Does It Take to Blow Over a Motor Coach? 129 4.6.1 Summary 131 4.7 How Much Wind Force to Buckle an Aircraft Hanger Door? 131 4.7.1 Summary 132 4.8 How Much Water on a Road to Float a Car? 132 4.8.1 Summary 133 4.9 How Fast Does an Object Hit the Ground? 133 4.9.1 Summary 135 4.10 Collapse of a Bubble and the Excitation Force on a Structure 135 4.10.1 Summary 139 4.11 Failure of a Cooling Tower Pump Due to Water Hammer 139 4.11.1 Summary 142 References 142 4.12 Braking Resistor Burn-Out on a Locomotive 142 4.12.1 Summary 144 4.13 Will a Small Ice Air Conditioner Work? 144 4.13.1 Summary 148 References 148 4.14 Prototype of Smallest Air Ice Cooler 148 4.14.1 Summary 149 5 Sports Examples 151 5.1 Why Does a Baseball Curve? 151 5.1.1 Summary 153 5.2 How Far Does a Baseball Go When Hit with Drag? 153 5.2.1 Summary 154 5.3 What Is the Force of a Batted Baseball? 154 5.3.1 Summary 155 5.4 Why Doesn’t a Baseball Catcher’s Arm Break with a 100-mph Fastball? 155 5.4.1 Some Data 156 5.4.2 Summary 157 5.5 Dynamics of a Billiard Ball 157 5.5.1 Summary 158 5.6 How Far Can a Golf Ball Go? 158 5.6.1 Summary 159 5.7 What Causes an Ice Skater to Spin so Fast? 159 5.7.1 Summary 160 5.8 Why Don’t High Divers Get Injured? 160 5.8.1 Summary 162 References 162 5.9 How Hard Is a Boxers Punch? 163 5.9.1 Summary 164 6 Gas Explosion Events 165 6.1 Energy in Steam Boiler Explosions 165 6.1.1 Summary 167 References 167 6.2 Delayed Fireball-Type Explosions 167 6.2.1 Summary 171 References 171 6.3 Method for Investigating Hydrocarbon Explosions 171 6.3.1 Summary 178 References 178 6.4 Pipeline Explosion Critical Zone 179 6.4.1 Summary 179 6.5 Pneumatic Explosion Debris Range 180 6.5.1 Summary 181 6.6 How Are the Effect of Massive Energy Releases Compared? 182 6.6.1 Summary 183 6.7 Engine Air Intake Manifold Explosion 183 6.7.1 Summary 185 Reference 185 7 Vibration and Impact: The Cause of Failures 186 7.1 Investigating a Possible Cause for a Coupling Failure in a Centrifugal Compressor 186 7.1.1 Summary 192 References 192 7.2 Sudden Power Interruption to a System 193 7.2.1 Summary 195 7.3 Effect of Liquid Slug in a Centrifugal Compressor 195 7.3.1 Summary 198 Reference 198 7.4 Weld Failures in Vibrating Equipment 198 7.4.1 Summary 201 References 201 7.5 Effect of Gear Chatter on Pinion Teeth Impact 202 7.5.1 Summary 202 7.6 Holzer Method for Calculating Torsional Multi-mass Systems 203 7.6.1 Summary 204 7.7 What to do When the Vibration Levels Increase on Large Gearboxes 204 7.7.1 Summary 209 Reference 209 7.8 How Vibratory Torque Relates to Bearing Cap Vibration in a Gearbox 209 7.8.1 Summary 211 Reference 211 7.9 Vibration of a Polymer Extruder Gearbox 211 7.9.1 Summary 212 References 213 7.10 Processing and Wear Load Increase in a Polymer Extruder 213 7.10.1 Summary 214 Reference 214 7.11 Vibration Charts Can Give Faulty Information 214 7.11.1 Summary 215 7.12 Have Torsional Vibrations Caused the Gearbox Pinion to Fail? 216 7.12.1 Summary 218 8 Examining the Human Body 219 8.1 What Causes Football Brain Injuries? 219 8.1.1 Summary 223 References 223 8.2 Life Assessment Diagrams 223 8.2.1 Summary 224 8.3 Assessing the Cumulative Damage Done by Head Impacts 224 8.3.1 Summary 228 References 228 8.4 What Happens When I Hit My Head and See Stars? 229 8.4.1 Summary 230 8.5 How Does the Body Keep Cool? 230 8.5.1 Summary 232 8.6 How Do Our Muscles Work? 232 8.6.1 Summary 234 8.7 Why Do People Die from Heatstroke in a 75 ∘ FCar? 234 8.7.1 Summary 235 8.8 What Damage Can a Safety Airbag Do to a Human? 236 8.8.1 Summary 236 8.9 How Is Blood Pressure Measured? 236 8.9.1 Summary 237 8.10 How Does the Heart Work? 237 8.10.1 Summary 241 8.11 Restricting the Spread of a Virus 241 8.11.1 Summary 244 Reference 245 8.12 Why Do Some Survive a Freefall Out of an Aircraft? 246 8.12.1 Summary 246 9 Other Curious Catastrophic Failures Related to Earth 247 9.1 Can an Asteroid Be Deflected from Hitting Earth? 247 9.1.1 Summary 249 9.2 What Size Crater Does a Large Asteroid Make When It Hits Earth? 250 9.2.1 Summary 253 9.3 What Is an Earthquake? 253 9.3.1 Summary 255 9.4 Earthquakes Are so Strong Why Don’t They Do More Damage? 256 9.4.1 Summary 258 9.5 Concerns on the Super-Volcano Under Yellowstone National Park 258 9.5.1 Summary 260 References 261 9.6 What Is a Tsunami and How Do They Form? 261 9.6.1 Summary 262 Reference 262 9.7 What Is a Tornado? 262 9.7.1 Summary 264 Reference 264 9.8 Can a Tornado Really Lift a House? 264 9.8.1 Summary 265 9.9 Can Straw Penetrate a Tree in a Tornado? 265 9.9.1 Summary 266 Reference 266 9.10 What Is a Hurricane? 266 9.10.1 Summary 267 10 Strange Occurrences and Other Interesting Items 268 10.1 What in the Force of a Ship Hitting a Whale? 268 10.1.1 Summary 269 Reference 270 10.2 How Much Wind to Blow Over a Tree 270 10.2.1 Summary 272 10.3 Why Do Objects Appear Smaller Than They Are? 273 10.3.1 Summary 274 10.4 Do We Feel a Force When Near Large Objects? 274 10.4.1 Summary 275 10.5 Why Does the Moon Sometimes Appear So Big on the Horizon? 275 10.5.1 Summary 276 10.6 How Does an Air Conditioner Operate? 276 10.6.1 Summary 277 Reference 277 10.7 How Fast to Heat Up a Room? 278 10.7.1 Summary 278 10.8 How Do I Size an Air Conditioner for a Garage? 278 10.8.1 Summary 279 10.9 At What Speed Does a Locomotive Become De-railed? 279 10.9.1 Summary 280 10.10 Are Those Huge Cruise Ships Stable? 280 10.10.1 Summary 281 10.11 Why Are Arches Used? 281 10.11.1 Summary 285 10.12 Why Don’t Bighorn Sheep Die When Banging Their Heads? 285 10.12.1 Summary 286 10.13 Why Can’t We Walk on Water? 286 10.13.1 Summary 288 Reference 288 10.14 How to Predict the Outcome of the Stock Market 288 10.14.1 Summary 292 10.15 Things Aren’t as Random as They May Appear 293 Reference 294 10.15.1 Summary 295 10.16 Why Do Certain Events Seem to Happen Quite Often? 295 10.16.1 Summary 295 10.17 Occurrences on Machines and Structures 295 10.17.1 Summary 298 10.18 How Long Does It Take to Thaw a Frozen Turkey and to Cook It? 298 10.18.1 Summary 300 11 Magic Tricks Using Engineering Principles 301 11.1 Surface Tension and Floating Metal 301 11.1.1 Summary 304 11.2 Acceleration of Gravity and the Money Challenge 304 11.2.1 Summary 305 11.3 The Jumping Coin 305 11.3.1 Summary 306 11.4 The Belt Balancing Act 306 11.4.1 Summary 307 11.5 How Can It Be Held Up by Threads? 308 11.5.1 Summary 309 11.6 Pulling the Tablecloth 310 11.6.1 Summary 311 12 Useful Forms of the Equations Used in this Book 312 12.1 The Equations of Motion 312 12.2 Newton’s First Law of Force 312 12.3 Newton’s Second Law of Force 313 12.4 Newton’s Third Law of Force 313 12.5 Newton’s Gravitation Theory 313 12.6 Static Equilibrium 314 12.7 Momentum and Impulse 314 12.8 Kinetic Energy 314 12.9 Potential Energy 315 12.10 Conservation of Energy 315 12.11 Bernoulli’s Equation 315 12.12 Specific Heat Equation 316 12.13 Conduction Equation 316 12.14 Convection Equation 316 12.15 Radiation Equation 317 12.16 Theories of Material Failure 317 12.17 Archimedes Principle 317 12.18 Centrifugal Force 318 12.19 What Is Enthalpy? 318 13 A Little About Some Famous Scientists Mentioned in This Book 319 13.1 Isaac Newton (1642–1726 AD) 319 13.2 Daniel Bernoulli (1700–1782 AD) 320 13.3 Archimedes of Syracuse (287–212 BC) 320 13.4 William Rankine (1820–1872 AD) 321 13.5 Leonardo da Vinci (1452–1519 AD) 321 13.6 Heinrich Holzer 321 13.7 Stephan Timoshenko (1878–1972) 322 Reference 322 13.8 Jacob P. Den Hartog (1901–1989) 322 References 322 13.9 Wilson, Ker, William 322 Index 325

Read more less

Book SynopsisVirtual, hands-on learning labs allow you to apply your technical skills in realistic environments. So Sybex has bundled AWS labs fromXtremeLabs with our popularAWS Certified Cloud Practitioner Study Guideto give you the same experience working in these labs as you prepare for the Certified Cloud Practitioner Exam that you would face in a real-life application. These labs in addition to the book are a proven way to prepare for the certification and for work as an AWS Cloud Practitioner. TheAWS Certified Cloud Practitioner Study Guide:Exam CLF-C01provides a solid introduction to this industry-leading technology, relied upon by thousands of businesses across the globe, as well as the resources you need to prove your knowledge in the AWS Certification Exam. This guide offers complete and thorough treatment of all topics included in the exam, beginning with a discussion of what the AWS cloud is and its basic global infrastructure and architectural principles.Table of ContentsIntroduction xxi Assessment Test xxvii Chapter 1 The Cloud 1 Introduction 2 What is Cloud Computing? 2 Highly Available and Scalable Resources 2 Professionally Secured Infrastructure 3 Metered Payment Model 3 Server Virtualization: The Basics 4 Cloud Platform Models 5 Infrastructure as a Service 5 Platform as a Service 5 Software as a Service 5 Serverless Workloads 6 Scalability and Elasticity 7 Scalability 7 Elasticity 7 Summary 8 Exam Essentials 9 Review Questions 10 Chapter 2 Understanding Your AWS Account 13 Introduction 14 The Free Tier 15 How Does the Free Tier Work? 15 Tracking Your Free Tier Usage 15 What’s Available Under the Free Tier? 17 Product Pricing 18 Finding AWS Pricing Documentation 18 Working with Online Calculators 19 Service Limits 23 Billing and Cost Management 23 The AWS Billing Dashboard 24 AWS Budgets 24 Monitoring Your Costs 25 AWS Organizations 26 Summary 26 Exam Essentials 27 Review Questions 28 Chapter 3 Getting Support on AWS 33 Introduction 34 Support Plans 34 Support Plan Pricing 34 The Basic Support Plan 36 The Developer Support Plan 36 The Business Support Plan 37 The Enterprise Support Plan 37 AWS Professional Services 37 Documentation and Online Help 38 Documentation 38 Discussion Forums 40 Trusted Advisor 40 Summary 42 Exam Essentials 43 Review Questions 44 Chapter 4 Understanding the AWS Environment 49 Introduction 50 AWS Global Infrastructure: AWS Regions 50 Regionally Based Services 52 Globally Based Services 53 Service Endpoints 53 AWS Global Infrastructure: Availability Zones 54 Availability Zone Designations 54 Availability Zone Networking 55 Availability Zones and High Availability 56 AWS Global Infrastructure: Edge Locations 57 Edge Locations and CloudFront 58 Regional Edge Cache Locations 59 The AWS Shared Responsibility Model 59 Managed Resources 60 Unmanaged Resources 61 Service Health Status 61 AWS Acceptable Use Policy 61 Summary 61 Exam Essentials 62 Review Questions 63 Chapter 5 Securing Your AWS Resources 67 Introduction 68 AWS Identity and Access Management 68 Protecting the Root User 69 Authentication 69 Users, Groups, and Roles 72 Providing Federated Access 74 Credential Report 75 Encryption 75 Regulatory Compliance (AWS Artifact) 76 Summary 77 Exam Essentials 77 Review Questions 78 Chapter 6 Working with Your AWS Resources 83 Introduction 84 The AWS Management Console 85 Accessing the AWS Management Console 85 Opening a Service Console 87 Working with Shortcuts 88 Selecting a Region 88 The Account Name Menu 90 Resource Groups 90 Tag Editor 91 Tagging Strategies 92 The AWS Console Mobile Application 94 The AWS Command Line Interface 98 Requirements 99 Installation 99 Software Development Kits 101 Mobile Software Development Kits 101 Internet of Things Device Software Development Kits 102 CloudWatch 103 CloudWatch Metrics 103 CloudWatch Alarms 104 CloudWatch Dashboards 104 CloudWatch Logs 105 CloudWatch Events 106 CloudTrail 107 API and Non-API Events 107 Management and Data Events 107 Event History 108 Trails 108 Log File Integrity Validation 108 Cost Explorer 109 Cost and Usage 109 Reservation Reports 111 Reserved Instance Recommendations 112 Summary 113 Exam Essentials 113 Review Questions 115 Chapter 7 The Core Compute Services 119 Introduction 120 Deploying Amazon Elastic Compute Cloud Servers 120 Amazon Machine Images 120 Understanding EC2 Instance Types 123 Server Storage: Elastic Block Store and Instance Store Volumes 124 Understanding EC2 Pricing Models 125 Simplified Deployments Through Managed Services 127 Amazon Lightsail 128 AWS Elastic Beanstalk 128 Deploying Container and Serverless Workloads 129 Containers 129 Serverless Functions 129 Summary 130 Exam Essentials 130 Review Questions 132 Chapter 8 The Core Storage Services 137 Introduction 138 Simple Storage Service 138 Objects and Buckets 139 S3 Storage Classes 139 Access Permissions 142 Encryption 143 Versioning 143 Object Life Cycle Configurations 144 S3 Glacier 145 Archives and Vaults 145 Retrieval Options 145 AWS Storage Gateway 146 File Gateways 146 Volume Gateways 146 Tape Gateways 147 AWS Snowball 147 Hardware Specifications 148 Security 148 Snowball Edge 149 Summary 150 Exam Essentials 150 Review Questions 152 Chapter 9 The Core Database Services 157 Introduction 158 Database Models 158 Relational Databases 159 Structured Query Language 160 Nonrelational (No-SQL) Databases 160 Amazon Relational Database Service 161 Database Engines 161 Licensing 162 Instance Classes 162 Scaling Vertically 163 Storage 163 Scaling Horizontally with Read Replicas 164 High Availability with Multi-AZ 164 Backup and Recovery 165 Determining Your Recovery Point Objective 165 DynamoDB 166 Items and Tables 166 Scaling Horizontally 167 Queries and Scans 167 Amazon Redshift 168 Summary 169 Exam Essentials 170 Review Questions 171 Chapter 10 The Core Networking Services 175 Introduction 176 Virtual Private Cloud 176 VPC CIDR Blocks 176 Subnets 177 Internet Access 178 Security Groups 178 Network Access Control Lists 178 VPC Peering 179 Virtual Private Networks 179 Direct Connect 179 Route 53 180 Resource Records 180 Domain Name Registration 180 Hosted Zones 181 Routing Policies 181 Health Checks 182 Traffic Flow and Traffic Policies 182 CloudFront 183 Summary 183 Exam Essentials 184 Review Questions 185 Chapter 11 Automating Your AWS Workloads 189 Introduction 190 The Imperative Approach 190 The Declarative Approach 191 Infrastructure as Code 191 CloudFormation 191 Templates 192 Stacks 192 CloudFormation vs. the AWS CLI 193 AWS Developer Tools 194 CodeCommit 194 CodeBuild 195 CodeDeploy 196 CodePipeline 197 EC2 Auto Scaling 199 Launch Configurations and Launch Templates 199 Auto Scaling Groups 199 Scaling Actions 200 Configuration Management 200 Systems Manager 200 OpsWorks 201 Summary 203 Exam Essentials 204 Review Questions 205 Chapter 12 Common Use-Case Scenarios 209 Introduction 210 The Well-Architected Framework 210 Reliability 211 Performance Efficiency 211 Security 211 Cost Optimization 212 Operational Excellence 213 A Highly Available Web Application Using Auto Scaling and Elastic Load Balancing 213 Creating an Inbound Security Group Rule 214 Creating an Application Load Balancer 216 Creating a Launch Template 218 Creating an Auto Scaling Group 219 Static Website Hosting Using S3 222 Summary 224 Exam Essentials 224 Review Questions 226 Appendix A Answers to Review Questions 231 Chapter 1: The Cloud 232 Chapter 2: Understanding Your AWS Account 232 Chapter 3: Getting Support on AWS 234 Chapter 4: Understanding the AWS Environment 235 Chapter 5: Securing Your AWS Resources 237 Chapter 6: Working with Your AWS Resources 238 Chapter 7: The Core Compute Services 240 Chapter 8: The Core Storage Services 242 Chapter 9: The Core Database Services 244 Chapter 10: The Core Networking Services 245 Chapter 11: Automating Your AWS Workloads 247 Chapter 12: Common Use-Case Scenarios 248 Appendix B Additional Services 251 Athena 252 AWS Backup 252 AWS Glue 252 Batch 252 Cognito 253 Database Migration Service 253 Elastic File System 253 Elastic MapReduce 253 Inspector 254 Kinesis 254 Macie 254 Neptune 254 Simple Queue Service 254 WorkDocs 254 WorkSpaces 255 Index 257

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsChapter 1 History of Light and Polarization 2 1.1 Early history of light 2 1.2 History of polarization 4 1.3 History of polarization in optical fibers and waveguides 8 1.3.1 The history of optical fiber 8 1.3.2 History of polarization in optical fibers 11 1.3.3 Chronicles of polarization optics in optical fibers from 1959 to 1981 15 Reference 17 Bibliography 18 Chapter 2 Polarization Basics 19 2.1 Introduction to Polarization 19 2.2 The degenerate polarization states of light 20 2.3 The polarization ellipse of light 23 2.4 Poincaré Sphere presentation of polarization 27 2.5 Degree of polarization (DOP) 29 2.6 Birefringence 32 2.7 Photoelasticity or photo-elastic effect 34 2.8 Dichroism, diattenuation, and polarization dependent loss 34 2.9 Polarization properties of reflected and refracted light 35 Appendix 2A 36 Bibliography 37 Chapter 3 Polarization effects unique to optical fiber systems 39 3.1 Polarization variation in optical fibers 39 3.2 Polarization eigenmodes in a single mode optical fiber 40 3.3 Birefringence contributions in optical fibers 42 3.3.1 Noncircular Core 42 3.3.2 Internal lateral stress 44 3.3.3 External lateral stress 46 3.3.4 Fiber Bending 47 3.3.5 Fiber Twist 48 3.3.6 Electrical and Magnetic Fields 50 3.4 Polarization impairments in optical fiber systems 51 3.5 Polarization multiplexing 59 3.6 Polarization issues unique to optic fiber sensing system 60 3.7 Polarization issues unique to microwave photonics systems 61 References 62 Chapter 4 Mathematics for polarization analysis 66 4.1 Jones vector representation of monochramtic light 66 4.1.1 Jones vector 66 4.1.2 Mutual orthogonality of Jones vectors 69 4.1.3 Linear independence of Jones vectors 70 4.2 Jones matrix of optical devices 71 4.2.1 Jones Matrix of optical elements 72 4.2.2 Jones matrix of reflection 78 4.2.3 Polarization compensation of reflection 83 4.2.4 Polarization properties of corner-cube retroreflector 85 4.3 Jones matrix of multi-element optical systems 86 4.3.1 Jones equivalent theorems 86 4.3.2 Properties of the optical system containing only retarders and rotators 87 4.3.3 Eigenvector and eigenvalue of an optical system 90 4.3.3 Transmission properties of an optical system including partial polarizers 93 4.3.5 Experimental measurement of Jones matrix 97 4.4.6 Jones calculus in retracing optical path 99 4.3.7 N-matrix and polarization evolution 105 4.3.8 Jones matrix of twisted optical fiber 112 4.4 Mueller matrix representation of optical devices 117 4.4.1 Definition of Mueller matrix 117 4.4.2 Mueller matrix of optical elements 120 4.5 Polarization evolution in optical fiber 125 4.5.1 Rotation matrix representation of unitary optical systems 125 4.5.2 Infinitesimal rotation and rotation vector in optical fiber 128 4.5.3 Birefringence vector and polarization evolution along an optical fiber 132 4.5.4 PMD vector and polarization evolution with optical frequency 138 4.6 PMD measurement 143 4.6.1 Poincare sphere analysis 144 4.6.2 Mueller matrix method 147 4.6.4 Jones Matrix Eigenanalysis 149 4.7 Polarization properties of quasi-monochromatic Light 151 4.7.1 Coherency matrix 151 4.7.2 The Stokes parameters of quasi-monochromatic plane wave 156 4.7.3 Depolarization of quasi-monochromatic plane wave with birefringence media 159 References 164 Chapter 5 Polarization properties of common anisotropic media 166 5.1 Plane wave in anisotropic media 166 5.1.1 Dielectric tensor and its symmetry 166 5.1.2 Plane-wave propagation in anisotropic media 169 5.2 The index ellipsoid 172 5..2.1 Optical axis 173 5.2.2 ordinary and extraordinary wave 174 5.2.3 Light propagation in uniaxial crystals 175 5.2.4 Double refraction and applicaitons 178 5.3 Optical activity 181 5.4 Linear electro-optic effect 185 5.4.1 Electro-optic effect 185 5.4.2 Pockels electro-optic effect and electro-optic coefficient 186 5.4.3 Pockels effect of Lithium Niobate and applicaitons 188 5.5 Stress-induced birefringence 192 5.5.1 Stress-induced birefringence in glass 192 5.5.2 Stress-induced birefringence in optical fiber 195 References 195 Chapter 6 Polarization management components and devices 200 6.1 Polarization management fibers 200 6.2 Polarizers 202 6.2.1 Birefringence Crystal Polarizers 202 6.2.2 Sheet Polarizers 204 6.3 Polarization Beam Splitters/Combiners 206 6.3.1 Birefringence Crystal PBS 207 6.3.2 Thin film coating PBS 211 6.3.3 Fiber pigtailed polarizers and PBS 212 6.3.3 Waveguide PBS 214 6.4 Linear birefringence based polarization management components 214 6.4.1 Wave plates 214 6.4.2 Polarization manipulation with a quarter-wave plate 215 6.4.3 Polarization manipulation with a half-wave plate 216 6.5 Polarization control with linear birefringence 217 6.5.1 Polarization control with multiple waveplates of fixed retardation but variable orientation 218 6.5.2 Polarization controller with a single wave plate of variable retardation orientation 220 6.5.3 Polarization control with multiple wave-plates of variable retardation but fixed orientation 224 6.5.4 Polarization controller with LiNbO3 based integrated optical circuit (IOC) 226 6.5.5 Minimum-element polarization controllers 228 6.6 Polarization control with circular birefringence 229 6.6.1 Magneto-optic or Faraday materials 229 6.6.2 Magneto-optic properties of rear-earth iron garnet films 232 6.6.3 Faraday rotator based simple polarization management devices 239 6.6.4 Variable Faraday rotator based polarization controllers 242 6.6.5 Non-reciprocal fiber optic devices made with MO garnets 243 6.7 PMD and PDL artifacts 247 6.7.1 Differential group delay (DGD) artifacts 247 6.7.2 Second order polarization mode dispersion (SOPMD) artifacts 248 6.7.3 Polarization dependent loss (PDL) artifacts 249 6.8 Depolarizer 250 6.8.1 Space domain depolarizer 250 6.8.2 Time domain depolarizer 254 References 261 Bibliography 265 Chapter 7 Active polarization management modules and instruments 267 7.1 Polarization stabilization and tracking 267 7.1.1 Reset-free polarization control 267 7.1.2 Polarization monitoring for active polarization control 269 7.1.3 Polarization Synthesizer 269 7.1.4 General purpose polarization tracker 271 7.1.5 PMD compensation with a polarization tracker 272 7.1.6 Polarization demultiplexing with a polarization tracker 273 7.1.7 Polarization tracking for coherent detection 277 7.2 Polarization scrambling and emulation 278 7.2.1 Polarization scrambling basics 279 7.2.2 Polarization scrambling simulation 279 7.2.3 Variable rate polarization scrambling and emulation 280 7.2.4 Quasi-uniform rate polarization scrambling 282 7.2.5 Factors degrading the performance of the polarization scramblers 287 7.2.6 Polarization scrambler applications 287 7.3 PDL emulator 289 7.4 PMD generation and emulation 290 7.4.1 PMD generator and emulator based on polarization splitting and combining 291 7.4.2 PMD generator and emulator based on polarization switching 292 7.4.3 Polarization optimized PMD source 297 7.5 Polarization related tests in coherent systems 303 References 307 Chapter 8 Polarization related measurements for optical fiber systems 371 8.1 Stokes polarimeters for SOP and DOP measurements 371 8.1.1 Time division Stokes polarimetry 372 8.1.2 Amplitude division polarimeters 380 8.1.3 Advantages and disadvantages of different configurations 387 8.1.4 Polarimeter calibration with DOP 388 8.2 Analog Mueller matrix polarimetry 391 8.2.1 Rotating element Mueller matrix polarimeters 392 8.2.3 Oscillating element Mueller matrix polarimeters 394 8.2.4 Imperfections in Mueller matrix polarimeters and instrument calibration 395 8.3 Polarization extinction ratio measurements 395 8.3.1 Rotating polarizer PER measurement 397 8.3.2 PER degradation at fiber connection 398 8.3.3 Polarization maximization for fast PER measurement 399 8.3.4 PER measurement with a Stokes polarimter 400 8.3.5 Distributed Polarization Crosstalk Measurement Method 403 8.3.6 PER of free-space optical polarization components 404 8.4 PDL , PDG, and PDR measurements 404 8.4.1 Polarization scrambling method for PDL and PDG measurements 404 8.4.2 Jones and Mueller matrix analysis method 406 8.4.3 Maximum-minimum search method for accurate PDL and PDG measurements 406 8.4.4 PDL measurement guidelines 410 8.4.5 PDR measurement 413 References 415 Chapter 9 Binary polarization generation and analysis 425 9.1 Highly repeatable magneto-optic binary PSG 425 9.1.1 Binary PSG descriptions 426 9.1.2 Experimental demonstration 428 9.1.3 Imperfections of the binary PSG 431 9.2 Highly accurate binary magneto-optic polarization state analyzer (PSA) 439 9.2.1 Device description 439 9.2.2 Self-calibrating binary PSA 442 9.3 Binary Mueller matrix polarimetry 446 9.3.1 System description of binary Mueller matrix polarimetery 447 9.3.2 Theoretical background 448 9.3.3 Experimental results 451 9.4 Some applications of binary Mueller matrix polarization analyzers 458 9.4.1 PM fiber beat length measurement 458 9.4.2 Characterization of sensing coils for fiber optic gyroscopes 459 9.4.3 Circular birefringence measurement and spun fiber characterization 460 9.4.4 Effective Verdet constant measurement of spun optical fibers 467 9.4.5 Wave plate analyzer using binary magneto-optic rotators 478 9.4.6 PDL measurement of a Multi-port component using a binary PSG 483 9.5 Multi-channel binary PSA 485 9.6 WDM system performance monitoring using a multi-channel binary PSA 485 Appendix 9.A1 488 Appendix 9.A2 489 Referencences 489 Chapter 10 Distributed polarization analysis and its applications 497 10.1 Distributed polarization crosstalk analysis and its applications (CD-PDA) 498 10.1.1 Polarization crosstalk in PM fibers 498 10.1.2 Description of distributed polarization crosstalk analyzer (DPXA) 500 10.1.3 Identification of causes for polarization cross-talks from measurement results 503 10.1.4 Capabilities and limitations of DPXA 507 10.1.5 Applications of distributed polarization analysis 508 10.2 Distributed Mueller matrix polarimetery and its applications 526 10.2.1 System description 526 10.2.2 Expression of bending-induced birefringence in SMF 529 10.2.3 Measurement setup and results 530 10.2.4 Validations with a non-distributed Mueller matrix polarimetery system 533 10.2.5 Distributed transversal force sensing 536 10.2.6 Investigation clamping-force induced birefringence of SM fibers in V-grooves 549 10.3 Polarization scrambled OFDR for distributed birefringence measurement and stress sensing 559 10.4 P-OTDR based DPA system 564 References 566 Chapter 11 Polarization for optical frequency analysis and optical sensing applications 573 11.1 Optical frequency analysis techniques 573 11.1.1 Polarimeter based optical frequency analyzer 574 11.1.2 Sine-cosine optical frequency detection with polarization manipulation 583 11.2 Polarimetry fiber optic gyroscope 590 11.2.1 Introduction 590 11.2.2 Operation Principle 591 11.3 Polarimetric magnetic field and electrical current sensors 599 11.3.1 Transmissive magnetic and current sensors using MO garnet films 600 11.3.2 Reflective magnetic and current sensors using MO thick film as the sensing medium 604 11.3.3 Reflective current sensor using optical fiber as the sensing medium 607 References 610

Read more less

Book SynopsisA comprehensive source of in-depth informationprovidedon existing and emerging food technologies based on theelectromagneticspectrum Electromagnetic Technologies in Food Scienceexamines various methodsemployedin food applications that are based on the entire electromagnetic (EM) spectrum. Focusing on recent advances and challenges in food science and technology, thisis anup-to-date volumethatfeaturesvitalcontributionscomingfrom an international panel of expertswho havesharedboth fundamentaland advanced knowledgeof informationonthedosimetry methods,and on potential applications ofgamma irradiation, electron beams, X-rays, radio and microwaves, ultraviolet, visible, pulsed light, and more. Organized into four parts, the text begins with an accessible overview of the physics of the electromagnetic spectrum, followed by discussion onthe application of the EM spectrum to non-thermal food processing. The physics of infrared radiation, microwaves, and other advanced heating methods are thendeTable of ContentsList of Contributors xv Foreword xix Preface xxi 1 Physics of the Electromagnetic Spectrum 1 Michael Vollmer 1 Introduction 1 2 Description of Electromagnetic Waves 2 2.1 Properties of Waves 2 2.2 Spectrum of Electromagnetic Waves 5 3 Propagation of Electromagnetic Waves: Geometrical Versus Wave Optics 7 4 Description of Particle Properties of Electromagnetic Radiation 10 5 Exponential Attenuation of Electromagnetic Radiation in Matter 11 6 Microscopic Structure of Matter and Origin of EM Radiation 14 6.1 UV–VIS and Atomic Spectra 14 6.2 IR and Molecular Spectra 16 6.3 X- Rays and Excitations of Inner Electrons in Atoms 18 6.4 γ- Rays and Nuclear Spectra 19 6.5 Blackbody Radiation: Generating UV, VIS, and IR Radiation from Hot Objects 20 6.6 Generation of Microwave and RF EM Waves 21 7 Interaction of EM Radiation with Food 23 7.1 Low Frequencies: RF and Microwaves 23 7.2 IR Radiation 24 7.3 Visible and UV Radiation 25 7.4 X- Rays and γ- Radiation 27 7.4.1 Atomic Photo Effect 27 7.4.2 Compton Effect 28 7.4.3 Pair Generation Effect 28 7.4.4 Probabilities for Absorbing High- Energy Radiation 29 7.4.5 Consequence of Absorption of High- Energy Photons by Matter 29 8 Outlook 31 References 31 2 Dosimetry in Food Irradiation 33 Bhaskar Sanyal and Sunil K. Ghosh 1 Introduction 33 2 Fundamentals of Dosimetry 34 2.1 What is Dosimetry 35 2.2 Absorbed Dose 35 2.3 Physical Aspects of Radiation Absorption 36 2.3.1 Photoelectric Effect 36 2.3.2 Compton Scattering 36 2.3.3 Pair Production 36 2.3.4 Interaction of Charged Particles 37 3 Dosimetry Systems for Food Irradiation Application 37 3.1 Characterization of Dosimetry Systems 39 3.1.1 Calibrating the Dosimetry System 39 3.1.2 Establishing Traceability 39 3.1.3 Determining Batch Homogeneity 40 3.1.4 Determining Uncertainty in the Measured Dose Value 40 3.1.5 Understanding and Quantifying Effects of the Influencing Quantities 40 3.2 Specific Dosimetry Systems for Food Irradiation Applications 41 3.2.1 Chemical Dosimeter (Fricke and Ceric- cerous Sulphate) 41 3.2.2 Alanine Dosimeter 42 3.2.3 Radiochromic Dosimeter 42 3.3 Role of Product Density in the Absorbed Dose 43 4 Dosimetry in Food Irradiation Facility 43 4.1 Dosimetry in Radionuclide- Based Irradiation Facility 44 4.1.1 Dose Mapping Experiment 44 4.1.2 Routine Processing of Food Product 46 4.2 Dosimetry in Linear Accelerator (LINAC) Facility 46 5 Emerging Field of Dosimetry in Low- Energy Accelerator Irradiator for Surface Treatment of Food 49 6 Conclusion and Future Outlook 50 References 51 3 Gamma Irradiation 53 Xuetong Fan and Brendan A. Niemira 1 Introduction 53 2 Characteristics and Generation of γ- rays 54 3 Compton Effect 56 4 Basic Effects on Food: Interaction of γ-rays with Matter 57 5 Dose Unit, Dose Rate, and Dose Distribution 59 6 γ-ray Facility 60 7 Applications of γ-ray Radiation in Foods 60 7.1 Improving Microbial Safety 61 7.2 Preservation of Food 63 7.3 Phytosanitary Treatment 64 7.4 Applications on Low- Moisture Foods 64 7.5 Potential Uses of γ Irradiation for Degradation of Mycotoxin and Allergen 65 8 Factors Impacting the Efficacy of γ- rays 66 8.1 Temperature 66 8.2 Atmosphere 66 8.3 Water Activity 67 8.4 Composition of Foods (Antioxidants) 67 9 Conclusion 67 Acknowledgments 68 References 68 4 Electron Beams 74 Rajeev Bhat, Benny P. George, and Vicente M. Gómez- López 1 Introduction 74 2 Accelerator as a Source of Ionizing Radiation 76 3 Working Principle of EB Accelerator 77 4 Types of Industrial Electron Accelerators 77 5 Classification of Industrial Electron Beam (EB) Accelerators 78 6 Absorbed Dose 78 7 Radiation Dosimetry 79 7.1 Theoretical Aspect of EB Dosimetry 79 7.2 Practical Aspect of EB Dosimetry 79 7.3 Dosimetry Systems 80 7.4 Calibration of Dosimetry Systems 81 7.4.1 Performance Check of Measuring Instruments 81 7.4.2 Calibration of Routine Dosimeters 81 7.4.3 Establishing Measurement Traceability to National/International Standards 82 8 Scanning Characteristics of the Electron Beam Accelerator 82 9 Depth Dose Profile of Electron Beam 82 10 Process Validation of Industrial EB Accelerator 83 10.1 Installation Qualification (IQ) 84 10.2 Operational Qualification (OQ) 85 10.3 Performance Qualification (PQ) 85 10.4 Routine Monitoring 86 11 EB Irradiation in Food Applications 86 11.1 Mechanism 93 12 Legislations on Electron Beams Application 93 13 Conclusions and Future Outlook 96 Acknowledgements 97 Conflict of Interest Statement 97 References 97 5 X- Rays 105 Francesco E. Ricciardi, Amalia Conte, and Matteo A. Del Nobile 1 Introduction 105 1.1 Thermal and Non- thermal Technologies 105 1.2 Irradiation Technology 107 1.3 X- Rays 109 2 Mechanism of Action of X- Rays 109 3 Case Study 111 3.1 Seafood Products 111 3.2 Fresh and Dried Fruit 115 3.3 Dairy Products 116 3.4 Meat- Based Foods 118 4 Effects of X- Rays on Packaging 119 5 Regulation of X- Ray Irradiation 120 6 Conclusion and Future Outlook 122 References 122 6 Ultraviolet Light 128 Sandra N. Guerrero, Mariana Ferrario, Marcela Schenk, Daniela Fenoglio, and Antonella Andreone 1 Introduction 128 2 Characterization of UV- C Dose 130 3 Rational Use of the Hurdle Approach in the Design of Food Preservation Technologies 134 3.1 UV- C light–based Hurdle Combinations 136 3.1.1 Heat 136 3.1.2 UV- C Combined with Other Novel Technologies 153 3.1.3 UV- C Combined with the Addition of Natural Antimicrobials 162 3.1.4 UV- C Combined with Sanitizers 164 4 Conclusions and Future Perspectives 170 Acknowledgments 171 References 171 7 Visible Light 181 Laura M. Hinds, Mysore L. Bhavya, Colm P. O’Donnell, and Brijesh K. Tiwari 1 Introduction 181 2 Sources 182 3 Quantifying Light Treatment 183 4 Applications of Visible Light in the Food Industry 184 4.1 Postharvest Handling 184 4.2 Food Safety 186 5 Challenges and Limitations 194 6 Conclusion 194 References 194 8 Pulsed Light 200 Vicente M. Gómez- López, Rajeev Bhat, and José A. Pellicer 1 Introduction 200 2 Pulsed Light as a Technology Based on the Electromagnetic Spectrum 201 3 Photochemistry and Photophysics Laws 202 4 Factors Affecting Efficacy 203 5 Pulsed Light Systems 204 6 Effect on Microorganisms 205 6.1 Action Spectrum 205 6.2 Inactivation Mechanism 205 6.3 Photoreactivation 206 6.4 Sublethal Injury 207 6.5 Viable but Non- culturable State 207 7 Inactivation of Enzymes 207 8 Inactivation of Allergens 208 9 Effect on Lipids 209 10 Effect on Health- Related Compounds 209 11 Effect on Vitamin d 210 12 Effect on Pesticides 210 13 Energy Efficiency 211 14 Legislations (Regulations and Safety) of Pulsed Light 211 15 Conclusions and Future Outlook 212 Conflict of Interest Statement 212 References 212 9 Infrared Radiation 220 Yvan Llave and Noboru Sakai 1 Introduction 220 2 Fundamentals and Theory of Infrared Radiation 221 2.1 Principles of Infrared Radiation Heating 221 2.1.1 Infrared Wavelength 221 2.1.2 Basics Laws of Infrared Radiation 222 2.2 Characteristics of Thermal Radiation 224 2.2.1 Types of Infrared Radiation 224 2.2.2 Heat Generation 224 2.2.3 Sources of Infrared Heating 224 2.3 Special Features of Infrared Radiation 226 2.3.1 Factors Related to the Penetration of IR 226 2.3.2 Advantages of IR Processing 226 2.3.3 Limitations of Infrared Radiation Processing 227 2.4 Interaction of Infrared Radiation with Food 227 2.4.1 Fundamentals of Interaction with Foods 227 2.4.2 Selective Infrared Radiation Absorption of Foods 228 3 Infrared Radiative Properties of Food Materials 229 3.1 Attenuation of Radiation 229 3.2 Properties Related to the Radiative Heat Transfer of Foods 230 4 Applications of Infrared Radiation in Food Processing 230 4.1 Traditional Applications for Foods 230 4.1.1 Infrared Radiation Drying 230 4.1.2 Infrared Radiation Pasteurization 231 4.1.3 Infrared Radiation Grilling, Broiling, and Roasting 231 4.1.4 Infrared Radiation Blanching 231 4.1.5 Infrared Radiation Baking 235 4.1.6 Infrared Radiation Cooking 235 4.2 Rough Rice Drying 235 4.3 Fruit and Vegetable Peeling 236 4.4 Disinfestation and Pest Management 236 4.5 Surface Disinfection in the Food Industry 238 5 Integrated Heating Technologies 238 5.1 Infrared Radiation and Convective Heating 239 5.2 Infrared Radiation and Microwave Heating 240 5.3 Infrared Radiation and Freeze- Drying 241 5.4 Infrared Radiation and Vacuum Drying 241 6 Mathematical Modeling and Simulations 242 6.1 Basics of Computer Simulations of Infrared Radiation Processes 242 6.1.1 Moisture Transfer 243 6.1.2 Heat Transfer 243 6.1.3 Boundary Conditions 243 6.2 Heat and Mass Transfer Modeling of the Infrared Radiation Heating of Foods 244 6.3 Computer Simulations of Novel IR Heating Applications of Foods 244 7 Future Research to Enhance Practical Applications of Infrared Heating 247 8 Conclusions and Future Outlook 247 References 248 10 Microwaves 254 Rifna E. Jerome and Madhuresh Dwivedi 1 Introduction 254 2 Microwave Heating Mechanism and Principle 256 2.1 Dielectric Properties of Food Product 256 2.2 Factors Affecting Microwave Heating 259 2.2.1 Moisture Content and Temperature Dependency 259 2.2.2 Effect of Composition of Food Product 259 2.2.3 Effect of Microwave Frequency 260 2.2.4 Product Parameters 260 2.3 Non- uniformity in Temperature Distribution 260 3 Microwave Application in Food Industries 261 3.1 Microwave- Assisted Cooking and Baking 261 3.2 Microwave- assisted Drying 262 3.3 Microwave- Assisted Blanching 263 3.4 Microwave- Assisted Microbial Inactivation 263 3.5 Microwave- Assisted Extraction 264 4 Safety of Food Processed in Microwave for Consumers 265 5 Merits and De- merits of Microwave Heating Applications 265 6 Conclusion and Outlook 266 References 266 11 Radio Frequency 272 Shunshan Jiao, Eva Salazar, and Shaojin Wang 1 Introduction 272 2 Principle of RF Heating 273 2.1 Dielectric Properties 273 2.2 Governing Equation 274 2.3 Penetration Depth 275 3 Applications of RF Heating in Food Processing 275 3.1 Thawing 275 3.2 Drying 277 3.3 Disinfestation 279 3.3.1 For Fresh Fruits 279 3.3.2 For Grains 281 3.3.3 For Dried Fruits and Nuts 282 3.4 Microbial Inactivation 283 3.4.1 For Fruits and Vegetables 283 3.4.2 For Meat, Poultry Dairy, and Aquatic Products 283 3.4.3 For Grains, Nuts, and Spices 284 3.5 Enzyme Inactivation 285 3.5.1 Blanching 285 3.5.2 Stabilization 287 4 Conclusions and Future Outlook 288 References 289 12 Infrared Spectroscopy 298 Daniel Cozzolino 1 Introduction 298 2 The Electromagnetic Radiation 299 3 Sample Presentation 301 4 Mid- Infrared Spectroscopy – Instrumentation 302 5 Near- Infrared Spectroscopy – Instrumentation 303 6 Portability (Handheld Instruments) 304 7 Hyperspectral and Multispectral Image 304 8 Conclusions and Outlook 306 Acknowledgments 307 Conflict of Interest 307 References 307 13 Raman Spectroscopy 310 Dana Alina Magdas and Camelia Berghian- Grosan 1 Introduction 310 2 Raman Applications in Food and Beverages Studies 311 2.1 Honey 311 2.2 Edible Oils 315 2.3 Wines 321 2.4 Fruit Spirits 325 3 Conclusions and Future 328 Contribution Statement 329 Acknowledgments 329 Conflict of Interest 329 References 329 14 Visible Light Imaging 337 Maimunah Mohd Ali and Norhashila Hashim 1 Introduction 337 2 Principle of Visible Light Imaging 338 2.1 Development and Instrumentation 338 2.2 Hardware- Orientated Color System 339 2.3 Image Processing and Analysis 340 3 Applications of Visible Light Imaging in Food 341 3.1 Fruits and Vegetables 341 3.2 Meat, Fish, and Poultry 344 3.3 Nuts, Grains, and Dairy Products 347 3.4 Fats and Oils 349 3.5 Processed Foods 351 4 Advantages and Limitations 353 5 Future Trends 354 6 Conclusions and Outlook 355 Acknowledgment 356 Conflict of Interest 356 References 356 15 Hyperspectral Imaging 363 Antoni Femenias and Sonia Marín 1 Introduction 363 2 Fundamentals of the Hyperspectral Imaging 364 3 Image Calibration 366 4 Spectral Pre- processing 367 5 Model Calibration 367 6 Characteristic Wavelengths Extraction 369 7 Model Validation 369 8 Application of HSI for Plant Products Quality Assessment 370 8.1 Discrimination According to Quality Parameters 371 8.2 Quantification of Quality Parameters 374 9 Application of HSI for Safety Assessment in Fruits and Vegetables 376 10 Application of HSI for Microbiological Quality and Safety Assessment in Cereals, Nuts, and Dried ruits 377 10.1 Assessment of Fungal Damage 377 10.2 Assessment of Mycotoxin Contamination 379 10.2.1 Aflatoxins 379 10.2.2 Fusarium Toxins 382 11 Conclusions and Future Outlook 383 Acknowledgments 383 References 384 16 Future Challenges of Employing Electromagnetic Spectrum 391 Bibhuti B. Mishra and Prasad S. Variyar 1 Introduction 391 2 Challenges in γ Irradiation Processing of Food 393 2.1 Sources of Radiation: Cobalt 60 and Cesium 137, Electron Beam, and X- ray 393 2.2 Scope for Future Research in γ Radiation 394 2.3 Economic Considerations for Setting Up Facilities 396 3 Challenges in Using UV Light for Processing of Food 396 3.1 Design of UV Processing Equipment 397 3.2 UV for Disinfestation of Contact Surfaces in Food Processing Facilities 398 4 Challenges in Using Infrared (IR) for Processing of Food 398 4.1 Limitations of Infrared Processing 399 4.2 Selection of Infrared Emitters for Drying Applications 399 4.3 Future Scopes for IR Lamp Design Features 399 4.4 Novel IR Filament Material 400 4.5 Future of IR Drying 400 4.6 Scopes for Near- infrared (NIR) Spectroscopy in Industrial Food Processing 401 5 Challenges in Microwave Processing of Food 402 5.1 Microwave Cooking 402 5.2 Microwave Blanching 403 5.3 Microwave Pasteurization/Sterilization 403 5.4 Microwave- assisted Drying 403 5.5 Microwave- assisted Freeze Drying 404 5.6 Future of Applications of Microwave 404 6 Future Scopes for Radiofrequency Processing of Food 404 6.1 Improvement of RF- H Uniformity 405 6.2 Future Research on RF Heating Applications in Food 405 7 Current Problems and Future Prospects of Tetrahertz (THz) Technology 406 8 Regulations for Use of EM Spectrum 406 9 Conclusion and Outlook 407 References 408 Index 411

Read more less

Book SynopsisPEROVSKITE MATERIALS FOR ENERGY AND ENVIRONMENTAL APPLICATIONS The book provides a state-of-the-art summary and discussion about the recent progress in the development and engineering of perovskite solar cells materials along with the future directions it might take. Among all 3rd generation solar cells, perovskite solar cells have recently been attracting much attention and have also emerged as a hot research area of competing materials for silicon PV due to their easy fabrication, long charge-carrier lifetime, low binding energy, low defect density, and low cost. This book focuses primarily on the perovskite structures and utilizes them in modern technologies of photovoltaics and environmental applications. It will be unique in terms of the use of perovskite structures in solar cell applications. This book also discusses the type of perovskites, their synthetic approach, and environmental and solar cell applications. The book also covers how perovskite solar cells originated anTable of ContentsPreface xi 1 Computational Approach for Synthesis of Perovskite Solar Cells 1A.S. Mathur and B.P. Singh 1.1 Introduction 2 1.2 Preliminary Steps 2 1.3 Advanced Semiconductor Analysis (ASA) 15 1.4 Analysis of Microelectronic and Photonic Structures (AMPS) 20 1.5 Automat for Simulation of Heterostructures (AFORS-HET) 23 1.6 Solar Cell Capacitance Simulator (SCAPS) 26 1.7 Conclusion 31 References 32 2 Fundamentals of Perovskite Solar Cells 37Neha Patni, Rokadia Zulfiqar and Krishna Patel 2.1 Introduction 37 2.2 Structure 40 2.3 Working Mechanism of PSC 42 2.4 Device Architecture 43 2.4.1 Mesoporous Structure 43 2.4.2 Planar Heterostructures 45 2.5 Properties 46 2.5.1 High Optical Absorption 46 2.5.2 High Open-Circuit Voltage 47 2.5.3 Low Recombinations 48 2.5.4 Tunable Bandgap 49 2.5.4.1 Organic Cation (A) 49 2.5.4.2 Metal Cation (M) 50 2.5.4.3 Halide Anion (X) 51 2.5.5 Rapidly Increasing Efficiency 51 2.6 Drawbacks and Ongoing Challenges of PSCs 52 2.7 Conclusion 53 Acknowledgment 54 References 54 3 Surface Morphological Effects on the Performance of Perovskite Solar Cells 59Srinivasa Rao Pathipati 3.1 Introduction 59 3.2 Morphology Control 60 3.2.1 The Effect of Device Architecture on the Morphology and the Device Performance 60 3.2.2 Effect of Deposition Technique on the Morphology of the Perovskite Layer 62 3.2.2.1 One-Step Deposition Method 62 3.2.2.2 Two-Step Deposition Technique 64 3.2.2.3 Dual-Source Precursor Approach 69 3.2.2.4 Vacuum Deposition Technique 70 3.3 Effect of Various Parameters on Growth of Perovskite 71 3.3.1 Effect of Solvent Additive 71 3.3.2 Effect of Solid Additive 72 3.3.3 Seed-Induced Growth of Perovskites 73 3.3.4 Homogenous Cap-Induced Crystallization 75 3.3.5 Effect of Hydrophobicity 77 3.3.6 Effect of Interface Modification 81 3.3.7 Effect of Solvent Annealing 82 References 84 4 Advanced Synthesis Strategies for Single Crystal Perovskite Halides 91Prerna and Sandeep Arya 4.1 Introduction 91 4.2 Popular Single Crystal Growth Techniques 92 4.2.1 Anti-Solvent Vapor-Assisted Crystallization (AVC) Method 99 4.2.2 Inverse Temperature Crystallization (ITC) 101 4.2.3 Modified Inverse Temperature Crystallization 104 4.2.4 Solution Temperature Lowering Method 106 4.2.4.1 Top-Seeded Solution Growth Method 107 4.2.4.2 Bottom-Seeded Solution Growth Method 108 4.2.5 Bridgman (BG) Method 110 4.3 Other Techniques 113 Conclusions 117 References 118 5 Synchrotron-Based Techniques for Analysis of Perovskite Solar Cells 123Umar Farooq, Ruby Phul, Mohd Shabbir, Rizwan Arif and Akrema 5.1 Introduction 124 5.2 Synchrotron Techniques, Their Limitations and Advantages 128 5.3 Synchrotron Radiation X-Ray Diffraction/Scattering (SR-XRD) 128 5.4 In Situ XRD 131 5.5 Small-Angle X-Ray Scattering 133 5.6 Wide-Angle X-Ray Scattering 135 5.7 Synchrotron Radiation-Based X-Ray Absorption Techniques 135 5.8 X-Ray Absorption Near Edge Structure 137 5.9 Extended X-Ray Absorption Fine Structure 139 5.10 Conclusions 140 References 142 6 Recent Progress on Perovskite-Based Solar Cells 147Waseem Raza and Khursheed Ahmad 6.1 Introduction 148 6.2 Device Structure and Working Principle of PSCs 152 6.3 Perovskite-Based Solar Cells 153 6.4 Conclusion 161 References 161 7 BiFeO3-Based Materials For Augmented Photoactivity 167Rashmi Acharya, Lopamudra Acharya and Kulamani Parida 7.1 Introduction 168 7.1.1 Photocatalytic Water Splitting 171 7.1.2 Photocatalytic Conversion of CO2 171 7.1.3 Photocatalytic Fixation of Nitrogen 172 7.1.4 Selective Organic Transformation for the Synthesis of Fine Chemicals 172 7.1.5 Photodegradation of Pollutants 173 7.2 Structure, Physicochemical, and Photocatalytic Activity of BiFeO3 175 7.3 Elemental Doping in BFO 177 7.3.1 PXRD Studies 177 7.3.2 Morphological Studies 178 7.3.3 XPS Studies 179 7.3.4 Optical Property Studies 180 7.3.5 Effect of Doping on Photocatalytic Activity of BFO 182 7.4 BFO Semiconductor Heterojunction Construction 183 7.4.1 Heterojunction Construction With Wide Band Gap Semiconductors 184 7.4.2 Heterojunction Construction With Narrow Band Gap Semiconductors 193 7.5 Separation Ability and Reproducibility 198 7.6 Conclusion and Perspectives 199 7.7 Acknowledgement 200 References 201 8 Photocatalytic Degradation of Pollutants Using ZnTiO3-Based Semiconductor 217Waseem Raza and Khursheed Ahmad 8.1 Introduction 218 8.2 Synthesis of ZnTiO3 222 8.3 Fundamental Need and Basic Mechanism for Photocatalytic Degradation of Pollutants 223 8.4 Photocatalytic Degaradation of Pollutants Based on ZnTiO3 225 8.5 Conclusion 234 References 235 9 Types of Perovskite Materials 241Faria Khatoon Naqvi, Yashfeen Khan, Saba Beg and Anees Ahmad Abbreviations 241 9.1 Introduction 242 9.1.2 Types of Perovskite 243 9.1.2.1 ABO3 Type of Perovskite Materials 244 9.1.2.2 Oxygen and Cation-Deficient Perovskites 246 9.1.2.3 Complex Perovskites 247 9.1.2.4 Layered Perovskites 248 References 253 10 Effects of Various Additives to CH3NH3PbI3 Perovskite Solar Cells 257Takeo Oku 10.1 Introduction 257 10.2 Crystal Structures of Perovskite Halides 258 10.3 Basic Configuration of Solar Cells 260 10.4 Cl Doping to Perovskites 266 10.5 Sb or As Doping to Perovskites 270 10.6 Highly (100)-Oriented Perovskites 274 10.7 Cu Doping to Perovskites 279 10.8 K/FA Doping to Perovskites 283 10.9 Morphology Control by Polysilane 290 10.10 High-Temperature Annealed Perovskites 295 10.11 Conclusion 305 Acknowledgements 305 References 305 Index 317

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsPreface xi SECTION A VALUATION PRINCIPLES 1 1 Property Rights and Property Value 3 1.1 Property rights 3 1.1.1 Tenure 4 1.1.2 Property rights in England 6 1.2 Property value 8 1.2.1 Extent of property rights 9 1.2.2 Security of property rights 11 1.2.3 Physical and geographical characteristics 13 1.3 Property valuation 13 1.3.1 Market transactions 14 1.3.2 Investment decisions 15 1.3.3 Compensation 15 1.3.4 Land and property taxation 16 1.3.5 Accounting, lending and insurance 16 Note 18 References 18 2 The Economics of Property Value 19 2.1 Introduction 19 2.2 Land as a resource 19 2.3 Supply and demand, markets and equilibrium price determination 21 2.4 The property market and price determination 22 2.4.1 The property market 22 2.4.2 Price determination in the land market 23 2.4.3 Price determination in the property (land and buildings) market 26 2.5 Location and land use 29 2.6 Economics of property development 36 2.6.1 Type and density of development 36 2.6.2 Timing of development 38 2.7 Non-market concepts of value 40 Notes 42 References 42 3 Property Markets 45 3.1 Introduction 45 3.2 Property markets 46 3.2.1 Occupier market 47 3.2.2 Investment market 59 3.2.3 Development market 63 3.3 Property markets interaction 69 Note 72 References 72 4 Valuation Mathematics 75 4.1 Introduction 75 4.2 The time value of money 76 4.3 Single-sum investments 77 4.4 Multi-period investments 78 4.4.1 Level annuities 78 4.4.2 From a level annuity to a growth annuity 82 4.5 Timing of receipts 83 4.6 Yields 84 4.7 Rates of return 85 Notes 90 References 91 5 Valuation Process and Governance 101 5.1 Valuation process 101 5.1.1 Confirm instruction and agree terms of engagement 101 5.1.2 Inspect the property 103 5.1.3 Gather and analyse comparable evidence 104 5.1.4 Establish basis of value 106 5.1.5 Make assumptions and special assumptions as appropriate 109 5.1.6 Select valuation approach(es) and method(s) and undertake the valuation 110 5.1.7 Produce a valuation report 110 5.2 Valuation governance 112 5.2.1 Standards of conduct 113 5.2.2 Valuation process standards 115 5.2.3 International valuation standards 115 5.2.4 National valuation standards 116 5.3 Valuation systems 117 5.3.1 Information systems 119 5.3.2 Valuation capacity 121 5.3.3 Professional valuers associations 122 5.4 Conclusion 125 Notes 127 References 127 SECTION B VALUATION APPROACHES AND METHODS 129 6 Market Approach 131 6.1 Introduction 131 6.2 The comparison method 132 6.2.1 Collect comparable evidence of market transactions 132 6.2.2 Identification of value-significant characteristics 134 6.2.3 Adjustment of value-significant characteristics 139 6.3 Hedonic regression method 150 6.3.1 Simple linear regression 151 6.3.2 Multiple linear regression 156 Notes 168 References 168 7 Income Approach 173 7.1 Introduction 173 7.2 Income capitalisation method 174 7.2.1 Perpetual annuities (freeholds) 175 7.2.2 Annuities with a term certain (leaseholds) 179 7.3 Discounted cash-flow method 183 7.3.1 A discounted Cash-Flow valuation model 184 7.3.2 Perpetual annuities 190 7.3.3 Annuities with a term certain 193 7.4 Profits method 195 7.4.1 Method 196 Notes 204 References 204 8 Cost Approach 235 8.1 Introduction 235 8.2 Replacement cost method 236 8.2.1 Replacement cost 236 8.2.2 Depreciation 237 8.2.3 Land value 240 8.2.4 Application of the replacement cost method 242 8.2.5 Issues arising from the application of the replacement cost method 243 8.3 Residual method 245 8.3.1 Basic residual technique 246 8.3.2 Basic residual profit appraisal 254 8.3.3 Discounted cash-flow Technique 255 Notes 260 References 260 SECTION C VALUATION APPLICATION 271 9 Valuation of Investment Property 273 9.1 Introduction 273 9.2 Analysis of rents 274 9.2.1 Rental lease incentives 274 9.2.2 Capital lease incentives 277 9.2.3 ‘Surrendered’ leases 280 9.2.4 Repairs, insurance, and ground rents 281 9.2.5 Rent-review pattern 283 9.3 Analysis of yields 284 9.3.1 Equivalent yield 284 9.3.2 Weighted average unexpired lease term 285 9.4 Market valuation of investment property 285 9.4.1 Voids and break options 285 9.4.2 Statutory considerations 288 9.4.3 Over-rented properties 294 9.4.4 Turnover leases 296 9.4.5 Long lease investments 299 9.4.6 Synergistic value 299 9.5 Investment valuation of investment property 302 9.5.1 Inputs and assumptions 303 9.5.2 Investment valuation using a discounted cash flow 306 References 311 10 Valuation of Development Property 359 10.1 Introduction 359 10.2 Market valuation of development property 359 10.2.1 Comparison method 361 10.2.2 Residual method 362 10.3 Investment valuation of development property 369 10.3.1 Estimating the investment value of development property 369 10.3.2 Financial appraisals of development property 372 References 381 11 Valuations for Financial Statements and for Secured Lending 401 11.1 Valuing property for financial statements 401 11.1.1 Basis of reporting measurement 402 11.1.2 Property categorisation 403 11.1.3 Basis of value 405 11.1.4 Valuation 407 11.1.5 Other issues 411 11.1.6 Example valuations 413 11.2 Valuing property for secured lending purposes 415 11.2.1 Professional standards and guidance 416 11.2.2 Valuation methods for loan security valuations 420 11.2.3 Example valuation 420 11.2.4 Reinstatement cost assessment 424 Note 424 References 424 12 Valuations for Land and Property Taxation 449 12.1 Introduction 449 12.2 A land tax or a land and property tax? 450 12.3 Types of land and property taxes 452 12.3.1 Occupation taxes 453 12.3.2 Transfer and wealth taxes 455 12.3.3 Betterment taxation 455 12.4 Land and property taxation in england and wales 456 12.4.1 Occupation taxes 457 12.4.2 Transfer and wealth taxes 466 12.4.3 Betterment taxation in England 469 Notes 472 References 472 13 Valuations for Expropriation 477 13.1 Introduction 477 13.2 Valuation for expropriation 478 13.2.1 Valuing property rights that are to be taken or extinguished 478 13.2.2 Valuing retained property rights 479 13.2.3 Valuing compensation for disturbance 479 13.2.4 Valuing customary and informal land for expropriation purposes 480 13.2.5 Expropriation and non-market value 481 13.3 Valuations for compulsory purchase and planning compensation in England 482 13.3.1 Legal background 482 13.3.2 Compensation for land2 taken (compulsorily acquired) 483 13.3.3 Identifying the planning position 486 13.3.4 Compensation for severance and injurious affection 487 13.3.5 Compensation for disturbance and other losses 491 13.4 Planning compensation in England 493 13.4.1 Revocation, modification and discontinuance orders 493 13.4.2 Purchase notices 493 13.4.3 Blight compensation 494 Notes 494 References 495 14 Valuation Variance, Risk and Optionality 499 14.1 Introduction 499 14.2 Valuation accuracy and valuation variance 500 14.3 Analysing risk 502 14.3.1 Sensitivity analysis 503 14.3.2 Scenario modelling 504 14.3.3 Simulation 506 14.4 Flexibility and options 511 14.5 Uncertainty 513 References 515 Appendix A: Land Uses and Valuation Methods 525 Glossary 529 Index 000

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsPreface xv 1 In Silico Molecular Modeling and Docking Analysis in Lung Cancer Cell Proteins 1Manisha Sritharan and Asita Elengoe 1.1 Introduction 2 1.2 Methodology 4 1.2.1 Sequence of Protein 4 1.2.2 Homology Modeling 4 1.2.3 Physiochemical Characterization 4 1.2.4 Determination of Secondary Models 4 1.2.5 Determination of Stability of Protein Structures 4 1.2.6 Identification of Active Site 4 1.2.7 Preparation of Ligand Model 5 1.2.8 Docking of Target Protein and Phytocompound 5 1.3 Results and Discussion 5 1.3.1 Determination of Physiochemical Characters 5 1.3.2 Prediction of Secondary Structures 7 1.3.3 Verification of Stability of Protein Structures 7 1.3.4 Identification of Active Sites 14 1.3.5 Target Protein-Ligand Docking 14 1.4 Conclusion 18 References 18 2 Medical Data Classification in Cloud Computing Using Soft Computing With Voting Classifier: A Review 23Saurabh Sharma, Harish K. Shakya and Ashish Mishra 2.1 Introduction 24 2.1.1 Security in Medical Big Data Analytics 24 2.1.1.1 Capture 24 2.1.1.2 Cleaning 25 2.1.1.3 Storage 25 2.1.1.4 Security 26 2.1.1.5 Stewardship 26 2.2 Access Control–Based Security 27 2.2.1 Authentication 27 2.2.1.1 User Password Authentication 28 2.2.1.2 Windows-Based User Authentication 28 2.2.1.3 Directory-Based Authentication 28 2.2.1.4 Certificate-Based Authentication 28 2.2.1.5 Smart Card–Based Authentication 29 2.2.1.6 Biometrics 29 2.2.1.7 Grid-Based Authentication 29 2.2.1.8 Knowledge-Based Authentication 29 2.2.1.9 Machine Authentication 29 2.2.1.10 One-Time Password (OTP) 30 2.2.1.11 Authority 30 2.2.1.12 Global Authorization 30 2.3 System Model 30 2.3.1 Role and Purpose of Design 31 2.3.1.1 Patients 31 2.3.1.2 Cloud Server 31 2.3.1.3 Doctor 31 2.4 Data Classification 32 2.4.1 Access Control 32 2.4.2 Content 33 2.4.3 Storage 33 2.4.4 Soft Computing Techniques for Data Classification 34 2.5 Related Work 36 2.6 Conclusion 42 References 43 3 Research Challenges in Pre-Copy Virtual Machine Migration in Cloud Environment 45Nirmala Devi N. and Vengatesh Kumar S. 3.1 Introduction 46 3.1.1 Cloud Computing 46 3.1.1.1 Cloud Service Provider 47 3.1.1.2 Data Storage and Security 47 3.1.2 Virtualization 48 3.1.2.1 Virtualization Terminology 49 3.1.3 Approach to Virtualization 50 3.1.4 Processor Issues 51 3.1.5 Memory Management 51 3.1.6 Benefits of Virtualization 51 3.1.7 Virtual Machine Migration 51 3.1.7.1 Pre-Copy 52 3.1.7.2 Post-Copy 52 3.1.7.3 Stop and Copy 53 3.2 Existing Technology and Its Review 54 3.3 Research Design 56 3.3.1 Basic Overview of VM Pre-Copy Live Migration 57 3.3.2 Improved Pre-Copy Approach 58 3.3.3 Time Series–Based Pre-Copy Approach 60 3.3.4 Memory-Bound Pre-Copy Live Migration 62 3.3.5 Three-Phase Optimization Method (TPO) 62 3.3.6 Multiphase Pre-Copy Strategy 64 3.4 Results 65 3.4.1 Finding 65 3.5 Discussion 69 3.5.1 Limitation 69 3.5.2 Future Scope 70 3.6 Conclusion 70 References 71 4 Estimation and Analysis of Prediction Rate of Pre-Trained Deep Learning Network in Classification of Brain Tumor MRI Images 73Krishnamoorthy Raghavan Narasu, Anima Nanda, Marshiana D., Bestley Joe and Vinoth Kumar 4.1 Introduction 74 4.2 Classes of Brain Tumors 75 4.3 Literature Survey 76 4.4 Methodology 78 4.5 Conclusion 93 References 95 5 An Intelligent Healthcare Monitoring System for Coma Patients 99Bethanney Janney J., T. Sudhakar, Sindu Divakaran, Chandana H. and Caroline Chriselda L. 5.1 Introduction 100 5.2 Related Works 102 5.3 Materials and Methods 104 5.3.1 Existing System 104 5.3.2 Proposed System 105 5.3.3 Working 105 5.3.4 Module Description 106 5.3.4.1 Pulse Sensor 106 5.3.4.2 Temperature Sensor 107 5.3.4.3 Spirometer 107 5.3.4.4 OpenCV (Open Source Computer Vision) 108 5.3.4.5 Raspberry Pi 108 5.3.4.6 USB Camera 109 5.3.4.7 AVR Module 109 5.3.4.8 Power Supply 109 5.3.4.9 USB to TTL Converter 110 5.3.4.10 EEG of Comatose Patients 110 5.4 Results and Discussion 111 5.5 Conclusion 116 References 117 6 Deep Learning Interpretation of Biomedical Data 121T.R. Thamizhvani, R. Chandrasekaran and T.R. Ineyathendral 6.1 Introduction 122 6.2 Deep Learning Models 125 6.2.1 Recurrent Neural Networks 125 6.2.2 LSTM/GRU Networks 127 6.2.3 Convolutional Neural Networks 128 6.2.4 Deep Belief Networks 130 6.2.5 Deep Stacking Networks 131 6.3 Interpretation of Deep Learning With Biomedical Data 132 6.4 Conclusion 139 References 140 7 Evolution of Electronic Health Records 143G. Umashankar, Abinaya P., J. Premkumar, T. Sudhakar and S. Krishnakumar 7.1 Introduction 143 7.2 Traditional Paper Method 144 7.3 IoMT 144 7.4 Telemedicine and IoMT 145 7.4.1 Advantages of Telemedicine 145 7.4.2 Drawbacks 146 7.4.3 IoMT Advantages with Telemedicine 146 7.4.4 Limitations of IoMT With Telemedicine 147 7.5 Cyber Security 147 7.6 Materials and Methods 147 7.6.1 General Method 147 7.6.2 Data Security 148 7.7 Literature Review 148 7.8 Applications of Electronic Health Records 150 7.8.1 Clinical Research 150 7.8.1.1 Introduction 150 7.8.1.2 Data Significance and Evaluation 151 7.8.1.3 Conclusion 151 7.8.2 Diagnosis and Monitoring 151 7.8.2.1 Introduction 151 7.8.2.2 Contributions 152 7.8.2.3 Applications 152 7.8.3 Track Medical Progression 153 7.8.3.1 Introduction 153 7.8.3.2 Method Used 153 7.8.3.3 Conclusion 154 7.8.4 Wearable Devices 154 7.8.4.1 Introduction 154 7.8.4.2 Proposed Method 155 7.8.4.3 Conclusion 155 7.9 Results and Discussion 155 7.10 Challenges Ahead 157 7.11 Conclusion 158 References 158 8 Architecture of IoMT in Healthcare 161A. Josephin Arockia Dhiyya 8.1 Introduction 161 8.1.1 On-Body Segment 162 8.1.2 In-Home Segment 162 8.1.3 Network Segment Layer 163 8.1.4 In-Clinic Segment 163 8.1.5 In-Hospital Segment 163 8.1.6 Future of IoMT? 164 8.2 Preferences of the Internet of Things 165 8.2.1 Cost Decrease 165 8.2.2 Proficiency and Efficiency 165 8.2.3 Business Openings 165 8.2.4 Client Experience 166 8.2.5 Portability and Nimbleness 166 8.3 loMT Progress in COVID-19 Situations: Presentation 167 8.3.1 The IoMT Environment 168 8.3.2 IoMT Pandemic Alleviation Design 169 8.3.3 Man-Made Consciousness and Large Information Innovation in IoMT 170 8.4 Major Applications of IoMT 171 References 172 9 Performance Assessment of IoMT Services and Protocols 173A. Keerthana and Karthiga 9.1 Introduction 174 9.2 IoMT Architecture and Platform 175 9.2.1 Architecture 176 9.2.2 Devices Integration Layer 177 9.3 Types of Protocols 177 9.3.1 Internet Protocol for Medical IoT Smart Devices 177 9.3.1.1 HTTP 178 9.3.1.2 Message Queue Telemetry Transport (MQTT) 179 9.3.1.3 Constrained Application Protocol (CoAP) 180 9.3.1.4 AMQP: Advanced Message Queuing Protocol (AMQP) 181 9.3.1.5 Extensible Message and Presence Protocol (XMPP) 181 9.3.1.6 DDS 183 9.4 Testing Process in IoMT 183 9.5 Issues and Challenges 185 9.6 Conclusion 185 References 185 10 Performance Evaluation of Wearable IoT-Enabled Mesh Network for Rural Health Monitoring 187G. Merlin Sheeba and Y. Bevish Jinila 10.1 Introduction 188 10.2 Proposed System Framework 190 10.2.1 System Description 190 10.2.2 Health Monitoring Center 192 10.2.2.1 Body Sensor 192 10.2.2.2 Wireless Sensor Coordinator/Transceiver 192 10.2.2.3 Ontology Information Center 195 10.2.2.4 Mesh Backbone-Placement and Routing 196 10.3 Experimental Evaluation 200 10.4 Performance Evaluation 201 10.4.1 Energy Consumption 201 10.4.2 Survival Rate 201 10.4.3 End-to-End Delay 202 10.5 Conclusion 204 References 204 11 Management of Diabetes Mellitus (DM) for Children and Adults Based on Internet of Things (IoT) 207Krishnakumar S., Umashankar G., Lumen Christy V., Vikas and Hemalatha R.J. 11.1 Introduction 208 11.1.1 Prevalence 209 11.1.2 Management of Diabetes 209 11.1.3 Blood Glucose Monitoring 210 11.1.4 Continuous Glucose Monitors 211 11.1.5 Minimally Invasive Glucose Monitors 211 11.1.6 Non-Invasive Glucose Monitors 211 11.1.7 Existing System 211 11.2 Materials and Methods 212 11.2.1 Artificial Neural Network 212 11.2.2 Data Acquisition 213 11.2.3 Histogram Calculation 213 11.2.4 IoT Cloud Computing 214 11.2.5 Proposed System 215 11.2.6 Advantages 215 11.2.7 Disadvantages 215 11.2.8 Applications 216 11.2.9 Arduino Pro Mini 216 11.2.10 LM78XX 217 11.2.11 MAX30100 218 11.2.12 LM35 Temperature Sensors 218 11.3 Results and Discussion 219 11.4 Summary 222 11.5 Conclusion 222 References 223 12 Wearable Health Monitoring Systems Using IoMT 225Jaya Rubi and A. Josephin Arockia Dhivya 12.1 Introduction 225 12.2 IoMT in Developing Wearable Health Surveillance System 226 12.2.1 A Wearable Health Monitoring System with Multi-Parameters 227 12.2.2 Wearable Input Device for Smart Glasses Based on a Wristband-Type Motion-Aware Touch Panel 228 12.2.3 Smart Belt: A Wearable Device for Managing Abdominal Obesity 228 12.2.4 Smart Bracelets: Automating the Personal Safety Using Wearable Smart Jewelry 228 12.3 Vital Parameters That Can Be Monitored Using Wearable Devices 229 12.3.1 Electrocardiogram 230 12.3.2 Heart Rate 231 12.3.3 Blood Pressure 232 12.3.4 Respiration Rate 232 12.3.5 Blood Oxygen Saturation 234 12.3.6 Blood Glucose 235 12.3.7 Skin Perspiration 236 12.3.8 Capnography 238 12.3.9 Body Temperature 239 12.4 Challenges Faced in Customizing Wearable Devices 240 12.4.1 Data Privacy 240 12.4.2 Data Exchange 240 12.4.3 Availability of Resources 241 12.4.4 Storage Capacity 241 12.4.5 Modeling the Relationship Between Acquired Measurement and Diseases 242 12.4.6 Real-Time Processing 242 12.4.7 Intelligence in Medical Care 242 12.5 Conclusion 243 References 244 13 Future of Healthcare: Biomedical Big Data Analysis and IoMT 247Tamiziniyan G. and Keerthana A. 13.1 Introduction 248 13.2 Big Data and IoT in Healthcare Industry 250 13.3 Biomedical Big Data Types 251 13.3.1 Electronic Health Records 252 13.3.2 Administrative and Claims Data 252 13.3.3 International Patient Disease Registries 252 13.3.4 National Health Surveys 253 13.3.5 Clinical Research and Trials Data 254 13.4 Biomedical Data Acquisition Using IoT 254 13.4.1 Wearable Sensor Suit 254 13.4.2 Smartphones 255 13.4.3 Smart Watches 255 13.5 Biomedical Data Management Using IoT 256 13.5.1 Apache Spark Framework 257 13.5.2 MapReduce 258 13.5.3 Apache Hadoop 258 13.5.4 Clustering Algorithms 259 13.5.5 K-Means Clustering 259 13.5.6 Fuzzy C-Means Clustering 260 13.5.7 DBSCAN 261 13.6 Impact of Big Data and IoMT in Healthcare 262 13.7 Discussions and Conclusions 263 References 264 14 Medical Data Security Using Blockchain With Soft Computing Techniques: A Review 269Saurabh Sharma, Harish K. Shakya and Ashish Mishra 14.1 Introduction 270 14.2 Blockchain 272 14.2.1 Blockchain Architecture 272 14.2.2 Types of Blockchain Architecture 273 14.2.3 Blockchain Applications 274 14.2.4 General Applications of the Blockchain 276 14.3 Blockchain as a Decentralized Security Framework 277 14.3.1 Characteristics of Blockchain 278 14.3.2 Limitations of Blockchain Technology 280 14.4 Existing Healthcare Data Predictive Analytics Using Soft Computing Techniques in Data Science 281 14.4.1 Data Science in Healthcare 281 14.5 Literature Review: Medical Data Security in Cloud Storage 281 14.6 Conclusion 286 References 287 15 Electronic Health Records: A Transitional View 289Srividhya G. 15.1 Introduction 289 15.2 Ancient Medical Record, 1600 BC 290 15.3 Greek Medical Record 291 15.4 Islamic Medical Record 291 15.5 European Civilization 292 15.6 Swedish Health Record System 292 15.7 French and German Contributions 293 15.8 American Descriptions 293 15.9 Beginning of Electronic Health Recording 297 15.10 Conclusion 298 References 298 Index 301

Read more less